Giáo án Tiếng Anh - Giáo án dạy thêm Tiếng Anh lớp 7 soạn theo chương trình thí điểm mới đủ nhất

GIÁO ÁN DẠY HỌC TIẾNG ANH LỚP 7

vectorstock.com/13556578

Ths Nguyễn Thanh Tú eBook Collection DẠY KÈM QUY NHƠN LESSON PLAN PHÁT TRIỂN NỘI DUNG

Giáo án Tiếng Anh - Giáo án dạy thêm Tiếng Anh lớp 7 soạn theo chương trình thí điểm mới đủ nhất (2019-2020) GV Vũ Xuân Minh WORD VERSION | 2020 EDITION ORDER NOW / CHUYỂN GIAO QUA EMAIL TAILIEUCHUANTHAMKHAO@GMAIL.COM Tài liệu chuẩn tham khảo Phát triển kênh bởi Ths Nguyễn Thanh Tú Đơn vị tài trợ / phát hành / chia sẻ học thuật : Nguyen Thanh Tu Group Hỗ trợ trực tuyến Fb www.facebook.com/DayKemQuyNhon Mobi/Zalo 0905779594

Date of preparing: September 4th, 2019

Period 1:

Revision

I. Objectives: - By the end of the lesson Ss can review what they have learnt in English 6.

II. Language content: Grammar in grade 6 III.Teaching aids: - Extra - board.

IV. Procedure : Teacher and students * Revision : - T & Ss revise tenses, comparison and some structures in English 6. * Exercises : Question I : Choose the correct answers 1 A. dad B. hat C. plant D. happy 2. A. favourite B. slight C. fine D. high 3. A. gather B. month C. father D. brother 4. A. that B. tap C. backpack D. classmate Question II : Give the correct form of the verbs 1. He ( not meet ) his sister for 6 months.

2. If she ( not eat ) less, she ( be ) fat.

3. They ( go ) out last night? – No, they ( stay ) at home and ( watch ) TV. 4. She might ( live ) with her aunt in Ha Noi. 5. Tuan usually ( have ) breakfast at 6 o’clock. ( Class 6A )Question III : Complete the following sentences using given words: 1. soil / plants/ if / the / will / polluted / is / die.

2. on / be / there / Friday / meeting / will / a .

3. housework / help / might / robots / do / the / think / us / I. 4. rooms / in / there / house / be / four / will / my.

Board and content - Calls some Ss come to the board and give the answers - Corrects and give the correct answers.

Question I: 1C 2A

3B

4D

Question II: 1.hasn’t met 2. doesn’t eat - will be 3. Did they go - stayed watched Question III: 1. If the soil is polluted, plants will die 2. There will be a meeting on Friday 3. I think robots might help us do the housework .

4. There will be four rooms in my house.

1

GV: Vũ Xuân Minh

Năm học: 2019- 2020

Question IV : Complete the following sentences with suitable prepositions: 1. You should have a shower instead ……….... a bath.

2. I have bought a lot ……………….... things yesterday.

3. What type ……………….... house do you think it is ?

4. He can’t go with us because he has to look ……………….... his younger brother.

Question IV: 1. of 2. of 3. of 4. after

* Adjustment: ...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ......................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

2

GV: Vũ Xuân Minh

Năm học: 2019- 2020

Date of preparing: September 5th, 2017

Period 2 :

Unit 1:

My new school

Lesson 1: Getting Started I. Objectives : - By the end of the lesson Ss can understand “ favourite hobby”, review vocabs about giving opinions about hobbies.

- Training listening, reading, speaking, writing skills.

7A : Using some verbs they have learnt to add to the list.

II. Language content : 1. Vocab : Related to hobbies 2. Grammar : Revision present simple and future simple III. Teaching aids: - Pictures, posters, cassette & tape.

IV. Teaching steps : Teacher and Students

Board & contents

Warm up (Network) -Have Ss work in 2 teams -Get Ss to write down vocabs about hobbies.

-Give feed back and decide which is the winner of the game.

-Provide some more vocabs about hobbies.

A. WARM UP. (Network) Going fishing

-Present new words.

B. NEW LESSON * Vocabulary - collect (v): sưu tầm, thu nhặt - unusual (adj): k binh thường - occasion (n): dịp - special occasion(n): dịp đặc biệt - a piece (of) (n): 1 miếng, mẩu

- Check: Rub out and Remember.

Your hobbies

3

GV: Vũ Xuân Minh

Năm học: 2019- 2020

1. Listen and Read ? Look at the picture.

Who are they ?

What are they ?

Do you like these dolls ?

- Have Ss listen to the tape then get them to do the true, false exercise.

-Get them to read aloud the answers.

-Ask Ss to read the text again and check.

-Give feed back.

- Then ask Ss to read the conversation again to answer the questions.

- Call some Ss to give the answers aloud.

- Correct some.

1.Listen & Read

a. *Answers: 1F 2T 3F 4F 5F b. *Answers: 1.on special occasions 2. No, they aren’t 3. she just keep the bottles after they use them.

4. No, she doesn’t.

5. No, he doesn’t 2. Listen and read.

-Plays the recording. Let the whole class listen and read the p2 . Ask qs to check Ss’ understanding of the words and phrase words.

- some ss read again and others correct.

3. Matching.

- Asks Ss to match the words in p2 with the right Answer key: pictures.

1. playing board games - Calls some Ss to give the answers 2. taking photos 3. bird-watching 4. cycling 5. ..........

- Asks Ss to work in pairs and complete the tables - some pairs give the answers aloud. *? Add some other hobbies to the list

4. Comlete the table * cheap hobbies: ........ * expensive hobbies: ...... * easy hobbies : ...... * difficult hobbies : .......

- Exlain how to play game find someone who...

5. Game : find someone who......

4

GV: Vũ Xuân Minh

Năm học: 2019- 2020

C. CONSOLIDATION - descibe the hobbies Homework -Sumarize the main point of the lesson.

-Asign home work.

- Learn by heart new vocabulary - Practice reading “Listen and read” -Prepare new lesson: A closer look 1.

* Adjustment: ........................................................................................................................................ ........................................................................................................................................ ........................................................................................................................................

5

GV: Vũ Xuân Minh

Năm học: 2019- 2020

Date of preparing: September 10th, 2017

Period 3 :

Unit 1: My new school Lesson 2:

A closer look 1

I. Objectives : - By the end of the lesson Ss can use the words /phrases indicating the hobbies they learnt in the previous lesson. Move on to this lesson which focuses on hobbies,action verbs,and the sounds / / and / / .

Class 7A: Provides some idioms “It’s a piece of cake”, “ as easy as pie/as ABC” and “all of a piece” we can translate into Vietnamese ( đơn giản,dễ như ăn kẹo ,dễ ơt.)

II. Language content : 1. Vocab : Revision vocab and action verbs related to hobbies.

2. Grammar : - words go with: go, do, collect III. Teaching aids: - Pictures, posters, cassette & tape.

IV. Teaching steps: Teacher and Students Warm up: Make up some questions to ask students : + What are your hobbies ? + What are they ? ...........

-Present new words.

- Check: Rub out and Remember.

Vocabulary : 1 / Have SS read the action verbs in column Aand match them with the suitable words/phases in column B. Remind them that a verb can go with more than one word/phases.

Sswork in pairs to compare their answer before going T the answers. Check and confirm the correct answer .

Board & contents A. Warm up: Listen and answer themselves.

B. NEW LESSON* Vocabulary - horse – riding : cưỡi ngựa - gymnastics: tập thể dục - gardening : làm vườn - keep fit : cơ thể cân đối - sweet melody : gia điệu ngot ngào - share : cùng ,chia sẻ - keywords: từ khóa Key: 1.d,e,i 2.g 3.b,c,j 4.f,h 5.c 6.a 6

GV: Vũ Xuân Minh

Năm học: 2019- 2020

*? Find other words go with : go, do, collect, play, take 2/ Ss work in pairs to do this activity. Have Ss read all the sentences carefully to make sure they understand the sentences.Ss share their answers .

-Write the correct answers on the board 3/ Ask SS if they know what a key word is.

Explain that a keyword help ss understand a text quickly and it is usually a noun ,a verb, an adjective or an adverb. Model the way to locate keywords for “listening to music” -Have ss look at sentence 2 in activity 2 and read out the keywords -In pairs ss do the same .ss can add more word to the table.

-call on ss from diffirent pairs to go to the board and write the word.

4/ Ss work in groups to play the guessing game.One student is the group leader who records other ss’points. One studentis the group secretary who write down other’s hobbies.

When time is up, call on some group secretaries to share the group’s hobbies.

Pronunciation: / / and / / 5/ Have some ss read out the word first .Then play the recording .Ask ss to listen and tick the words they hear. Play the recording as many times as necessary.

6/ Play the recording again .

7/ Ss do this exercises individuallly fisrt then compare their answers with a partner.

- Ask ss tell about their parents’ hobbies Homework -Sumarize the main point of the lesson.

- home work. * Adjustment:

Key 1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

swimming,swim listen.listening to music plant,gardening catch.fishing painting, paints

The pair with the most words is winner.

Listen to music :melody,song headphones,noise,rhythm,lyrics ...

Gardening:trees,flowers,garden,plant, vegetables,grow,fruit....

Fishing: lake, exciting. catching, fish, water,boat, ......

Painting: creative,colors, picture, artist, painting Swimming: pool, fun, water, keep fit swim ,..... *Ss play game :

Key: Answer, away,neighbor,burn, hurt , heard, birth, common .

C. CONSOLIDATION - Learn by heart new vocabulary -Prepare new lesson: A closer look 2

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................ .......................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

7

GV: Vũ Xuân Minh

Năm học: 2019- 2020

Date of preparing: September 12th, 2017

Period 4 :

Unit 1: My new school Lesson 3:

A closer look 2

I. Objectives: - Review Present simple and the future simple tenses.

- Practice speaking, reading and writing using these tenses Class 7A : - Complete the table, then write a short paragraph similar to modal exercise.

II. Language content : 1. Vocab : Revision 2. Grammar : - Present simple and the future simple tenses.

- verbs of liking + Ving ( love, like, enjoy, hate ) III. Teaching aids: Posters, extra-board.

IV. Teaching steps: Teacher & Students -Ask 3 Ss to go to the board and write sentences.

-correct, give marks.

- Revises the present simple and future simple.

- Ss do exercises.

-Lets Ss do the task individually in 5 minutes.

- Corrects their answer. Or gives explaination if necessary.

Board & contents A. OLD LESSON: building sentences Ask some Ss to make meaningful sentences.

1. He/ brush/ teeth/ everyday 2. She/ be/ a/ teacher/ in the future 3. They/ play/ soccer/ very well 4. We/ meet/ grandparents/ next year. * Key: 1. He brushes his teeth everyday.

2. She will be a teacher in the future 3. They play soccer very well 4. We will meet our grandparents next year B. NEW LESSON. I. Review the present simple and future simple tenses.

Ex1.Write the correct form of the verbs. * Key. 1. loves;won’t continue 2. take 3. does ....do 4. will enjoy 8

GV: Vũ Xuân Minh

Năm học: 2019- 2020

-Ask Ss to work in pairs to do exercise.

-Observe and help ss when and where necessary.

-Corrects .

-Let Ss work in group to do the task.

- Each group completes their table -Each group writes a short report similar to Nick’s report in 2 .

- T and other Ss read and comment - The class votes for the best report - Have Ss read the look out ! box, explains the structure.

Love/ enjoy/ like.... + Ving - Calls on some students to read out the answers.

-Go round and correct mistakes or give help when necessary.

-Ask Ss to work in pairs - Ss write sentence using the picture as clue - Calls some Ss to write their sentences on the board.

- Checks and comments on Ss’sentences - Ss do this exercise individually - Ss compare their sentences with a classmate - Calls on some Ss to write their sentences on the board.

- Corrects -Summarize the main points of the lesson.

-Guide Ss to do home work.

5. do ......do 6. will .... play Ex2. Complete the report.

1. likes 2. watch 3. don’t love 4. go 5. enjoy 6. play 7. plays 8. doesn’t like 9. plays *?Ex3. Making a table and writing a short report.

II. Verbs of liking + Ving: Ex4: Complete the sentences.

1. riding 2. watching; going 3. talking 4. playing 5 eating 6. walking Ex5. Write sentences Suggested answer: 1. He doesn’t like eating apples 2. He love playing table tennis ...........

Ex6: Complete the sentences.

- My father likes ....

- My father hates ......

- My mother likes ....

- My mother hates .....

C. HOME WORK 1.Learn by heart the form&use of the 2 tenses 2. Do Ex in workbook at home: 3. Prepare new lesson: Communication.

* Adjustment: ......................................................................................................................................................................................................... ........................................................................................................................................................................................................ ........................................................................................................................................................................................................

9

GV: Vũ Xuân Minh

Năm học: 2019- 2020

Date of preparing: September 16th, 2017

Period 5 :

Unit 1: My new school Lesson 4: COMMUNICATION

I.Objectives: -To develop speaking skill and communicate with their friends about hobbies.

Class 7A : - Making sentences with Structure : Find sth/doing sth + adj / ... think that sth/doing sth is + adj-> to give opinion about something.

- Ss make sentence with picture.

II. Language content : 1. Vocab : Related to hobbies 2. Grammar : Structure : Find sth/doing sth + adj ... think that sth/doing sth is + adj -> to give opinion about something.

III. Teaching aids: - Pictures, posters.

IV. teaching steps.

Teacher & Students Warm up Making sentences with verbs of liking + Ving Pre-Present new words. Tell Ss that these vocabs will appear in the task that follow.

-Ss listen and answer to find out the meaning of the words.

-note down.

Have Ss play game: ROR - Asks Ss to do exercise 1 individually - Call two Ss to the board and write down their answers.

- T corrects -(7A) Ss make one sentence with each picture.

Board & contents A. WARM- UP - Making sentences B. NEW LESSON 1. Vocabulary - make pottery (v): nặn đồ gốm - make models (v): làm mô hình - carve wood (v): chạm gỗ - take up (v): bắt đầu * Exercise 1: Matching A.carving wood B. Making models C. ice-skating D. Dancing E. making pottery 2. Grammar : Find sth/doing sth + adj ... think that sth/doing sth is + adj -> to give opinion about something.

10

GV: Vũ Xuân Minh

Năm học: 2019- 2020

*? give more examples - Ss work individually and tick the appropriate boxes.

- Asks Ss to complete the 5 sentences below.

- Ss compare their sentences with a partner - Asks some ss to write their sentences on the board - Other Ss and T give comments While - Ask ss to work in pairs to amke conversations as in the example - Calls on some ss to report the answers to the class.

Post- Ss are divided into two big groups - T says an activity/hobby and points at a student from one group. This student has to make sentence with this activity/hobby, using the structure in the look out! Box together with a reason. If this ss makes a correct sentence, heshe earns one point.

Then, he/she says an activity/hobby and points at one student from other group. .....

- When the time is up, Ss who can’t make a correct sentence, the group loses one point.

-T announces the winner at the end of the game.-Choose some Ss to present to the class about their good friends and why they are good friends.

-Summarize the main point of the lesson.

-Assign home work.

Ex: I find swimming interesting I think ( that ) swimming is interesting Exercise 2 : tick the boxes and complete the sentences below

3. Exercise 3 : Ask your new friends.

What do you think about making pottery - How do you find making pottery? ................. * Game:

4. Home work - Learn by heart new vocabs -Do exercises in work book -New lesson: Skill 1. (reading)

* Adjustment: ............................................................................................................................................................................................................................ ............................................................................................................................................................................................................................ ............................................................................................................................................................................................................................

11

GV: Vũ Xuân Minh

Năm học: 2019- 2020

Date of preparing: September 17th, 2017

Period 6 : Unit 1: Lesson 5 :

My new school Skills 1

I.Objectives: By the end of the lesson, ss will be able to: Read for information about Nick’s father’s hobbies and base on talking about their hobies.

II. Content: - Vocab: . eggshells ,amazing, carve,unique, gifts, …

Class 7A : Discuss and share the ideas III. Preparation: - Materials: Ss’ books, text books, tape & radio.

- Method: Group work, individual work IV. Procedures: Teacher & Students Warm-up : ? Ask Ss to practice asking and answering questions What is your hobby?

Is it useful?

Do you think it waste of time or effects your learning?

- Teacher remarks and corrects.

I. Presentation : 1. Teaching vocab - Teacher use different techniques to teach vocab (situation, realia) - Follow the seven steps of teaching vacab.

* Checking vocab: what and where

Board & contents - Practice asking and answering questions

* Vocabulary: Carve: chạm ,khắc nghệ thuật Eggshells: vỏ trứng Art: nghệ thuật Gallery: triển lãm, trưng bày Unique: độc đáo Gifts: quà Intend ( v) : dự định - Copy all the words 12

GV: Vũ Xuân Minh

Năm học: 2019- 2020

II. Pre- reading : -Ask ss if they know any unusual hobbies.

Elicit answers from ss. Lead to the lesson.

Tell ss that they are going to read about an ususual hobbies.

III. While -reading 1/Ask ss to work in pairs.They look at the picturesand answer the three questions.

Elicit the answer from the students and quickly writes them on the board - Ask ss to read the passage quickly and compare their guesses 2/ SS read the text again and answer the questions individually and then compare their answer with a classmate Ask for ss’answers and have them explain their answers. SS can either parahrase the original information from the text oe read out loud the past of the text where the answer to teach question is located.

Confirm the correct answers.

3/ SS try to complete the sentences without reading the text again. Then ss can underline parts of the test thet help them find the answer. SS share their answers with a partner. Check and confirm the correct answers

- Tell about some unusual hobbies.

Read the passage quickly and compare their guesses with the information from the text Key: 1. a teddy bear,a flower, a bird and flowers 2. They are made of eggshells.

3. The hobby is carving eggshells.

- Read the text individually - Explain their answers. * Key: 1. He thinks his father’s hobby is unusual bacause eggshells are very fragile and his father can make beautiful pieces of art from empty ones.

2. He saw the carved eggshells for the first time in an art gallery in the US 3. They find it difficult and boring 4. Yes , he does.

-do follow teacher’s directions.

Key: 1. carving eggshells 2. the US 3. the internet 4. time 5. gifts

*. Speaking: 4, ( good students)Ask ss work in pairs to -ss work in pairs discuss the uses of carved eggshells .

Encourage ss to think cretively. Some uses: decoractions at home, souvenirs , lights , (with bigger eggs). etc.

13

GV: Vũ Xuân Minh

Năm học: 2019- 2020

5/ss work in groups and take turns talking about their hobbies . Then they vote for the - work in groups. most exciting hobby . Call on some ss to talk about the most exciting hobby of their group. T can monitor the conversations and note down common errors . If time permits ,T can correct the errors with the class.

V. Homework ? Learn by heart all the new words. ? Read the passage again . ? Prepare: skill 2 .

- Say out the words - Read the passage again .

- Prepare: skill 2

* Adjustment: .............................................................................................................................................................................................................................. ............................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .............................................................................................................................................................................................................................

14

GV: Vũ Xuân Minh

Năm học: 2019- 2020

Date of preparing: September 18th, 2017

Period 7 : Unit 1: Lesson 6 :

My new school Skills 2

I. Objectives: - Listen to an interview about hobbies.

- Help Ss write better with correct punctuation, write a paragraph about one’s hobby.

II. Language content: Using the word web as a way to organise the idea Class 7A : Ss write a paragraph about their hobbies III.Teaching aids: -Posters, cassette , disks.

III. Teaching steps.

Teacher & Ss - Ss discuss in groups

-Ask Ss to read through the word web.

- Have Ss guess the word/phraseto fill in each blank .

- T writes Ss’ guess on the board - Then plays the recording.

- Ss listen and complete the word web - Ss work in pairs compare their answers with each otherlisten to the recording again to choose the correct answers.

- Let Ss listen sentence by sentence to check.

Board & contents A. WARM-UP: Chatting Asks Ss if they know anything about collecting glass bottles if they think it is useful.

B. NEW LESSON I. Listening.

1. Listen and complete each blank in the word web with no more than three words.

1. Name of the hobby: ......

2. Started : ........

3. Person who shares the hobby with Mi: ........

4. To do this hobby you have to : a. collect...... b. make.... c. use .....

5. Feelings about the hobby : ........

6. Future : will * Answer : 1. collecting glass bottles 2. two years ago

15

GV: Vũ Xuân Minh

Năm học: 2019- 2020

3. mother 4. a,grandmother; b, flower; lamps ;c, home 5. useful 6. continue the hobby II. Writing.

Writing tip.

-Tell the class the writing tip .

Ss can use a word web as a way to organize -Ss study the Writing tip and may ask the ideas for their writing some information. * Ex 3 : Ask and answer questions about each other’s hobby then take note.

- Ss work in pairs and interview each 1. Name of the hobby: ...... other about their hobbies, then take notes 2. Started : ........ on aeach other’s answers in the word web. 3. Person who shares the hobby with: ........

4. To do this hobby you have to : - Write some answers on the board.

5. Feelings about the hobby : ........

6. Future : ....

- Ss write their paragraphs individually Ex 4. Write a paragraph about base on the information in their word classmate’shobby, start with : ...... is my classmate. His / Her hobby is .... weds - Asks one/two Ss to write their paragraph on the board.

- Other Ss and T comment on the paragraph on the board.

I am .... . My hobby is ...... ( good Ss ) Ss write a paragraph about their hobbies.

-Summarize the main point of the lesson.

-Assign home work.

C. HOMEWORK -Finish a webpage for your school.

-Prepare new lesson: Looking back.

* Adjustment: ............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................ ........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

16

GV: Vũ Xuân Minh

Năm học: 2019- 2020

Date of preparing: September 24th, 2017

Period 8: Unit 1: My new school Lesson 7: LOOKING BACK PROJECT I. Objectives: - Through doing exercises, Ss revise the grammar points: The simple present, the present progressive, vocabs.

II.Teaching aids: poster, cassette.

III. Teaching steps Teacher & Students

-Have Ss work in 2 teams.

-Ss write as many words as possible.

Board & contents A. WARM-UP. Brainstorming. making pottery hobbies

playing board games

-Ss write the words.

- Correct mistakes.

-Repeat the words.

Ss write the answer.

-Correct

- Think and complete the list -Give correction.

B. NEW LESSON. I. Vocabs.

1. Complete the sentences .

1. collecting 4. arranging flowers 2. bird-watching 5. making pottery 3. playing board games 6. dancing 2. Putting the verbs.

1. listens 5. do 2. go 6. collect 3. plays 4. read 3. Adding hobbies to the lists.

Easy hobbies: Difficult hobbies: Cheap hobbies: Expensive hobbies: II. Grammar.

4. Complete the sentences using present

17

GV: Vũ Xuân Minh

Năm học: 2019- 2020

-Call on Ss to give the answers.

-Give feed back and the correct answers.

-Ss do Ex individually.

- call some to do on the board.

- Correct.

-Ss do Ex in pairs .

- call some to do on the board.

- Correct.

simple or future simple .

1. Have.

7. will join 2. likes 8. loves 3. plays 9. don’t like 4. doesn’t like 10. will read 5. enjoys 6. walks.

5. Write true sentences about yourself.

1. I like : ......................

2. I enjoy: ......................

3. I love: ......................

4. I don’t like: ......................

5. I hate : ......................

III. Communication 6. Role-play.

C. PROJECT -Ask Ss to complete the self-assessment.

- Sumarize the main point of the lesson.

- Asign home work.

D. HOMEWORK. -Learn by heart new words.

-Prepare new lesson: Unit 2 – Getting Started.

* Adjustment: ............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................ ........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

18

GV: Vũ Xuân Minh

Năm học: 2019- 2020

Date of preparing: September 25th, 2017

Period 9 : UNIT 2: HEALTH Lesson 1: Getting started I. Objectives: - By the end of the lesson Ss can understand “ health”, review vocabs about health problems and health tips.

- Training listening, reading, speaking, writing skills.

II. Language content : Talking about health problems 7A : play game III. Teaching aids: - Pictures, posters, cassette & tape.

IV. Procedures.

Teacher and Students Board & contents Warm up (Network) -Have Ss work in 2 teams -Get Ss to write down vocabs about outdoor activities.

-Give feed back and decide which is the winner of the game.

-Provide some more vocabs about outdoor activities.

A. WARM UP. (Network) Going swimming

-Present new words.

B. NEW LESSON * Vocabulary - wake up - health – healthy - put on weight - sunburn

- Check: Rub out and Remember.

Outdoor activities

19

GV: Vũ Xuân Minh

Năm học: 2019- 2020

1. Listen and Read ? Look at the picture.

Who are they ?/ What are they talking about ?

Do you like outdoor activities?

- Have Ss listen to the tape then get them to do exercise a.

-Get them to read aloud the answers.

-Ask Ss to read the text again and check.

-Give feed back.

- Then ask Ss to read the conversation again to answer the questions.

- Call some Ss to give the answers aloud.

- Correct some.

1.Listen & Read

a. *Answers: 1. Zooniverse 2. I don’t feel like it 3. sound down 4. putting on weight 5. won’t take no for answer

b. *Answers: -Plays the recording. Let the whole class listen 1.Phong 2. Phong and complete the table 3. Nick 4. Nick - some ss read again and others correct.

5. Phong 2. Matching.

- Asks Ss to match the words in p2 with the right a, Answer key:1e ; 2f ; 3d ; 4c ; 5b ; 6a pictures. b, Ss rank the health problems from the - Calls some Ss to give the answers most common to the least common and share with a partner. ( *? ) 3. Matching.

- Exlain how to play game find someone who... 1c ; 2d ; 3e ; 4b ; 5a - Ss take a card with a health problem or a 4. Game : find someone ...... pieceof advice then walk around and try to find the person with the card.

- descibe the health C. CONSOLIDATION Homework -Sumarize the main point of the lesson.

-Asign home work.

- Learn by heart new vocabulary - Practice reading “Listen and read” -Prepare new lesson: A closer look 1.

* Adjustment: ........................................................................................................................................ ........................................................................................................................................ ........................................................................................................................................

20

GV: Vũ Xuân Minh

Năm học: 2019- 2020

Date of preparing: September 26th, 2017

Period 10: UNIT 2: HEALTH Lesson 2: A closer look 1 I. Objectives.

By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to use lexical items related to health issues and advice on healthy living; pronounce the sounds / f / and / v / correctly.

II. Language focus : Health problems 7A: in group, talk about the problems III. Teaching aids: - Stereo, CD. IV. Procedure 1. Class organization.

- Greetings.

- Checking attendance: 2. New lesson.

T’s and Ss’ activities The content 1.Warm up T writes the numbers 1-6 on the board and asks the Ss if they can remember (without opening their books) the vocabulary for health problems from Getting Started, Activity 2.

2. Activities.

1.Vocabulary.

VOCABULARY

Have a/ an: cough, headache, T writes have a/an, have, and feel on the sorethroat, temprature, an allergy, a board. T asks a S to read the words from the spot, (a) sunburn, a sickness….. first column. T writes the words in a word Have: (the) flu, stomachache, web around have a/an. T encourages ss to add toothache, earache, spots…… more words( from the six words in Warm up Feel: sick, tired, weak,…… stage). T repeats this for the next two columns.

21

GV: Vũ Xuân Minh

Năm học: 2019- 2020

T asks Ss if they can make a movement for each of the different health problems. The Ss should say the health problem while doing Ex1: Look at the pictures. Write the the movement. For Example: ‘I have a problem below the picture of each patient. cough’ (Ss pretend to cough).

2. Sunburn EX1: T explains the noun ‘patient’ to make 1. Flu 4. Tired/Weak sure that Ss are familiar with it. T asks Ss to 3. Allergy do the exercise individually. T corrects the Ex2: Now, read the doctor’s notes exercise as a class. about his patients and fill in the EX2: T asks Ss to complete the exercise missing words.

2. the flu individually. T corrects the exercise as a 1. (a) sunburn class.

3. tired, temperature EX3: T asks one S to come to the front of the 4. sick, stomachache class. T models the role-play in the book with 5. sore throat the St. Try to make it as fun and dramatic as possible. Then, T divides Ss into pairs. T Ex3: Role-play the meeting with the encourages Ss to think about how each person doctor.

(Doctor and patient) feels and will act. Ss Hi, doctor Thao. choose a problem and make a role-play. They Hi, Hung may choose more than one. T gives Ss about I was outside all day yesterday. I feel 5 minutes to practice their role-plays. T then very hot and my face is red. asks some pairs to perform their role-plays I see. I think you have a sunburn. for the class. After each role-play T asks the class comprehension questions about what Ex4: Choose a health problem. Work in groups. Tell your group about the they just saw. Eg: What was Mai’s problem? last time you had that problem.

What advice did Dr. Thao have?

E.g: A: I had flu two weeks ago. *?

B: Me too, I felt so weak.

Ex4:T asks four Ss to model the example C: Oh. I had a sore throat convesation. Then, T divides the class into yesterday. groups and asks Ss to talk about a health D: I had toothache. I think I ate problem. T may ask Ss to extend the too many sweets. conversation by trying to figure out what the 2. Pronunciation 22

GV: Vũ Xuân Minh

Năm học: 2019- 2020

most common health problem is in the group Ex5: Listen and circle the words you and then report back to the class. hear.

PRONUNCIATION 1. fat 2. ferry 3. vas Ex5:T may want to sart by drilling the 4. vault 5. save 6. leave sounds/f/ and /v/ and asking Ss to think of any words they know with these souns in Ex6: Listen and circle the words with them. T can write Ss ideas on the board. the /f/or /v/ sound. Then say the Then, T says the words in 5 and asks the Ss to sentences. repeat. Finally, T plays the recording and has 1. Fast, food Ss circle the words they hear. T may play the 2. have, felt recording as many times as necessary.

3. fatter EX 6: T asks Ss to listen to the sentences 4. having, lifestyle once and repeat. T then asks Ss to circle the words with /f/ or /v/ sounds. T has the Ss 5. give listen to the recording again and gives the correct answers to the entire class.

3. Homework - Do exercises in workbook.

- Prepare a closer look 2. * Adjustment : …………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………. ………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….… ……………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….

23

GV: Vũ Xuân Minh

Năm học: 2019- 2020

Date of preparing: September 29th, 2017

Period 11 : UNIT 2: HEALTH Lesson 3: A closer look 2 I. Objectives.

By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to use: imperatives with more and less; form compound sentences and use them corretly.

II. Language content: - imperatives with more and less III. Teaching aids: - Extra- boards IV. Procedure 1. Class organization.

- Greetings.

- Checking attendance: 2. New lesson.

Students’ and teacher’s activities 1.Warm up.

Contents

T can give Ss simple classroom commands. Eg: stand up, sit down, raise your hand, open your book, close your book. Ss do the command as the T says it.

2. Activities

1. Grammar GRAMMAR * Imperatives with more and less Eg: - Relax more. * Imperatives with more and less - Watch less TV. Introduction: Teacher writes the word * Câu mệnh lệnh dùng để hướng dẫn, IMPERATIVE on the board and explains to ra lệnh, yêu cầu hoặc gợi ý. children that the imperative can be used for direct, commands, orders or suggestions.

T asks Ss to open their books and read through the yellow box (tracking the words 24

GV: Vũ Xuân Minh

Năm học: 2019- 2020

with their fingers) as T reads the tex aloud. T may want to check the Ss comprehension by asking some comprehension checking questions. Eg: When I feel tired should I sleep more or less? What should I do if I am doing poorly in school? What should I do if I want to lose weight? Put on weight?

Ex1: T asks Ss to look at the four pictures and calls on Ss to tell the class what they see. T divides the Ss into pairs and asks pairs to give advice to each person in the picture. In more advanced classes Ss can also give reasons for the advice. T gives Ss 2-3 minutes to come up with ideas for advice and then T calls on some groups to share with the class.

Ex1: Look at the pictures. Which advice would you give to each of these people? Use the imperatives with more or less above.

Suggested answers: a. Spend less time reading b. Spend less time mobile phone c. eat less fat food d. sleep more

Ex2: Top Health Tips for Teens Ex2: T asks Ss to look at the yellow Grammar Box again. T asks Ss to think for a Ss’ ideas. moment about which 6 pieces of advice are most important to teens. Then, T asks Ss to discus their ideas in pairs or groups of three.

T asks a few groups to share their ideas.

T takes a quick class poll to see which 6 pieces of advice the class thinks are most improtant. T writes the ideas on the board.

Ex3: Look at the article on the Teen Ex3: T asks Ss to read through the Teen Healthwebsite. Fill in the blanks to Health Website individually and complete the complete their top six health tips. headings. T asks Ss if the ideas from the class 1. Do more exercise! and the ideas from the website are the same.

2. Sleep more!

T may want to encourage class discussion 3. Eat less junk food here about why some pieces of advice are 4. Wash your hands more. more important than others.

5. Watch less TV 25

GV: Vũ Xuân Minh

Năm học: 2019- 2020

* Compound sentences

6. Spend less time playing computer Introduction: T writes AND, OR, BUT, and games.

SO on the board. T asks Ss what these words 2. Compound sentences Conjunction(liên từ): and, or, but, so. are called.

Eg: Nam does morning exercise Ss: Conjunction ( Ss may answer in English everyday, so he is well- built. or Vietnamese).

T asks Ss to read the first paragraph of the Yellow Box and asks: What do we call a Simple sentence 1, Conj Simple sentence made by linking two simple sentence 2.= Compound sentence sentences?

Answer: A compound sentence.

T asks Ss to read the second paragraph Liên từ dùng để nối 2 câu đơn thành of the Yellow Box and again: What does a câu Phức (câu ghép). Câu ghép sử dụng 4 liên từ trên (BASO) gọi là câu ghép coordinating conjunction do? đẳng lập.

Answer: It joins two simple sentences.

Trước các liên từ này luôn có dấu phảy.

T divides the class up into three large groups. The first group is ‘Independent clause * Game : 1’, the second group is ‘Conjunction’, and the third group is ‘Independent Clause 2’. The Example: whole class reads the table aloud. Each group To says: Independent Clause 1 chorally chants their part of the sentence Group 1 says: The Japanese eat a lot of when T calls out the name of their group. rice.

The class repeats this process for the rest of T says: Conjunction the sentences in the table.

Group 2 says: AND Once they have finished T asks the class: T says: Independent Clause 2 ‘Where does the comma go in a comound Group 3 says: They eat a lot of fish. sentence?’

Answer: It goes independent clause

after

the

first

Ex1: T asks Ss to complete the exercise

Ex1 : Make compound sentences by joining the two simple sentences. Use 26

GV: Vũ Xuân Minh

Năm học: 2019- 2020

individually. T corrects the exercise with the the conjunction given. Remember to class. add a comma.

1. I want to eat some food, but I have a sore throat.

2. The Japanese eat healthily, so they live for a long time.

3. I feel tired, and I feel weak.

4. You can go and see the doctor, or Ex2: T asks Ss to complete the exercise you can go to bed now and rest. individually. T corrects the exercise as a Ex2: Match the beginnings of the class. sentences with the picture that comlete Ex 3: T asks Ss to complete the exercise them. individually.

1. a 2.c 3.a 4.b Ex3: Now, complete the second part of the compound sentences.

1, so he doesn’t have flu ( Class good Ss ) Ex4: T asks Ss to read the quotes aloud. T asks comprehension questions to make sure that Ss understand the vocabulary.

2. , and he doesn’t do exercise 3. , or she should try to relax more 4. , she does exercise, too.

Ex4: Read the quote about health below. Explain each quote to your partner. Discuss the similarities and T asks Ss to dicuss the similarities and differences. differences of quotes. For less able classes, T Eg: Where does someone ride when she may want to lead the conversation as a class. rides on horseback? What does it mean T may ask Ss if they can think of any to go somewhere on foot?

Vietnamese proverbs with a similar meaning.

3.Homework Do exercises in the Workbook.

Prepare: Communication

When you value something to you think it’s important or not?

27

GV: Vũ Xuân Minh

Năm học: 2019- 2020

* Adjustment : …………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………. ………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….… ……………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….

28

GV: Vũ Xuân Minh

Năm học: 2019- 2020

Date of preparing: October 2nd, 2017

Period 12 : UNIT 2: HEALTH Lesson 4: Comunication I. Objectives.

By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to talk about health facts or myths II. Teaching aids: - A CD, a CD player.

III. Procedure 1. Class organization.

- Greetings.

- Checking attendance: 2. New lesson.

Students’ and teacher’s activities 1.Warm up.

Contents

*Brainstorming: T writes the words Healthy Healthy and Unhealthy on the board. The class brainstroms about things that are healthy or unhealty.

Do exercise

Unheathy

Stay up late

2. Activities

1. Vocabulary

EXTRAVOCABULARY

Myth (n): huyền thoại, việc hoang đường

T pre-teaches the vocabulary in th Extra Sushi (n): su- si Vocabulary Box Vitamin (n): Vitamin COMMUNICATION Sleeping in (n): ngủ nhiều, ngủ nướng Ex1: T divides the class into pairs and asks them to complete the exercise by ticking the sentences they think are true and putting a cross next to the sentences they think are false. T gives the Ss 2-3 minutes to complete the exercise. T

Vegetarian (n): Người ăn chay 2. Practice Ex1. Work in pairs. Discuss these sentences. Do you think they are true or false? Tick ( ) the sentences you think

29

GV: Vũ Xuân Minh

Năm học: 2019- 2020

chooses a few groups to share their aswers are true. Put a cross (x) next to ones you with the class. think are false.

Ex2: First, T asks Ss to close their books, listen, and take notes. T plays the recording. Ss then open their books and correct their answers using their notes (or from memory). T then plays the recording again for Ss to check a second time.

1. T 2.F

3.F

4.F

5.F

6.F

Ex2: Listen to the radio show about “health facts or myth’s and check your answers in 1.

- Ss listen and take notes.

Ex3: Discuss the following in groups.

Ex3: T asks Ss to work in pairs, as 1. Which sentence are you most surprised suggested in the student’s book. by? Why? T divides Ss into groups and has them 2. Do you know any health facts or myths complete the exercise. T sets a time limit. about health in Viet Nam? Where did you hear them?

Ex4,5: When the time limit for exercise 4 is finished T puts groups together to quiz Ex4: Work in groups. Think of some one another. In order to keep things sentences about health that are not true. organised, each group chooses one Then think of some that are fasle. spokesperson for the group. The Ex5: Test another group to see how spokesperson can consult his/her group, many of your health myths they can spot. but the spokesperson is the only one who can answer.

3.Homework Do exercises in the Workbook.

Prepare: Skills 1 * Adjustment : …………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………. ………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….… ……………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….

30

GV: Vũ Xuân Minh

Năm học: 2019- 2020

Date of preparing: October 4th, 2017

Period 13: UNIT 2 : HEALTH Lesson 5 : Skills 1 I. Objectives.

By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to read and talk about health issues and give advice on healthy living.

II. Language content : Revision III. Teaching aids: - A CD, a CD player.

IV. Procedure 1. Class organization.

- Greetings.

- Checking attendance: Students’ and teacher’s activities Contents 1. Warm up T writes the word CALORIE on the board T brainstorms with the class any words that - Food, drink… they associate with CALORIE. 1. Reading 2. Activities READING Ex1. Quickly read the text. Match the - Who can tell me the topic of the reading correct headings with the paragraphs.

1. b we are going to read?

2. a Ex1: Ask Ss to complete the exercise.

3. c Then T corrects.

Ex2: Find the following words/ phrases in Ex2: Ss work in pairs to complete ex2. Ss the text. Discuss the meaning of each can use dictionaries. T elicits the meaning word/ phrase with a partner. Then check of words from different groups. the meaning.

Essential - necessary Pay attention - notice, be aware Diet (n) - the food that you eat on a daily basis.

Diet (v) - meant a special eating routine to lose weight or accomplish another health goal.

Expert - someone who has studied a lot about a subject or topic and 31

GV: Vũ Xuân Minh

Năm học: 2019- 2020

Ex3: T ask Ss to complete the activity individually. T then corrects the answers with the class.

Speaking Ex4: T draws Ss attention to the table and explains that the activities are listed next to the number of calories used in one hour. T may ask comprehension question such as “ If I do aerobics for 3 hours, how many calories will I use?”

-T puts Ss in pairs, or groups of three and asks them to discuss the questions. T walks around the room monitoring. When Ss have finished discussing the questions, T asks them to move on to exercise 5.

Ex5: T asks Ss to complete the table and think about how many calories each activity will take. If the activity they like to do is not on the table Ss can guess the number of calories by comparing with the table 4. Ss share their table with groups.

3.Homework Do exercises in the Workbook.

Prepare: Skills 2 * Adjustment :

understands it well.

Stay in shape - stay healthy.

Ex3: Now answer the following questions.

1. A calorie is energy that helps us do our everyday activities.

2. If we eat too many calories we get fat.

3. To stay healthy you need between 1,600 and 2,500 calories.

4. Sports activities and running use a lot of calories.

5. People listen to his advice because he is an expert.

2. Speaking Ex4: Look at the table and discuss the following questions.

1. Why do you think some activities use more calories than others.

2. Which activity uses more calories: gardening or walking?

3. How many calories do you use doing aerobics for 2 hours?

4. What do you think happens when we have too few calories, but too many calories?

EX5: Choose two or three activities you like to do. Complete the chart about those activities.

Ex6: Present your chart to the class Ss’ performances.

…………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………. ………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….

32

GV: Vũ Xuân Minh

Năm học: 2019- 2020

Date of preparing: October 5th, 2017

Period 14 : UNIT 2: HEALTH Lesson 6: Skills 2 I. Objectives.

By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to listen and write a reply giving advice to someone with a health problem.

II. Language content : Revision health problems ( 7A ) Disscussing about Olympic sports III. Teaching aids: - A CD, a CD player.

IV. Procedure 1. Class organization.

- Greetings.

- Checking attendance: 2. New lesson.

Students’ and teacher’s activities 1. Warm up.

T draw the Olympic rings on the board and ask Ss what these represent.

- Brainstorm with Ss as a class different words that come to mind when Ss think of the Olympic.

2. Activities LISTENING Ex1: T divides the class into pairs and asks them to discuss the questions.

Ex2: Asks Ss to listen to the recording and circle the health problem they hear.

Ex3: T asks Ss to listen to the recording again and choose the right respond.

Ex4: Have Ss complete the task

Contents 1. Listening Ex1: Look at the picture below. Discuss the following questions with a partner.

1. What sports do people do in the Olympics?

2. The Olympic sport below is sometimes called “ the ironman event, Why?” Ex2: Listen to the interview. Which problems did he have as a child?

- sick - allergy Ex3: Listen to the interview again. What advice does he give about preparing for the event?

- Do more exercises - Sleep more - Eat more fruit/ vegetables

33

GV: Vũ Xuân Minh

Năm học: 2019- 2020

individually. T can ask an early finisher to come up to the board and write his/her answers on the board and the class can check them. (good students) Ex5: T divides the class into groups and give them a time limit for discussion and feedback as a class.

Ex4: Are the following sentences true (T) or false (F) 1. T 2. F 3. F 4. F 5. T Ex5: Now discuss the following in groups.

1. Why is the triathlon a difficult event?

2. Can you think of other Olympic sports that are harder/ easier?

3. Would you like to try the triathlon one day? Why? Why not?

WRITING 2. writing EX6/7: Asks if Ss remember who Dr. Dan Ex6: Look at Dr. Dan’s advice page. Can is( He is a diet expert) .Then T asks Ss to you match the problems with the read the questions and advice, then answers? underline the different ways Dr. Dan gives 1. c 2. b 3. a advice. When the majority of the class has Ex7: Look at the answers again. finished, T can correct the answers then Underline the ways Dr. Dan gives advice. discuss different ways to give advice.

• You should…

Ex8: T divides Ss into A and B then put • You can… them in pairs. T asks one student A to • It will be good if you… write a health problem on a piece of paper • Do something more/ less… ( using the frompts from the book), T then Ex8: Now , with a partner choose one of asks Student A to pass the paper to Student the following problems….

B and Student B can write a response.

Anna: played outside all day/ has sunburn/ - Share their questions and responses with has a temprerature the class.

Ngoc: feels weak/ feel tired/ sleeps in Khang: ate too much/ has stomachache/ 3.Homework feels sick.

Do exercises in the Workbook.

Prepare: Looking back V. Adjustment : …………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………. …………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………. ………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….

34

GV: Vũ Xuân Minh

Năm học: 2019- 2020

Date of preparing: October 6th, 2017

Period 15 : UNIT 2: HEALTH Lesson 6: Looking back and project I. Objectives.

By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to review the vocabulary and grammar items in unit 2; do a health survey.

II. Language content : Revision: health problems III. Teaching aids: - Extra- boards.

IV. Procedure 1. Class organization.

- Greetings.

- Checking attendance: 2. New lesson.

Students’ and teacher’s activities 1.Warm up. * Brainstorming: Health problems 2. Activities VOCABULARY Ex1:Ss can complete this task individually or in pairs. Ss should be encouraged to write down their answers. T can correct the exercise on the board to check spelling.

Ex2:T asks what the see in each picture. After a brief discussion time, Ss can comlete the exercise individually ( good students) : Make meaningful sentences GRAMMAR Ex3: Ss can complete the exercise individually.

Compound sentences.

Ex4: Ss can do the exercise with a partner.

Contents I. Vocabulary Health issues and advice 1: What health problems do you think each of these people has? a. sunburn b. spots c. put on weight d. stomachche e. flu 2: Look at the pictures above. Write the health problem below each person.

1. spots 2. put on weight 3. sunburn 4. stomachche/ sick 5. flu II. Grammar Imperatives with more or less.

3: Complete the health tips below.

1. less 2. more 3. more 4. Go outside…

5. Watch less TV…

35

GV: Vũ Xuân Minh

Năm học: 2019- 2020

COMMUNICATION Ex5: T can divide the Ss into pairs. T can ask one pair to come up and role-play the example in the book. T then asks the Ss to create their own role-plays from the sample problems in the book. T can choose a pair or two to do their role-plays in front of the class.

EX6: Ss can remain in the same pairs as in exercise 5 and discuss the sentences in 6. T can set a time limit and after a few minutes Ss can report back to the class. The class can decide what’s true and what’s a myth.

Project: Health survey This project can be done as homework.

1. T divides the class into groups and each group comes up with questions to find out more about health and health habits of the people around them. Ss can ask other groups in class or ask people outsede of the class (other students/teachers in school, family members, friends).

2. If done in class the groups should discuss the main health problems they discovered and what they would like to do to fix them. T may assign extension activities (i.e. making a poster, a song, etc.) for homework or extra points.

If done at home, some Ss can make a brief report about the health problems they discovered and tell their groups/the class about what they found.

3. Home work Do exercises in the Workbook.

Prepare: Unit 3; Getting started

6. Do more exercise 4: Draw a line to link a simple sentence, to a coordinator, to another simple sentence.

Suggested answers: 1. I want to eat some junk food, but I am putting on weight.

2. I don’t want to be tired tomorrow, so I should go to bed early.

3. I have a temperature, and I feel tired.

4. I can exercise every morning, or I can cycle to school.

III- Communication 5: Choose one of the following health problems. Role play a discussion. Student A is the patient.

Student B is the doctor.

Example: A: Hi, doctor. I feel weak and sick.

B: Did you have enough calories?

You should eat more, and I think you should get more exercise too.

A: OK. Thank you doctor 6: Discuss the following sentences about health with a partner. Do you think they are facts or myths?

E.g: When you have a headache, you should rub an egg on your head.

A: I don’t think this is true. It’s a myths.

B: Yes, I agree/ No, I disagree…..

- Ss take note

36

GV: Vũ Xuân Minh

Năm học: 2019- 2020

V. Adjustment : …………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………. …………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………. ………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….

37

GV: Vũ Xuân Minh

Năm học: 2019- 2020

Date of preparing: October 12th, 2017

Period 16 : Revision units 1 and 2 I. Objectives: Revision what Ss have learnt in units 1,2 II. Language content : - knowledge in unit 1,2 III. Procedures: Teacher and students

Content and board

Exercise 1: Find the word which has a differrent sound in the past underlined.

1. A. blanket B. calories C. donate D. allergy 2. A. help B. benefit C. elderly D. garden 3. A volunteer B. collage C. community D.doctor 4. A. provide B. individual C. situation D. children 5. A. tutor B. student C. university D. discuss

Exercise 1: Find the word which has a differrent sound in the past underlined.

1. C ; 2D ; 3C ; 4A ; 5D

Exercise 2: Put the words in the box into two groups.

Gold , book , get , garden , clothes , glass , clean , homework , skill , give. /k/ /g/

Exercise 2: Put the words in the box into two groups.

Exercise 3: Put the verbs in brackets in the correct tense form.

1. you ever (do) volunteer work?

- Yes. I (do) volunteer work last month.

2. I (collect) hundreds of old books and clothes for street children so far.

3. My sister wants to raise funds for street children so she (make) hundreds of postcards to sell them.

4. My hobby is carving eggshells and now I (carve) nearly 100.

5. Going home from school yesterday, I (help) an

Exercise 3: Put the verbs in brackets in the correct tense form.

1. have you ever done - did 2. have collected 3. has made 4. have carved 5. helped 6. went 7. has done 8. has never eaten

/k/ book clean homework skill clothes

/g/ Gold Get Garden Glass Give

38

GV: Vũ Xuân Minh

Năm học: 2019- 2020

old man to go across the street.

6. Last Tuesday, I (go) home late because there was a traffic jam near my school.

7. At Tet, my mother and her close friends often go to the hospitals to donate cakes, sweets and toys for the sick children there. She (do) it for many years.

8. Lan never (eat) Banh tet. She will try some this year.

9. Linh is my close friend. We (know) each other for 5 years.

Exercise 4: ( for class 7A) Correct the tense in these sentences: 1. We clean the beach last Sunday 2. I didn’t see her for two weeks.

3. Do you do your homework yet?

4. I have collected coins when I was a little boy.

5. I see a real elephant when I went to Ban Don last year. * Homework : - Revise the past simple and present perfect.

- Make sentences using past simple and present perfect.

9. have known

Correct the tense in these sentences: 1. clean -> cleaned 2. didn’t see -> hasn’t seen 3. do you do -> have you done 4. have collected -> collected 5. see -> saw

* Adjustment: …………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………. …………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………. ………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….

39

GV: Vũ Xuân Minh

Năm học: 2019- 2020

Date of preparing: October 13th, 2017

Period 17 : UNIT 3: COMMUNITY SERVICE Lesson 1: Getting started.

I. Objectives.

By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to talk about community service and volunteer work.

II. Language content : Related to community service and volunteer work.

III.Teaching aids: - A CD, and a CD player.

IV. Procedure 1. Class organization.

- Greetings.

- Checking attendance: 2. New lesson.

Students’ and teacher’s activities 1.Warm up.

To start the lesson, write ‘Green Summer Campaign’, ‘working for the community’, and ‘having a beach holiday’ on the board.

Ask Ss to guess which two phrases connect to each other. Once Ss have found the answer, follow-up by asking them why they think ‘green summer’ relates to ‘ working for the community’, and what activities a person can do. If T has some volunteer experience, he/she can share with the class.

2. Activities LISTEN AND READ Ex1: Ask Ss to open their books to the picture. T can ask Ss prediction questions about the picture.

- What can you see in the picture?

- Who do you think they are?

- What are they talking about?

Ss answer the questions as a class.

Contents

I- Listen and read a. Read the conversation again and tick T (true) or F (False).

1.T 2. T 3. T 4. F 5. T b. Read the conversation again.

Answer the following questions 1. Make a difference : not the same 2. It plants trees...

40

GV: Vũ Xuân Minh

Năm học: 2019- 2020

T presents some new words - T plays the recording and has Ss follow along. After the first listening, T asks Ss to recall in formation from the listening.

- Global Citizen is …… (the name of the radio programme).

- Hai Ba Trung School/is… (the school where Mai and Phuc go to).

- Be a Buddy is …… (the organisation that Mai is from).

- Go Green is ………(the organisation that Phuc is from). a. Ss work individually to answer the questions. Ss compare their answer with a partner and then discuss as a class. T goes through each statement and asks Ss how the text in the dialogue supports their answers.

After the discussion T writes the correct answers on the board.

(Teacher may explain the differences between an environmental non-profit orgamosation and an environmental business). b. Have Ss look at where the phrase’ make a difference’ is located in the dialogue (People donate books and clothes to homeless children, and that makes a difference). Ask Ss to think about how books and clothes can help to better the children’s lives. If needed, explain to Ss that’ make a difference’ means doing something good, especially to improve a situation.

Then ask Ss to think of a community garden in their neighborhood. Have Ss discuss the last two questions in pairs. Then T elicits answers as a class.

3. It’s a non-profit organization 2. Look at the words in the box. Can you put them in the right groups ?

Nouns Verbs Adjectives help donate clean emvironmental benefit help volunteer benefit plant volunteer recycle plant provide clean encourage

• Look out!

There are many words that are both verbs and nouns, e.g. volunteer, plant, help, benefit…

3. Fill the gaps with the words in the box.

1. volunteer 2. homeless people 3. donates 4. community service 5. make a difference 4.Describe the pictures with the verbs in 2.

1. donate 2. plant 3. help 4. clean

41

GV: Vũ Xuân Minh

Năm học: 2019- 2020

Ex2. Ss work individually to do the task then compare their answers with a partner.

Tell Ss they can put some words in more than one column. T writes correct answers on the board Look out! Draw Ss’ attention to the box.

Ask Ss to identify the words in exercise 2 which can be both nouns and verbs, or verbs and adjectives, Ask Ss if they can add more examples of the words they know Ex3:Ss complete the exercise individually then T checks the answers as a class.

Ex4:T may tell Ss to look at the list of the verbs Ss have already got from exercise 2.

Have Ss complete the exercise in pairs or individually.

Ex5:T draws the word webs on the board.

Have Ss work in groups to complete the word webs in 4-5 minutes on a sheetof paper at their tables. Encourage Ss to think of as many words as possible. When time is up, swap the sheets among groups to check each other’s answers. Together with the class T elicits answers to complete the word webs on the board. Then ask each group to count how many (correct) wrds their friends’ group has. The group who has the most correct words is the winner.

Ex6: Game: Vocabulary Ping Pong.

Model the game with a student first, then have the class play the game as instructed 3. Home work Do exercises in the Workbook.

Prepare: A closer look 1

5. recycle

5. Create word webs. donate: books, blood, money, clothes, toys, etc.

Help: children, street people, old people, the poor, etc.

Clean: streets, lakes, rivers, beaches, etc.

Provide: food, attention, life skills, education, houses, help, books, etc.

6. Game: Vocabulary Ping Pong A: provide B: food A: homeless people B: help

42

GV: Vũ Xuân Minh

Năm học: 2019- 2020

Date of preparing: October 06th, 2019

Period 18 : UNIT 3: COMMUNITY SERVICE Lesson 2: A closer look 1.

I. Objectives.

By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to: - pronounce words containing sounds /k/ and /g/ with increased fluency and accyracy.

- use the lexical items related to community service and colunteer work.

II. Language content: Related to problems that each community have to face.

7A: back-chaining technique III. Teaching aids: - A CD, a CD player and a picture.

IV. Procedure: 1. Class organization.

- Greetings.

- Checking attendance: Students’ and teacher’s activities Contents 1.Warm up.

T brings a big picture of people in need to class (children in mounatainous areas who do not have enough books). Have Ss discuss what difficulties they think people in that situation face, and what they need I. Vocabulary 2. Activities Activity 1 Let Ss do the matching individually. T writes ‘What are the difficulties they the correct answers on the board then asks Ss face?’ ‘What do they need?’ to discuss these questions as a class: ‘What do 1. disabled people: người tàn tật you see in the pictures?’

2. elderly people: người già Activity 2 3. homeless people: người vô gia T can ask Ss about how the people in each of cư the situation in 1 can be helped.

4. Sick children: trẻ em bị bệnh Divide Ss into pairs to do the task. Once Ss 5. people in a flooded area: nạn have finished, elicit ideas from the whole nhân vùng lũ class.

Activity 3 a. Ask ‘What do you see in the photos?’ ‘ Does our community have similar problems?’

43

GV: Vũ Xuân Minh

Năm học: 2019- 2020

Tell Ss the provided words include solutions as well. Then have Ss work individually to complete the task.

Activity 3

a. b. Have Ss work in pairs to work out some Rubbish solutions for the problems in a. Encourage Ss tracffic jams to add their own ideas in addition to using the too many advertisemnets words provided. Once Ss have finished, elicit dirt beaches their ideas as a class no trees Activity 4 Graffiti Play the recording and ask Ss to repeat. T may pause the recording to drill difficult II. Pronunciation. items. T may play the recording as many times as necessary.

Activity 5 Tell Ss that they will hear one word from each row. Play the recording and instruct Ss to circle the word that they hear. After giving correct answers, have Ss practise both words (the minimal pairs) from each row.

Activity 6: ( good students ) Play the recording and ask Ss to repeat.

3. Production:Activity 7 Model this game with two Ss first before dividing Ss into groups.

For more advanced classes, T may ask Ss to think of other minimal pairs as in the table in 5. Ss can make their own tables for further pratice.

4. Home work Do exercises in the Workbook.

Prepare: A closer look 2 * Adjustment :

Activity 5 cold clothes

green girl

a c b a a, c b

goal

- Work in groups to play this game. Homework

…………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………. …………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………

44

GV: Vũ Xuân Minh

Năm học: 2019- 2020

Date of preparing: October 7th, 2019

Period 19: UNIT 3: COMMUNITY SERVICE Lesson 3: A closer look 2.

I. Objectives.

By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to: understand the difference between the past simple and the present perfect; use the time expressions that go with the past simple and the present perfect II. Language content: - Past simple and present perfect Good Ss: writing sentences about themselves using the time expressions III.Teaching aids: - A CD, a CD player.

IV. Procedure 1. Class organization.

- Greetings.

- Checking attendance: 2. New lesson.

Students’ and teacher’s activities Contents 1.Warm up.

Verb form checking: T divides the class into Eg: help- helped- helped 2 groups. T reads some verbs in bare form, See- saw- seen ….. group 1 say aloud the verbs in past simple form, group 2 say aloud the verbs in past participle form.

2. Presentation I. Grammar: Ask Ss to keep books closed. Write the Present perfect vs. Past Simple following on the board: Eg: Last year I went to Hoi An (1) I have been to H.An (2) Draw their attention to the difference between sentense (1) and sentence (2) by asking Ss questions such as: When fo you Both sentences say that the person spent think these actions happened: in the past, at some time in Hoi An in the past, but present, or in the future? Which sentence sentence (1) describes a particular trip 45

GV: Vũ Xuân Minh

Năm học: 2019- 2020

tells you exactly when it happened?

which happened last year, while sentence (2) emphasizes that the person had an Activity 1 experience of Hoi An and does not focus a. Have Ss open the books and do exercise 1 on when it exactly happened. individually. Ask Ss to identify the diffrrence between the actions they have underlined * NOTE: - Thì quá khứ đơn dùng để mô ‘Last year we provided evening classes for tả một hành động bắt đầu và đã kết thúc fifty children’ and ‘We’ve asked people to trong quá khứ. donate books and clothes to the children’.

- Thì hiện tại hoàn thành diễn tả một b. T shows Ss the rule box, and asks them to hành động mới diễn ra và còn để lại hậu try to work out the rule first. Ask them if quả hoặc kết quả ở hiện tại ; hoặc đã diễn they know the time expressions that often go ra nhưng không đề cập thời gian with the present perfect and the past simple. Một số trạng từ thường sử dụng với thì Remember!

QKĐ: yesterday, last month, 2 years Go through the Remember! Box with Ss. ago…

Ask them to make sentences with these Một số trạng từ thường ssuwr dụng với words and add more time expressions if they thì HTHT: ever, never, so far= recently= can. lately, for several times, for a long time, 3. Activities for ages, for, since…

Activity 2 II. Activities Ask Ss to complete the exercise individually.

Activity 2 Then give feedback as a whole class activity.

1. cleaned 2. have collected Activity 3 3. collected 4. has flown; went Ss do the exercise individually, then 5. Have you ever seen; saw compare the answers with a partner.

Activity 3 Activity 4: (Good Ss) 1. b 2. b Ss write sentences about themselves using 3. a 4. a the time expressions.

5. c 6. b 4. Production Activity 5 Remind Ss of what they learned in ‘Getting Srarted’ about ‘Be a Buddy’ and ‘Go Green’.

46

GV: Vũ Xuân Minh

Năm học: 2019- 2020

Divide students into pairs. Tell Ss that to - Last December, I … complete this task they will need to use the present perfect and the past simple.

Remind Ss that this is a speaking activity and that they should communicate in complete sentences. While Ss do the task, go round to A: What happened in … ? monitor to ensure they do not just look at the B : …… table and say out the phrases for each other to copy down. Take note of any common errors and correct them as a class later.

5. Home work Do exercises in the Workbook.

Prepare: Communication

Homework. * Adjustment : …………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………. ………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………… …………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………

Date of preparing: October 17th, 2017

Period 20 : UNIT 3: COMMUNITY SERVICE Lesson 4: Communication I. Objectives.

47

GV: Vũ Xuân Minh

Năm học: 2019- 2020

By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to know the activities that teenagers in the USA and in Viet Nam have done to help the community.

II. Language content: Vocabs related to volunteer activities III. Teaching aids: - Pictures.

III. Procedure 1. Class organization.

- Greetings.

- Checking attendance: 2. New lesson.

Students’ and teacher’s activities 1.Warm up.

Elicit different volunteer activities from Ss. Tell Ss to think of the activities both in the local community/city/town/Viet Nam, and from other places that they may have read about, or seen in books, or on TV, or the Internet etc.

2. Presentation Refer to any words in the Extra Vocabulary box that Ss do not yet know and ask Ss to try to guess what the meanings are, and how that may relate to community services and volunteer work.

II. Activities Activity 1 Ask Ss to look at the photos and describe what they see. Then tell them to compate their ideas with the text.

Contents

I. Vocabulary Tutor (v) (n): dạy kèm, gia sư nursing home (n): nhà dưỡng lão blanket (n): chăn shelter (n): nhà tình thương mural (n): tranh khổ lớn vẽ lên tường graffiti (n): tường công cộng(có vẽ tranh cổ động) sort (n), (v): loại

II. Activities

Activity 2 Activity 2 This can be done as a whole class activity.

48

GV: Vũ Xuân Minh

Năm học: 2019- 2020

Tell Ss now they will leam about volunteer activities in Viet Nam. Ask Ss what they think the volunteers in the photos are doing. 1. b If Ss cannot recognise the activities, draw Ss’ 4. a attention to small details in the photos such as words written on the coupons, or in the poster. Then do the matching together with Ss. After that, T may ask if Ss know any other actual information about these volunteer activities,or if they know any other similar activities that take place in Viet Nam.

2. c 5. d

3. e

Activity 3 Ask Ss to complete the exercise in groups.

Each group chooses one person from the group to report back to the class.

Activity 4 This can be done as a mingling activity, where each S has to interview at least 3 classmates. Ss should take notes of their classmates’ answers so later, they can share the most interesting answers with the class.

3. Home work Do exercises in the Workbook.

Prepare: Skills 1 * Adjustment : …………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………. ………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….

Date of preparing: October 6th, 2017

Period 21: UNIT 3: COMMUNITY SERVICE Lesson 5: Skills 1 I. Objectives.

49

GV: Vũ Xuân Minh

Năm học: 2019- 2020

By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to read a passage about community service and volunteer work; talk about community service and volunteer work.

II. Language content: Statistics (n):

Population (n):

Force (v):

Raise money for:

Labour (n): III. Teaching aids:

Mentor (v):

- A CD and a CD player.

III. Procedure 1. Class organization.

- Greetings.

- Checking attendance: 2. New lesson.

Students’ and teacher’s activities 1.Warm up. *Students- Teacher Exchange: Have you ever done volunteer work?

2.Presentation Present some new words

Contents

Warm up.

I. Vocabulary Statistics (n): Population (n): dân số Force (v): bắt buộc Raise money for: quyên góp tiền cho Labour (n):

* Checking technique: Slap the board 3. Activities Activity 1 Ask Ss to read the text and underline any words they don’t know. As whole class, T

Mentor (v): II. Activities

50

GV: Vũ Xuân Minh

Năm học: 2019- 2020

and Ss discuss any unfamiliar words from the passage.

Activity 2 Remind Ss of some of the American volunteer activities they learnt about in the last lesson (Communication). Call on Ss to read the statements from exercise 2 aloud.

Ask Ss to guess if the statements are true or false.

Ss work individually. T asks Ss to explain their choices (with support from the text) before giving corrective feedback.

Activity 2 1. T 2. T 3. F (The text says Americans have had the tradition of vounteering since the early days of the country. The USA was “born”, or declared its independence, in 1776.)

4. F (Americans volunteer because they enjoy it, and not because they are forced or paid to do it).

Activity 3 Activity 3 1. providing care for animals Ask Ss to read the passage again and 2. raising money answer the questuons. Correct the answer 3. cooking meals as a class.

4. donating blood 5. cleaning streets 6. teaching young children

Activity 4 Give time for Ss to work individually to - Individually to complete. complete this task. Encourage them to think of all the volunteer activities they have learnt so far in this unit, and any other activities that they know. Tell Ss they only need to write in note form and not in full sentences.

Activity 5: (good students) Divide the class into groups of four or - Share the ideas from 4. five. Explain that after each person shares - Create a new group idea bank and share 51

GV: Vũ Xuân Minh

Năm học: 2019- 2020

his or her ideas from 4, the group will it with the class. need to choose one idea and develop it in more detail.

For example, if the group chooses the idea’ make postcards and sell them’ as a way to raise funds, they will need to think of answers to questions such as: What types of postcards? What are the postcards made of? What is written on the postcards? Who can make the postcards?

Where should the postcards be sold? How will we let people know about our project?

If time allows, each group can make a short presentation of their plan to the class.

4. Home work Do exercises in the Workbook.

Prepare: Skills 2

- Do homework at home

* Adjustment : …………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………. …………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………. …………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………

Date of preparing: October 21st, 2017

Period 22: UNIT 3: COMMUNITY SERVICE Lesson 6: Skills 2 I. Objectives.

52

GV: Vũ Xuân Minh

Năm học: 2019- 2020

By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to listen for specfic information; write a paragraph about volunteer work.

Write a paragraph II. Language content: - Related to volunteer works self- confident (adj): tự tin special (adj): đặc biệt III. Teaching aids: - A CD and a CD player.

IV. Procedure 1. Class organization.

- Greetings.

- Checking attendance: 2. New lesson.

Students’ and teacher’s activities 1.Warm up.

Discussing: Why do people do volunteer work?

2.Presentation T elicits new words

Contents People do volunteer work because……

I. Vocabulary self- confident (adj): tự tin special (adj): đặc biệt

3. Activities

II. Activities

Activity 1 Ask Ss to pick choose a volunteering idea from the previous lessons. Ask the class: (?) Who do you think benefits from that ‘Who do you think benefits from that volunteer work? volunteer work?’ ‘In what way?’

Then discuss as a class the two questions (?) In what way? in exercise 1.

If T has some volunteer experience himself/herself, talk about it with the class and tell Ss what it means to you.

Activity 2 53

GV: Vũ Xuân Minh

Năm học: 2019- 2020

Remind Ss of the interview between the Global Citizen reporter and the two students Mai and Phuc from Hai Ba Trung School who do volunteer work with Be a Buddy and Go Green. Recall what happened in the first part of the interview (in Getting Started). Ask Ss it they can guess what Mai and Phuc will talk about in the second part of the interview.

Play the recording and elicit from Ss the gist of this recording. (It’s about the benefits Mai and Phuc think that volunteer work brings about.)

Play the recording as many times as necessary and have Ss answer the questions. Note that another purpose of this exercise is to prepare Ss for the Writing section later where they learn how to give reasons for their ideas and opinions.

Activity 2 1. Phuc does volunteer work because he thinks it makes a difference in the community.

2. Phuc feels more self-confident because he has made many new friends.

3. The reporter thinks Phuc is confident because Phuc has answered the interview questions very well.

4. Mai thinks volunteering is special because she can help others, and because she can see how happy the street children are when they learn.

Activity 3

Activity 3 Play the audio again and let Ss fill in the 1. volunteer 2. feel blanks.

3. because 4. because, children Activity 4 Activity 4 Go through the study Skills box with the (Answers with ‘because’ put in another class. Explain that ‘because’ is used to suitable place are also correct.) introduce the reason for something, and it 1. Because he didn’t wear enough warm can be put at the beginning of the sentence clothes, he’s had a cold for two days. or in the middle. For exercise 4, Ss will 2. I stayed home because it rained. need to identity which sentence is the 3. Because the lake is full of rubbish, reason. they’ve decided to clean it up.

For a more advanced class, T may 4. Because she works in that small town, 54

GV: Vũ Xuân Minh

Năm học: 2019- 2020

introduce ‘as’ and ‘since’, which are she has lived there for three years. similar in meaning and use to ‘’because’.

5. They think they should move there because the neighbourhood is nice and quiet Activity 5: (good students) Tell Ss now they will write a paragraph - Write a paragraph using the ideas they using the ideas they generated in Speaking generated in Speaking 4.

4. it time is short, T may ask Ss to make notes in class then develop the notes into a paragraph as homework.

4. Home work Do exercises in the Workbook.

- Do homework at home Prepare: Looking back and project * Adjustment : …………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………. ……………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………… …………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….

Date of preparing: October 22 nd, 2017

Period 23: UNIT 3: COMMUNITY SERVICE Lesson 7: Looking back-Project 55

GV: Vũ Xuân Minh

Năm học: 2019- 2020

I. Objectives.

By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to revise section of the unit.

II. Language content: - Revision words related to community services - Revision : Past simple and present perfect.

III.Teaching aids: - A CD and a CD player.

IV. Procedure 1. Class organization.

- Greetings.

- Checking attendance: 2. New lesson.

Students’ and teacher’s activities 1.Warm up.

Revision: T reminds Ss of the wordwebs about “donate”, “provide” and “help” then Ss complete Activity 1 individually. Less advanced classes can complete this exercise in pairs. Tell Ss that some words in the box can be matched with more than one verb in blue.

2. Activities Activity 2 Ss complete this task individually. T may ask Ss to explain why the option they choose is suitable to complete the sentences but the other two options are not.

Contents I. Activities Activity 1 *donate: food, books, clothing, blood *provide: evening classes, food, care, books, education, clothing, attention *help: the community, homeless people, the elderly, the disabled.

Activity 2 1. never 3. already 5. yesterday

2. Last week 4. yet

Activity 3 Activity 3 Ss conplete this task individually then share their answers with a partner and/or the class.

Before giving correction, T may ask Ss to 1. has ever met 2. visited explain the differences between sentences 2 3. has visited 4. did Shakespeare write and 3, and 4 and 5. T can quickly review the 5. has she written 56

GV: Vũ Xuân Minh

Năm học: 2019- 2020

past simple and present perfect if necessary.

Activity 4 1. the engine is very good Activity 4: ( good students ) Ss complete the exercise individually or in 2. it is going to be cold this evening pairs. T may ask Ss to swap their witings with 3. she’s kind. each other for peer correction.

4. they are not as lucky as we are.

5. she works very hard to improve her teaching.

Activity 5 Divide Ss into pairs. Tell Ss to read their role cards and ask answer questions with each other.

- Ss work in pairs/ groups of three It time permits, T may ask Ss to role-play in groups of 3: One student is a reporter interviewing the other two, the other two about their volunteer work. (T may refer to the Global Citizen interview.)

Then Ss can role play the interview for the class.

3. Production Ss propose their own volunteer project: Give Ss several days to complete the project, and ask them to present their project in the form of a poster. If the project is useful and practical, T can even help, or ask the school to help, to realize the proposal!

4. Home work Do exercises in the Workbook.

- Do homework at home Prepare: Review 1 * Adjustment : …………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………. ………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….

Date of preparing: October 26th, 2017

Period 24 :

Review 1 ( Units 1-2-3)

Lesson 1: Language, Vocabulary, Everyday English 57

GV: Vũ Xuân Minh

Năm học: 2019- 2020

I. Objectives.

By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to revise pronunciation, vocabulary, grammar, everyday English.about hobbies, health and community service.

II. Language focus : - the vocab for hobbies, health and community services - the present simple, present perfect and future simple.

III.Teaching aids: - A CD and a CD player.

IV. Procedure 1. Class organization.

- Greetings.

- Checking attendance: 2. New lesson.

Students’ and teacher’s activities 1. Warm up Role play: Patient and doctor 2. Activities LANGUAGE Pronunciation Ex1: T asks Ss to pronounce these words first and correct Ss’ mistakes. He / She then plays the recording as many times as needed.

Contents

I- Language 1. Listen and tick ( ) the word if it is the same as what you hear and cross ( X) if it is different.

1.lock x 7. cream x 2. community 8. grocer x 3. kind x 9. vampire x 10. bread 4. cracker 5. flavour

11. fruit 6. fear

12. vary x Tapescript: 1. log 7. gleam 2. community 8. closer Ex2: In order to do this exercise correctly, Ss 3. find 9. vampire have to be able to pronounce the words 4. fracture 10. bread correctly themselves. T may let Ss do it in 5. flavour 11. fruit groups and encourage them to read the words 6. fear 12. carry out loud among themselves. Then T checks 2.Choose the word in which theunderlined them as a class and encourages Ss to repeat sound is pronounced differently. the words.

1. A 2. C 3. C 4. B 5.

VOCABULARY Ex3: All these activities have been taken 3. Put the phrases below into the correct from the first three units, so they are categories and tick the activity/ activities expected to be quite easy for Ss to do. T you do yourself 58

GV: Vũ Xuân Minh

Năm học: 2019- 2020

gives Ss about 10 minutes to read and write down the phrases into the correct columns and tick their activities. For more advanced Ss, T can ask them to add more activities into the columns.

Activities to help… yourself Your community - washing your - helping the old hands before meals - raising money for - tidying up your the poor room - collecting rubbish - gardening in your area - eating a lot of - opening classes fruit for street children

Ex4: This exercise is a combination of reading comprehension and vocabulary use.

T helps by making suggestions or giving the first letter of the word. At the end, T writes the correct answers on board.

4. How much can you remember?

Choose one of the words/ phrases below to match the description. The first one is an example.

Key: 1. obeysity 2. cleaning the street 3. calories 4. staying in shape 5. donating 6. hobby GRAMMAR 5. Choose the best answer A, B, or C to complete the sentences.

1. A 2. C 3. A 4. B 5. C 6. B 6. Match the beginnings in A with the endings in B. 1. d 2. e 3. a 4. c 5. b

GRAMMAR Ex5: This is a revision of the use of simple present, simple past and present perfect and the time signals that go with each. Ss can complete this exercise with ease.

Ex6: T may let Ss read the beginnings and the endings for a few minutes, then match individually. T calls on some Ss read their answers. T corrects their answers. T corrects the answers if necessary.

EVERYDAY ENGLISH Ex7:Suggested interpretation of youranswers EVERYDAY ENGLISH If you answer “ Yes” to all the questions, you • If you answer “ Yes” to all the do have very healthy eating habits. For each questions, you do have very healthy wrong answer, take off 1 point. If your score eating habits. is under four, change your habits!

• If your score is under four, change 3. Home work your habits!

Do Test yourself in the Workbook.

Prepare: Review 1: Skills * Adjustment : …………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………. …………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………. ………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….

59

GV: Vũ Xuân Minh

Năm học: 2019- 2020

Date of preparing: November 1st, 2017

Period 25:

English Test 1

I. Objectives.

60

GV: Vũ Xuân Minh

Năm học: 2019- 2020

- T checks Ss’ understanding from Unit 1 to Unit 3 about three topics ( My hobbies/ Health/ Community service.

II. Teaching aids: - A CD and a CD player, - Paper test III. Procedure 1. Class organization.

- Greetings.

- Checking attendance: 2. New lesson.

Chủ đề I .Pronunciation

Nhận biết KQ TL 4 1m

II. Grammar III. Vocabulary

8 2m

IV. Reading

Thông hiểu KQ TL

6 1.5m 2 0.5m 5 2.5ms

VI. Writing VII. Total

12 3 ms

13 4.5 ms

Vận dụng KQ TL

Tổng

4 1m 6 1.5 ms 10 2.5ms 5 2.5 m 5 5 2.5ms 2.5 ms 5 30 2.5ms 10marks

Paper test A. PHẦN TRẮC NGHIỆM: I. Choose the word whose underlined part is pronounced differently from that of the other words in each group. ( 1 pts) 1. A. surprise B. alone C. neighbour D.burn 2. A. calories B.community C.recycle D. clean 3. A. much B. drug C. future D. buffalo 4. A. nurse B. picture C. surf D. return II. Choose the best option to complete the following sentences. 2pts) 1. She has drunk some aspirin………………..she has a headache.

A. but B. so C. because D. as 2. They raised money to help………………..people.

61

GV: Vũ Xuân Minh

Năm học: 2019- 2020

A. rich B. homeless C. poor D. B and C are correct 3. I forgot to wear a sun hat today and I got a……………………. .

A. stomachache B. earache C. backache D. headache 4. You should eat……………..junk food because you can put on weight.

A. more B. less C. much D. many 5. I enjoy…………………….comic books very much.

A. read B. to read C. reading D. reads 6. Doing volunteer work can…………….you feel more confident.

A.do B. make C. bring D. force 7. Wear a hat………………you’ll get sunburnt.

A. and B. or C. but D. so 8. We should play sports or do exercise in order to stay in……………..

A. look B. fit C. shape D. health III: Put the verbs in brackets in the correct tense form: ( 1,5 pts) 1. Peter (play)……………. football with his friends yesterday.

2. Lan ( come )……………….to my birthday party tomorrow.

3. We ( see )……………………..that film three times.

4. Nga likes (study)………………..about cultures of othet countries.

5. They ( not visit)…………………..Hue last year.

6. Mai ( not finish)…………………….. her homework yet.

IV. Tick True T or false F in the advice to keep healthy:(0,5 pts) 1. …………………Eat more fast food and sugar.

2.…………………Wash your hands carefully before meals and eat more vegetables and fruits.

V. Read the text and answer the questions. 2,5pts) The first reason why many families do volunteer work is that they feel satisfied and proud. The feeling of fulfillment comes from helping the community and other people. In addition, volunteering is a great way for families to have fun and closer. But many people say they don’t have time to volunteer because they have to work and take of their families.

If that’s the case, try rethingking some of your free time as a family. You could select just one or two projects a year and make them a family tradition. For instance, your family can make and donate gift blankets for the old homeless people on holidays. Your family can also spend only one Saturday morning a month collecting rubbish in your neighborhood.

1. How do people often feel when they volunteer? …………………………………………………………………………………………..

2. How can your family benefit from doing volunteer? …………………………………………………………………………………………..

3. Why don’t some people have time to volunteer? …………………………………………………………………………………………..

4. How can your family help the old homeless people?

62

GV: Vũ Xuân Minh

Năm học: 2019- 2020

…………………………………………………………………………………………..

5. Is collecting rubbish in the neighborhood an example of volunteer work? …………………………………………………………………………………………..

VI. Complete the second sentence in each pair so that it means the same as the sentence before it : ( 1,5 pts) 1. My hobby is collecting dolls.

->I like……………………………………….

2. I think carving wood is very difficult.

-> I find………………………………………….

3. We should eat less junk food because it is not good for our health ->Junk food is not good for our health,……………………………………….

VII. Combine each pair of the following sentences into one, using the suggested conjunctions in the brackets. ( 1 pts) 1.She had stomachache last night. She ate something wasn’t good . ( because) ->…………………………………………………………………….

2. I want to travel around the world. I don’t have enough money. (but) ->……………………………………………………………………...

ĐÁP ÁN VÀ THANG ĐIỂM CHẤM: Question I:( 1 pts) 1D 2C 3C 4B Question II: 2pts) 1C 2D 3D 4B 5C 6B 7B 8C Question III: ( 1,5 pts) 1. played 2. will come 3. have seen 4. studying 5. didn’t visit 6. hasn’t finished Question IV:(0,5 pts) 1F, 2T, Question V : 2,5pts) 1. They feel satisfied and proud 2. Volunteering is a great way for families to have fun and closer.

3. Because they have to work and take of their families.

4. Your family can make and donate gift blankets for the old homeless people on holidays.

5. Yes, it is.

Question VI : ( 1,5 pts) 1. I like collecting dolls.

2. I find carving wood very difficult.

63

GV: Vũ Xuân Minh

Năm học: 2019- 2020

3. Junk food is not good for our health, so we should eat less junk food.

Question VII : ( 1 pts) 1. She had stomachache last night because she ate something wasn’t good.

2. I want to travel around the world but I don’t have enough money. * Adjustment : …………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………. ………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….

64

GV: Vũ Xuân Minh

Năm học: 2019- 2020

Date of preparing: November 2nd, 2017 Date of teaching: November 3rd, 2017

Period 26:

UNIT 4: Music and Arts Lesson 1: Getting started

I. Objectives.

By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to use the lexical items related to the topic Music and Arts.

II. Language focus : III. Teaching aids: - A CD and a CD player.

IV. Procedure 1. Class organization.

- Greetings.

2. New lesson.

Students’ and teacher’s activities Contents 1. Warm up.

T writes on the board: Music + Arts Art: the use of the imagination to express + Then asks: ideas or feelings, particularly in painting, - Do you often listen to music? When? drawing or sculpture.

How often?

- the arts ( in general): art, music, theater, - What kind of music do you like? Why? literature, etc…When you think of them as - What is art/ are arts? Give example? a group. + T asks Ss to look at the title/ the picture and guess what the conversation between Duong and Nick might be about.

2. Activities 1. Ask Ss question about the picture: e.g: Who are Duong and Nick?

1. Listen and read What are they going to do?

- Play the recording. Ss listen and read. a, Are these sentences true (T) or false (F) a, Ss work independently or in pairs to 1. T answer the questions. Then T may let them 2. F discuss in groups. T then checks their 3. T answers, and gives explanation.

4. F 5. F 65

GV: Vũ Xuân Minh

Năm học: 2019- 2020

b, Ss work individually to fill the gaps in the sentences. T lets them check the answers in pairs or groups, then T gives the key. Calls some Ss to read the sentences.

c, Colloquial expressions - Refer back to the conversation to find the phrases. Ss practise saying them together.

Explain the meaning to the Ss, then give some examples.

d, Ask Ss to practise the short conversations in pairs before creating their short role-plays.

2. Ss write the words/ phrases under the right pictures. Then T plays the recording.

Let Ss listen and repeat. Check and correct their pronunciation. Give them the meaning of the words.

3. Ask Ss to write the correct words in the spaces. Allow Ss to check their answers.

The class gives comments, and T gives correction.

3. Home work Do exercises Workbook.

Write newwords Prepare: A closer look 1 * Adjustment :

b, Finish the following sentences by writing one word/ phrase from the conversation.

1. as good as 2. loud 3. fantastic 4. in person 5. cinema c, Find these expressions in the conversation. Check what they mean.

1. used to show your interest or surprise.

2. used when you are thinking what to say or reply.

3. used to show that you don’t agree with what Sbd has said.

4. used to show that you don’t like something. d, Work in pairs. Make short role-plays with the expressions above. Then practise them.

Example: A: There’ll be a music concert on teacher’ Day. B: Really? Are we going to sing?

A: Yes, of course.

2. Write the correct word/ phrase under each of the pictures. Then listen and repeat.

1. microphone 2. camera 3. painting 4. musical instrument 5. portrait 6. art gallery 7. crayons 8. museum 9. opera 10. painbrush 3. Complete these sentences with words from 2.

1. art gallery 2. paintings 3. museum 4. camera 5. opera.

66

GV: Vũ Xuân Minh

Năm học: 2019- 2020

…………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………. ………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….

Date of preparing: November 6th, 2017 Date of teaching: November 7th, 2017

Period 27:

UNIT 4: Music and Arts Lesson 2: A closer look 1

I. Objectives.

By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to use the lexical items related to the topic Music and Arts. Pronounce sounds / ȓ / and / ʒ / correctly in isolation and in context.

II. Language content: - Vocab related to the topic Music and Arts.

- Pronounce sounds / ȓ / and / ʒ / III. Teaching aids: - A CD and a CD player.

IV. Procedures : 1. Class organization.

- Greetings.

- Checking attendance: 2. New lesson.

Students’ and teacher’s activities 1. Warm up.

Brain storm with the Ss: Let them find all the words they know related to music and arts. Encourage them to read out as many words as possible.

2. A ctivities VOCABULARY 1. Play the recording and let Ss listen. Play it ag ain with pauses for them to repeat each word. Correct their pronunciation.

2. Ss work individually to match the words with the phrases.

T calls one or two Ss to write the combinations on the board. Then T checks the answers.

Contents

VOCABULARY 1. Listen and repeat these words. painter artist actress musician puppet dancer singer song writer 2. Match a word in A with a phrase in B 1. e 2. b 3. a 4. d 5. c 3a, Put these letters in order to make musical instruments.

1. drum 2. piano 3. cello 4. guitar 5. violin 6. saxophone.

67

GV: Vũ Xuân Minh

Năm học: 2019- 2020

3a, T lets Ss work in pairs and put the letters in order to form the correct words.

Then check their answers.

3b, Let Ss work in pairs. T checks their answers. Then let them read the words after T checks their answers. Then let them talk about these musical instruments.

4. Give Ss enough time to do the task individually. Some Ss may write the answers on the board. Then let class comments. T calls some Ss to read the sentences.

PRONUNCIATION

3b, Write the type of musical instrument in the box under each picture.

1. a guitar 2. a drum 3. one string guitar 4. a violin 5. a cello 6. a piano 7. a saxophone 4. Put one of these words in each blank to finish the sentences.

1. painter 2. Pop 3. singer 4. draw 5. puppets 6. instrument

5. Let Ss practice the sounds / ȓ / and / ʒ / together. Show Ss how to pronounce the two sounds. Play the recording and let Ss listen and repeat. Correct their pronunciation.

/ ȓ / and / ʒ / 5. Listen and repeat. Pay attention to the

6. Plat the recording 2 or 3 times. Help Ss distinguish the two sounds / ȓ / and / ʒ /, and put the words in the right columns.

Ask Ss to give more words having two sounds.

7. Play the recording as many times as possible and let Ss repead the sentences.

Correct their pronunciation and help them do the task as directed. * Sound / ȓ / can be presented by sh/ ch/ s/ t/ c * Sound / ʒ / can be represented by s ( Class 7A: Add some more words ) 3. Home work Do exercises Workbook.

Write newwords Prepare: A closer look 2

PRONUNCIATION

sounds / ȓ / and / ʒ /.

Tapescript: / ȓ /: condition ocean shy sugar machine / ʒ /: measure pleasure usual vision decision 6. Listen to the words and put them into two groups. /ʒ/ / ȓ/ anxious musician dishwasher rubbish

closure occasion leisure version

7. Listen and repeat…

1. Can you show me the new machine 2. They sing the song “ Auld Lang Syne” on some occasions 3. The musician is very anxious about the next performance.

4. She wanted to share her pleasure with other people.

5. The new cinema is opposite the bus station.

6. Are you sure this is a modern version of 68

GV: Vũ Xuân Minh

Năm học: 2019- 2020

“Romeo and Juliet?” * Adjustment : …………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………. ………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….

Date of preparing: November 8th, 2017 Date of teaching: November 9th, 2017

Period 28:

UNIT 4: Music and Arts Lesson 3: A closer look 2

69

GV: Vũ Xuân Minh

Năm học: 2019- 2020

I. Objectives.

By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to use comparisons: (not) as……..as / the same as / different from. Express agreement using too & either.

II. Language content: - Comparisons: + (not) as……..as + the same as + different from.

- Express agreement using too & either.

III. Teaching aids: - A CD and a CD player.

IV. Procedure 1. Class organization.

- Greetings.

- Checking attendance: 2. New lesson.

Students’ and teacher’s activities 1. Warm up - Set the sence: We are going to learn: +Comparisons: (not) as……..as / the same as / different from. +Express agreement using too & either.

2. Activities. +Comparisons: (not) as……..as / the same as / different from.

- Explain the uses of the three structures to Ss and give some examples.

Ex1: Let Ss work by themselves and write down the missing words. Correct Ss’ mistakes. After that, T asks some Ss to read the sentences.

Ex2: Let Ss do the task individually. First Ss read the text by themselves, then put a suitable word in each gap, and compare their answers with a classmate. T corrects Ss’ answers. T may call some Ss to read

Contents

* Grammar: 1. Comparisons (not) as……..as / the same as / different from - as + adjective + as to show that two things are similar.

- not as + adjective + as to mean something is more or less than something else.

- the same as… to show similarity.

- different from to show that two or more things are different.

Example: ( in the text book.)

1. Put as, than, or from in the gaps.

1. as 2. as 3. as 4. from 5. as 6. as 2. Put a suitable word in each gap in the following passage.

1. the same as 2. as quiet as 3. different from 4. as narrow as 5. friendly as 6. the same as 70

GV: Vũ Xuân Minh

Năm học: 2019- 2020

out their answers separately. T explains if necessary. Let Ss read in chorus. Correct their pronunciation.

Ex3: Let Ss work in pairs. Help them interpret the table first. Give them instructions on how to do the task.

- Encourage Ss to talk as much as possible with fluency and accuracy. +Express agreement using too & either.

- T explains to the class the use and location in the sentence of too and either.

Let them read the examples. Tell them to give sentences of their own.

Ex4: Ss work independently, writing down the answers. Then let them work in groups to check and read out the sentences. T goes round and corrects mistakes or gives help when and where necessary.

Ex5: Let Ss work independently, writing down their sentences to make a list of the likes and dislikes. They have their choices, so long as their sentences are correct grammatically. Encourage them to give their own ideas. ( class 7A ) Ex6: Now Ss work in pairs to share their lists of ideas. Then T may ask some more able Ss to report their results to the class.

3. Home work Do exercises Workbook.

Write newwords Prepare: Communication * Adjustment :

3. Work in pairs. Compare the two music clubs in the town. Young talent and Nightingale.

E.g: Young talent is more friendly than Nightingale.

Nightingale is not as friendly as Young Talent, but it is safer.

2. too & either - too: used to express agreement with a positive statement.

- either: used to express agreement with a negative statement.

Ex4: Complete the following sentences with “too” or “either” 1. too 2. either 3. either 4. too 5. too

Ex5: What music and arts are you interested, or not interested in? Make a list by completing the sentences below. ( You can use the words given or your own ideas.)

E.g: I’m very interested in…..Pop music…

Ex6: Work in pairs. Share your list with your partner. Then, report to the class using too/ either.

E.g: Nam is interested in drawing and I am too.

Phong doesn’t like folk music and I don’t either.

…………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………. ………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….

71

GV: Vũ Xuân Minh

Năm học: 2019- 2020

Date of preparing: November 10 th, 2017 Date of teaching: November 11th, 2017

Period 29:

Test correction 1

I. Objectives: - Help students find out their mistakes which they have had in the test.

72

GV: Vũ Xuân Minh

Năm học: 2019- 2020

- Help teacher distingush students’ level then she has suitable methods for them.

II. Correct mistakes: - Correct students’ mistakes.

- Give the answer key: III. Answer key: A. PHẦN TRẮC NGHIỆM: Question I: 1A 2D 3B 4C 5C Question II: 1C 2D 3A 4B 5A B. PHẦN TỰ LUẬN Question I: (7A: mỗi đáp án đúng được 0,25 điểm/ 7B: mỗi đáp án đúng được 0,5 điểm) 1. went 2. have known 3. wear 4. listening 5. do …. take 6. hasn’t taken Question II: 1T, 2T, 3F, 4F , 5T Question III : 1. We cleaned the beach last Sunday.

2. I haven’t seen her for two weeks.

3. Have you done your homework yet ?

4. wash your hand before meals.

Question IV. 1. fat 2. ferry 3. vast 4. vault 5. save 6. leave Audio script : 1. fat 2. ferry 3. vast 4. vault 5. save 6. leave * Adjustment : …………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………. ………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….

Date of preparing: November 13 th, 2017 Date of teaching: November 14th, 2017

Period 30 :

UNIT 4: Music and Arts Lesson 4: Communication

73

GV: Vũ Xuân Minh

Năm học: 2019- 2020

I. Objectives.

By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to talk/ sing or do other activities related to music and arts.

II. Language content : Activities related to music and arts.

III. Teaching aids: - A CD and a CD player.

IV. Procedure 1. Class organization.

- Greetings.

- Checking attendance: 2. New lesson.

Students’ and teacher’s activities Contents 1. Warm up.

- Brainstorm with Ss to give the names of famous musicians, actors, actresses, - the names of famous musicians, actors, painters, and music bands they know. This actresses, painters, and music bands can be done in groups. Each group then has to show the list they have written. ( The group that has the longest list wins the game).

2. Activities - Pre- teach vocabulary 1. Extra vocabulary. composer (n): nhà soạn nhạc originate (v) : bắt đầu, khởi đầu anthem (n) : bài quốc ca curriculum (n) : chương trình giảng dạy academic( adj) : thuộc trường cao đẳng, đại học compulsory (adj): ép buộc, bắt buộc unimportant (adj) : không quan trọng Ex1: Ss work in pairs and find answers.

2. Communication.

Then T gives the correct answers.

1. Music Quiz: What do you know?

Work in groups and answer the questions.

1. B 2. C 3. A 4. C 5. B 6. B Ex2: Give Ss plenty of time to work 2. Read the following pasage. In groups, independently, read the text, and discuss the questions below.

74

GV: Vũ Xuân Minh

Năm học: 2019- 2020

understand the main ideas. Then divide the - Do you think music and the arts should class into groups of four or five to discuss be compulsory subjects at schools in Viet the questions. T goes round the class to Nam? Why or Why not? give support if necessary.

3. Look at the different subjects below. In Ex3: Ss work in groups of four to six to groups, make a list from the most useful make a list from the most useful to least to the least useful in the space below. useful subjects given. How can the top How can the top three subjects on your three subjects on the list help them in other list help you in other ares of school and areas of school and life? life?

After the discussion, each group presents - Music their list, and gives a talk to the class. T - Dancing then gives comments.

- Singing - Painting - Photography.

3. Home work Do exercises Workbook.

Write newwords Prepare: Skills 1 * Adjustment : …………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………. ………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….

Date of preparing: November 15 th, 2017 Date of teaching: November 16th, 2017

Period 31: UNIT 4: Music and Arts Lesson 5:

Skills 1

75

GV: Vũ Xuân Minh

Năm học: 2019- 2020

I. Objectives.

By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to read for specific information about tradictional arts.

II. Language content: Related to traditional art III.Teaching aids: - A CD and a CD player.

IV. Procedure 1. Class organization.

- Greetings.

- Checking attendance: 2 . New lesson.

Students’ and teacher’s activities 1. Warm up - Asks Ss to name the art forms they know 2. Activities READING - Work in pairs to discuss the questions given.

- Tell Ss to read the passage two or three times. Set a trict time limit to ensure Ss read quickly for specific information.

Contents

1. Reading + Discuss the questions below with a partner.

- What kinds of traditional Vietnamese performance do you know about?

- Do you know about water puppetry?

Have you been to a water puppet show? If yes, did you like it? Why/ Why not?

Ex1: Ss work individually to find the 1. Find the words in the text which mean: words. Call on some Ss to say the words 1. special or different or write them on the board. T gives 2. started correction.

3. showed or presented 4. from the countryside 5. events or celebrations Ex2: Ask Ss to read the passage again, 2. Answer the following questions. then answer the questions. Then call on 1. It began in the 11th century. some individuals to read aloud to the class. 2. It takes place in a pool.

Check their pronunciation and intonation. 3. They are controlled by puppetteers.

Explain the new words and clarify 4. They are made of wood anything difficult.

5. They are about everyday life in the * good students: Let Ss talk about other countryside and about folk tales. forms of trditional arts in Viet Nam ( or in the region/ world). Refer to famous trditional arts in some countries ( e.g: Lam 76

GV: Vũ Xuân Minh

Năm học: 2019- 2020

Vong dance of Laos, Chinese traditional opera, ballet of France and Russia…)

SPEAKING Ex3: Ss work in pairs and match the two columns.

After that allow Ss some time to talk about their favourite kind of music: what kind they like best and why, whether they play any musical instruments, when and how often they listen to music, and how music is useful to them.

Ex4: Game: T explains the rules of the game Tic Tac Toe to Ss Ss work in pairs. Decide which partner is X , which is O and who will go first. The first player chooses a box and calls out a number.

E.g: Player 1: “ I want number 2” Player 2: OK, sing a song in English!

Then he/she has to sing a song in English.

If the first player answers the question for that box correctly he/ she can put an X or an O in the box. The first person to get three Xs or three Os in a row, wins!

3. Home work Do exercises Workbook.

Prepare: Skills 2

2. Speaking 3. Match the types of music in A with the adjectives to describe them in B 1. e 2. a 3. b 4. c 5. d

4. Game: Tic Tac Toe 1. Give the names of two Vietnamese musical instruments.

2. Sing a song in English.

3. Who is your favourite singer? Why? 4. Talk for 30 seconds about what you see when you visit an art gallery.

5. How often do you go to a concert? Tell your partner about the last concert you went to.

6. Who is your favourite Vietnamese musician? Why? 7. Talk about 30 seconds about your favourite instrument.

8. Name one of your favourite painters.

9. Who can draw the best in your class?

What does he/ she often draw?

Decide which partner is X , which is O and who will go first. The first player chooses a box and calls out a number.

E.g: Player 1: “ I want number 2” Player 2: OK, sing a song in English!

V. Adjustment : …………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………. ………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….

77

GV: Vũ Xuân Minh

Năm học: 2019- 2020

Date of preparing: November 19th, 2017 Date of teaching: November 21st, 2017

Period 32:

UNIT 4: Music and Arts Lesson 6: Skills 2

I. Objectives.

78

GV: Vũ Xuân Minh

Năm học: 2019- 2020

By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to listen to get information about an artist, write an informal letter of invitation.

II. Language content: - Information about an artist - Write an informal letter of invitation.

III. Teaching aids: - A CD and a CD player.

IV. Procedure 1. Class organization.

- Greetings.

- Checking attendance: 2. New lesson.

Students’ and teacher’s activities 1. Warm up T explains Listening Tip to Ss, telling them if they are going to apply the listening tip, then they must be given time to take notes.

Then tell Ss to look at the picture and say what they know about Picasso.

2. Activities LISTENING Ex1. Ask the Ss to close their books. Tell Ss they should listen and note down the keywords in their notebooks. Play the listening once. Ask Ss what they learned about Picasso. Ask Ss to open their books.

Play the recording again and ask Ss to listen carefully and circle the words they hear in the passage.

Ex2: Play the recording again. While Ss listen, they have to circle A, B, or C for their answers.

Ex3: Play the recording again once more.

As a class, Ss discuss how the listening is organised.

WRITING

Contents

1. Listening.

Listening tip: When you listen, it is very useful to take notes. Try to note down the keywords ( important words). This helps you to remember the main ideas.

1. Listen to the passage about Picasso and circle the words you hear.

1. artists 2. training 4. portrait 6. paintings.

- Look at the words you’ve circled. Do you know what all of these words mean?

2. Listen to the passage again and choose the correct answers.

1. A 2. B 3. A 4. C 3. Listen to the passage one more time. As a class, discuss how the listening is organized ( according to a timeline, the order of important events, or another way) 2. Writing

79

GV: Vũ Xuân Minh

Năm học: 2019- 2020

Informal letter of invitation.

Ask Ss why they would write an informal letter of invitation and to whom ( to invite sb to do sthing, and to sb who has close relationship to you) The focus their attention on the writing tip.

Ex4: Have Ss read the sample letter carefully, and note down the useful expressions (cues) for writing an informal letter of invitation. T writes them on the board. Tell Ss to choose the correct answers.

Ex5: Ss read the cues carefully, then practise wriitng the letter.

Tell Ss to play special attention to spelling and punctuation.

T may collect some Ss’ writing papers and mark them, then give comments to the class.

If possible, have Ss write their own letter as homework.

3. Home work Do exercises Workbook.

Prepare: Looking back and project

Informal letter of invitation.

Writing tip When you write an informal letter of invitation, you use: How about + V-ing ?

4. Read the following letter and choose the correct answer.

1. A 2. B

5. Now write a letter to invite a friend to an art exhibition, using the following.

- Event: Exhibition of Modern Art. - Time: 9 o’clock, Saturday morning - Place: Arts centre - Time to meet: 8.15

V. Adjustment : …………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………. ………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….

Date of preparing: November 22nd, 2017 Date of teaching: November 23rd, 2017

Period 33:

UNIT 4: Music and Arts Lesson 7: Looking back and project.

I. Objectives.

80

GV: Vũ Xuân Minh

Năm học: 2019- 2020

By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to look back the vocabulary, grammar, communication and do project related to the topic music and arts.

II. Language content: Look back the vocabulary, grammar, communication and do project related to the topic music and arts.

III. Teaching aids: - A CD and a CD player.

IV. Procedure 1. Class organization.

- Greetings.

- Checking attendance: 2. New lesson.

Students’ and teacher’s activities Contents 1. Warm up Chatting: What topic we are working on ?

- Ask Ss to tell some vocabularies related to the topic music and arts.

1. Vocabulary.

2. Activities.

VOCABULARY 1. Match the words in column A with the 1. Ss do this task individually to match the ones in column B. 1. e 2. c 3. b 4. a 5. d words in two columns. T corrects their mistakes.

2. Put a word from the box in each gap to 2. Let Ss work in pairs. Tell Ss to write the complete the passage.

1. music 2. arts 3. stages 4. go 5. films answers in their notebooks. Give explaination if necessary. Then T corrects the mistakes. T may let Ss read the passage 2. Grammar. in chorus or individually.

3. Put the words/ phrases from the box in GRAMMAR the gaps to complete the sentences.

1. art gallery 2. artistic 3. films 3. Have Ss work in pairs or in groups and 4. in person 5. sung write their answers in their notebooks. T checks their answers.

4. Rewrite these sentences, using the 4. Ss work individually first to write the words in brackets. sentences. Then they work in pairs to swap 1. The photograph is not as big as the paiting. their sentences. T gives correction and 2. My painting is not as expensive as this calls some Ss to red the sentences aloud. painting.

3. This picture is not different from the picture in our room.

4. This film is the same as the one we saw last week.

81

GV: Vũ Xuân Minh

Năm học: 2019- 2020

5. Ss do the task individually. Then they can check their answers with a partner.

COMMUNICATION 6. Ss read the questions and answers once or twice. Then match them.

Ss work in pairs and role-play the questions and answers, then write all sentences in their notebooks.

Finish!

Finally ask Ss to complete the selfassessment. Identify any weakness and provide further practice if necessary.

PROJECT 1. Ss work in groups. T tells them to look at the pictures and read the passage carefully. Explain words and anything difficult for Ss. Make sure they understand everything thoroughly.

2. Ss work independently. T encourages them to use their imaginations and make their own paintings. T helps Ss organise a painting shows among the class members.

Write sentences to compare those paintings 3. Home work Do exercises Workbook.

Prepare: Unit 5:- Getting started V. Adjustment :

5. The journey was not as long as we thought at first.

5. Complete the following sentences, using “too” or “ either” 1. too 2. either 3. either 4. too 5. too COMMUNICATION 6. Match the questions 1-6 with the answers A-F. 1. B 2. A 3. E 4. C 5. D 6. F Finish! Now I can….

PROJECT 1. Work in groups. Look at the following pictures and read the information below.

2. Based on the information about Dong Ho paintings and your own ideas, draw a picture of animals or the things around you….

…………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………. …………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………. th

Date of preparing: November 24 , 2017 Date of teaching: November 25th, 2017

Period 34:

UNIT 5: Vietnamese food and drink Lesson 1:

Getting started

I. Objectives: 82

GV: Vũ Xuân Minh

Năm học: 2019- 2020

- By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to understand the content of the dialogue. Ss ask and answer different traditional food.

- Develop listening and speaking skills II. Content: Vocab - The lexical items related to the topic “ Food and Drink” III. Teaching aids - Materials: Ss’ books, text books, tape recorder and CD… IV. Procedure 1. Class organization.

- Greeting.

- Checking attendance: 2. New lesson.

Ss’ and T’s activities Contents.

1. Warm up: Ask Ss about the picture: Ss answer questions: Where are Phong and his mum?

What might be happening to them?

What are they doing?

What is there in the fridge?

2Activities * Teaching new words: Elicit some new words (pictures, realias, Vocabulary: - tofu(n): đậu phụ situations ….)

- noodles (n): mì, mì sợi - warm sth up ( v): hâm nóng gì Have Ss read twice - mineral water (n): nước khoáng * Checking vocab: matching - carton (n): hộp bìa cứng 1. Play the recording. Sts listen and read.

Ss word and share their answers with friends. T correct.

Have Ss work independently.

1. Listen &read: a) Read the conversation and answer the questions: 1. Because his parents are going to the opera tonight and they won’t be home until 9 pm.

2. There’s some rice left from lunch.

3. Phong should warm it up.

4. She’ll buy some milk tomorrow.

5. He can have some orange juice instead of milk. b) Find the word about Food and Drink.

83

GV: Vũ Xuân Minh

Năm học: 2019- 2020

T. asks Ss not to look at the book and try to remember which foods and drinks.

Food

Drink

meat tofu fried vegetables bread noodles rice

milk Juice mineral water orange juice

2. Have Ss quickly match each word/ phrase with its picture.

2. Match the food and drink with the pictures.

1- J, 2 - F, 3 - A, 4- B, 5 - D, 6 - I, 7- G, 8 - H, 9- E, 10 - C. 3. Think about their favorite foods and 3. Ask Ss to think about their favorite food drinks. and drink.

Example: Ss work in pairs A: What’s your favorite food?

B: It’s pho bo - beef noodle soup.

A: When do you usually eat it?

B: In the morning.

4. Ss listen and repeat the adjectives.

4. Listen and repeat the adjectives.

1. bitter 5. salty 2. delicious 6. spicy Ss can add some more adjectives to talk 3. tasty 7. fragrant about the food and drink in 2.

4. sweet 8. sour 5. Game: What ‘s your favorite food 5. Ss work in groups. One student and drink? describes his favourite food or drink. The Example: rest of the group tries to guess which food A: It’s my favourite drink. It’s a bit sour, or drink it is. but It’s also sweet.

3. Homework: B: Is it lemonade?

Be ready for a closer look 1.

A: Yes, it is / No, try again.

Learn by heart some words V. Adjustment : …………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………. ………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….

84

GV: Vũ Xuân Minh

Năm học: 2019- 2020

Date of preparing: November 26th, 2017 Date of teaching: November 28th, 2017

Period 35:

UNIT 5: Vietnamese food and drink Lesson 2: A Closer look 1

I. Objectives: 85

GV: Vũ Xuân Minh

Năm học: 2019- 2020

- By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to use some verbs to make the pancake with some vegetables. Ss can practice pronouncing / ɒ / and / ɔ: / fluently.

- Develop listening and speaking skills II. Content: - Vocab: - The lexical items related to the topic “ Food and Drink” - Grammar: Imperative III. Teaching aids - Materials: Ss’ books, text books, tape recorder and CD… IV. Procedure 1. Class organization.

- Greeting.

- Checking attendance: 2. New lesson.

Ss’ and T’s activities Contents.

1. Warm up: Play game: slap the board Words about food and drink 2. Activities Uses some techniques to teach vocab

Checking: Rub out and remember:

1. Play the recording twice.

Ss repeat chorally and individually.

2. Ask Ss to do the exercise individually and then check with the whole class.

Vocabulary: - heat (v): đun nóng - pour (v): rót - fold (v) gấp, cuộn - beat (v) đánh - serve (v) phục vụ - turmeric (n) củ nghệ - pepper (n) hạt tiêu 1. Look at the pictures and complete the instructions with the verbs in the box.

Then, listen, check and repeat the instructions..

1. Beat 2. Heat 3. Pour 4. Fold 5. Serve 2. Put the words in the correct order to make sentences.

1. Beat the eggs together with sugar, flour , and milk.

2. Pour ¼ cup of the mixture into the pan 86

GV: Vũ Xuân Minh

Năm học: 2019- 2020

at a time.

3. Heat the oil over a medium heat in a frying pan.

4. Cook until golden.

5. Serve the pancake with some vegetables.

3. Check Ss’ understanding of the meanings of the nouns given.

Ss put the nouns in the correct columns.

4. T models the sounds / ɒ / and / ɔ: / first and let Ss see how the sounds are formed.

Ask Ss to practice the sounds together.

3. Put the nouns in the correct columns.

Dishes Ingredients pancake, beef salt, cooking oil, noodle soup, flour, pork, spring rolls, turmeric, pepper, noodles, pork, noodles. omelette, sandwich.

Pronunciation: 4. Listen and repeat the words. Pay attention to the sounds / ɒ / and / ɔ: /.

- / ɒ / : soft, hot, bottle, pot, rod.

- / ɔ: / : pork, salt, fork, sport, sauce.

Plays the recording Sts listen and circle the words they hear

3. Homework: Prepare for next.

Learn by heart some words

5. Listen to the sentences and circle the correct words you hear.

1. cod 2. port 3. sports 4. fox 5. short

V. Adjustment : …………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………. ………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….

87

GV: Vũ Xuân Minh

Năm học: 2019- 2020

Date of preparing: November 29 th, 2017 Date of teaching: November 30th, 2017

Period 36:

UNIT 5: Vietnamese food and drink Lesson 3:

A Closer look 2

I. Objectives: 88

GV: Vũ Xuân Minh

Năm học: 2019- 2020

- By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to use How much and How many to ask about quantity.

- Distinguish countable nouns and uncountable nouns.

II. Content: - Vocab: - The lexical items related to the topic “ Food and Drink” - Grammar: Nouns (countable nouns and uncountable nouns) How much and How many? a/ an/ some/ any III. Teaching aids - Materials: Ss’ books, text books, tape recorder and CD… IV. Procedures A. Class organization.

- Greeting.

- Checking attendance: B. New lesson.

Ss’ and T’s activities Contents.

Two Ss go to the board and write the adjs 1. Warm up: Brainstorming: about food and drink they’ve learnt. (in 5 minutes).

The person who writes more words is winner.

2. Activities T asks Ss to study the Grammar Box. I. Grammar: For uncountable nouns we can use Draw Ss’ attention to the difference between countable nouns and uncountable phrases like a bottle of, a piece of, a bar of, a glass of , a kilo of, a bag of, a lot of.. nouns.

Ss give some more examples.

1. Which of the following nouns are countable and which are uncountable?

1. Ask Ss to do the grammar exercise Key: individually. Remind them to refer to the Countable: banana, apple Grammar Box. Uncountable: bread, beef, pepper, pork, turmeric, spinach.

Countable nouns: Singular: Plural There is an egg. There are some eggs.

Uncountable nouns: There is some milk There isn’t any milk Is there any milk?

Note : We can use Some in an offer or a request.

89

GV: Vũ Xuân Minh

Năm học: 2019- 2020

Example: Would you like some bananas?

Can I have some milk, please?

2. Game: Give me an egg!

2. Ask Ss to study the Grammar Box. One team says words related to food or Draw Ss’ attention to the use of a, an, drink. some and any by analyzing the The other team add s some /a/ an. instructions and examples in the Grammar Example: Box. Team 1: egg Team 2: an egg 3. Fill the blanks with a/ an / some or 3. Demonstrate the game to the class first. any in the following conversation.

Then when Ss know exactly what to do.

1. any 2. some Ask them to work in groups.

3. some 4. any 5. a 6. an 4. Ss work individually.

4. Fill each blank with How many or How much.

1. How many 2. How much 3. How many 4. How many 5. How much 5. Use the suggested words to make 5. Ask Ss to study the Grammar Box. questions with How much/ How many, How many + ( countable noun) Ns the interview your partner.

How much + (uncountable noun) N Example: How much milk do you drink every 6. Ask Ss to perform. morning?

3. Homework: Be ready for Communication Learn by heart some words and grammar.

V. Adjustment : …………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………. …………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………. st

Date of preparing: December 1 , 2017 Date of teaching: December 2nd, 2017

Period 37:

UNIT 5: Vietnamese food and drink Lesson 4 : Communication

I. Objectives: 90

GV: Vũ Xuân Minh

Năm học: 2019- 2020

- By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to talk about different types of Vietnamese food, drink and recipes.

- Develop listening and speaking skills II. Content: - Vocab: - The lexical items related to the topic “ Food and Drink” III. Teaching aids: - Materials: Ss’ books, text books, tape recorder and disk…

IV. Procedure 1. Class organization.

- Greeting.

- Checking attendance: 2. New lesson.

Ss’ and T’s activities 1. Warm up: Chatting:

Contents.

Ss ask and answer some questions about food and drink..

2. Activities 1- Elicit some new words through translation and situations.

Have Ss understand the meaning of the words.

Ss predict.

Vocabulary: - sticky rice: (n) xôi - sauce: (n) nước sốt - sausage: (n) xúc xích - yoghurt: (n) sữa chua - tuna: (n) cá ngừ - ham : (n) giăm bông

Read aloud 3 times and then have students read individually. * Checking vocab: Rub- out and remember.

1. Listen to a celebrity chef, Austin Nguyen talking about his favorite food.

2- Play the recording Ss listen and check Which food in Extra vocabulary does he their predictions. talk about?

- First, have Ss read the questions in the table carefully and ask them to note their answers. Then ask Ss to share their answers 2. What are your favorite foods and 91

GV: Vũ Xuân Minh

Năm học: 2019- 2020

in pairs to find out what they have in common their partners.

Ask Ss to move around and ask different classmates every question.

3- T calls on some Ss to report the results of the ir interviews before the whole class.

drinks? Write your answers in the table below.

Example: My favorite food is spring roll.

It tastes delicious. ….

3. Interview three students about their favorite foods and drinks.

4. Report your results to the class.

3. Homework: Prepare for Skills 1 Learn by heart some new words.

V. Adjustment : …………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………. ………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….

Date of preparing: December 4th, 2017 Date of teaching: December 5th, 2017

Period 38:

UNIT 5: VIETNAMESE FOOD AND DRINK

Lesson 5:

Skills 1

I. Objectives: By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to: - Make a bowl of noodles “ Pho” and omelette.

- Read for specific information about Pho, a popular food in Viet Nam. - Develop reading and speaking skills.

II. Content: - Vocab: - The lexical items related to the topic “ Food and Drink” - Review : a/ an / some /any...

III- Teaching aids - Materials: Studentbooks, teacherbook, projector, pictures…

92

GV: Vũ Xuân Minh

Năm học: 2019- 2020

IV. Procedures: 1. Organization Checking attendance : 2. New lesson Ss’ and T’s activities 1. Warm up T asks Ss to look at the picture of a bowl of Pho. Ask them: - What dish do you think it is?

- Which place is famous for this dish?

- What are the ingredients for it?

When do people often have it?

Do you like to have it? Why or Why not?

Contents.

Ss give the answers.

2. Activities 1- T uses some techniques to present new words Check understanding: Rub-out and remember.

I. New words: stew (v) (picture) : hầm bone (n) (pic) xương broth (n) : nước luộc thịt, nước xuýt boneless (adj không xương teaspoon (n) (pic) thia cà phê pinch (n) nhúm ingredient (n) thành phần II. Practice 2- Ask Ss to scan the passage to answer the *Reading: questions.

Exercise 2. Read Phong’s blog again and answer the questions.

1. We can enjoy pho all kinds of meals - T gives the feedback. during a day, from breakfast to dinner and even for a late night snack.

- T asks Ss to note where they found the 2. They are made from the best variety information that help them to answer the of rice. questions.

3. The broth for ph obo is made by stewing the bones of cows for a long - Ss can compare answers before discussing time in a large pot. The broth for pho them as a class. ga is made by stewing chicken bones.

4. It is boneless and cut into thin slices.

- T gives the key and Ss check. * Speaking: Exercise 3. Look at the list of 93

GV: Vũ Xuân Minh

Năm học: 2019- 2020

3- T reminds Ss of the form and use of a/an/ some /any…

- Ss work in pairs, asking and answering questions about the ingredients for an omelette.

ingredients below. Work in pairs. Ask and answer questions about the ingredients for an omelette.

Example: A: I want to cook an omelette. What ingredients do I need?

B: You need….

A: How much/ How many?.....

4. Look at the picture of how to cook T asks Ss to work individually, using the an omelette. phrases in the box to complete the Example: instructions on how to cook an omelette.

1.d 2.e 3.a 4.b 5.c 5. Work in pairs. Practicing giving instructions on how to make a dish or drink.

3.Homework.

- Learn by heart new words.

- Do ex. D1,2,3 ( workbook) - Prepare for the next.

V. Adjustment : …………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………. ………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….

Date of preparing: December 5th, 2017 Date of teaching: December 7th, 2017

Period 39:

UNIT 5: VIETNAMESE FOOD AND DRINK

Lesson 6:

Skills 2

I. Objectives: 94

GV: Vũ Xuân Minh

Năm học: 2019- 2020

- By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to listen for specific information about different traditional food.

- Write about some popular foods or drinks.

- Develop listening and writing skills.

II. Content: - Vocab: - The lexical items related to the topic “ Food and Drink” III- Teaching aids - Materials: Studentbooks, teacherbook, projector, pictures…

IV. Procedures: 1. Organization Checking attendance: II. New lesson Ss’ and T’s activities 1. Warm-up T invites two groups of 5 students to take part in the game and gives some rules of the game.

2. Activities 1- T uses some techniques to present some new words.

Contents Chain game: Eg: drinkey……..

I. New words: eel (n) lươn turmeric (n) shrimp (n) tôm II. Practice. * Listening 1. Listen to three people talking about traditional dishes where they live.

Match the places with the dishes.

Key: 1. b 2. a 3. c

2- T asks Ss to read the instructions carefully and remind them to remember the name of three places and three dishes mentioned in the conversation they are going to listen.

T plays the recording.

2. Listen again. Tick the ingredients for each dish. Some ingredients are in more than one dish.

Key: banh tom : shrimp sup luon : eel, pepper, turmeric, my quang : rice noodles, shrimp, pork

95

GV: Vũ Xuân Minh

Năm học: 2019- 2020

* Writing 3- T asks Ss to read the rubric and study the table carefully.

3. Make notes about some popular foods or drinks in your neighbourhood.

Ss read the rubic and study the map carefully.

T calls on some Ss to write their answers on the board.

4- T asks Ss to make notes about some popular foods or drinks where they live.

Ss do not have to write full sentences and they can use abbreviations.

4. Post-tasks Set up the writing activity.

Ss write a draft first. Then have them write their final version in class or at home.

4. Write a paragraph about popular foods or drinks in your neighborhood.

Choose one or more. Use the information in 3, and Phong’s blog , as a model.

3. Homework - Complete the writing tasks into your notebook.

- Do exercise E 1, 2 ( workbook ) - Prepare for the next.

V. Adjustment : …………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………. ………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….

Date of preparing: December 7th, 2017 Date of teaching: December 9th, 2017

Period 40:

UNIT 5: VIETNAMESE FOOD AND DRINK

Lesson 7: Looking back-Project I. Objectives: 96

GV: Vũ Xuân Minh

Năm học: 2019- 2020

- By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to cover the whole unit and do exercises.

- Know some ways of using “ a/ an / some and any…”.

- Communication.

II. Content: - Vocab: - The lexical items related to the topic “ Food and Drink” - Grammar: Nouns (countable nouns and uncountable nouns) How much and How many? a/ an/ some/ any III. Teaching aids - CD player, CD IV. Procedures: 1. Organization Checking attendance.

II. New lesson Ss’ and T’s activities Contents 1. Warm-up T calls on some Ss to go to the board 1. Add the words or phrases they have and add the words or phrases they have learnt to the column. learnt to the column.

Key: Dishes: omelette, pancake, beef noodle soup, chicken noodle soup, rice, noodle pork, sandwich, meat, tofu, bread, spring roll…

Ingredients: shrimp, salt, cooking oil, flour, Pork, turmeric, pepper, noodle, vegetable, egg, meat, tofu…

Phrases: a slice, a can, a bottle, a kilo, a bar, a glass, a bag, a teaspoon, a tablespoon…

2. Activities 2. Fill each gap with a verb from the box.

1. Ss read the sentences carefully, and 1. Fold complete them with the verbs from the 2. Pour box.

3. Beat 4. Heat 5. Serve 2. Grammatical exercises.

Exercise 3. Choose a/ an or some for the T asks Ss to work individually first. following words.

97

GV: Vũ Xuân Minh

Năm học: 2019- 2020

3. Ss do exercise 3

4. Ss do exercise 4, 5

T asks Ss to go to the board and write.

5. T asks Ss to role-play in pairs.

Key:1. a 2. some 3. some 4. some 5. some 6. some 7. an 8. some Exercise 4. Complete the sentences with some or any.

1. any 2. some 3. any 4. some/ any 5. any/ some Exercise 5. Make questions with How many/ How much for the underlined words in the following sentences.

2. How much milk is there in the bottle?

3. How many cans of lemonade do you need?

4. How many apples does Peter got in his bag?

5. How much rice is there left in the electric cooker?

6. Choose sentences (A - D) to complete the following conversation. Practice the conversation with a partner.

Key: 1. D 2. B 3. A 4. C 7. Role-play the questions and answers.

3. Homework - Project - Prepare for the next.

V. Adjustment : …………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………. ………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….

Date of preparing: December 7th, 2017 Date of teaching: December 9th, 2017

Period 41:

Review 2 language

I. OBJECTIVES: 98

GV: Vũ Xuân Minh

Năm học: 2019- 2020

By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to review the pronunciation, vocabulary, and grammar that they have learnt from unit 1 to unit 3.

II. TEACHING AIDS: - Materials: Ss’ books, text books, tape & radio.

- Method: T- WC, group work, individual work III. PROCEDURES: Teacher’s and Ss’ activities 1. Warm up: Brainstorming ? What have you learnt in unit 1, 2, 3 in terms of language?

Then summarise their anserws and add some more information if necessary.

Contents Vocab

Pronunciation

Unit 1

Grammar Vocab

Pronunciation

Unit 2

Grammar

2. practice: Ex 1: T plays the recording and ss repeat. Play the recording as many times as necessary . Pause and correct ss’ pronunciation.

Ex 2: T plays the recording 2 or more times if necessary.

Ask Ss underline them as instructed.

Have Ss read the sentences as clas, or individually.

- T checks pronunciation and intonation.

I. Pronunciation Ex 1 - Listen and repeat.

Ex 2 Keys: 1. climb 2. improve …….speaking skills 3. stadium………….closed..

4. blue ……… skirt 5. broom………..sky…

II. Vocabulary Ex 3: peaceful –noisy hard - easy forget – remember love - hate

99

GV: Vũ Xuân Minh

Năm học: 2019- 2020

Ex 3: Ss do this exercise individually then share their answers with a partner Ex 4: Ss do this exercise individually.

T ask SS go to the board and write their answers.

T corrects as a class.

Ex5: Ss do this individually and then share their answers with a partner.

T ask SS go to the board and write their answers. T corrects as a class.

Ex 6: SS do this exercise individually. Two Ss write their anwers on the board. Confirm the correct answers.Call some ss to read the whole passage.

Ex 7.

Ss do this in pairs. After checking their answers, ask one or two pairs to act out the conversation.

traditional- modern boring-exciting country life – city life majority- minority Ex 4: 1. like/ enjoy, listening, visiting.

2. for get 3. flying/ to fly 4. mind,to do/ doing 5. playing/ to play.

III. Grammar: Ex 5: 1.later 5. more simply 2.more 6. faster 3.more fluently 7. more carefully 4.better Ex 6: 1. a 2 .an 4.the 5. the

3.the 6.a

IV. Everyday English Ex 7 1.b 2. e

3. a

4.c

5.d

I. Reading: Activity 1: Ex 1: - Give ss some tip to do this a. kind of reading text.

1, 2, 4 : T Ss read the letter once or twice.

3,5: F T clarifies anything they do not b. understand fully.

1. Which museum does Kim love to visit a. Ss do the task individually, then on Saturday afternoons? compare their answers with a 2. How many ( clay and stone) objects are partner. on display at the museum ?

T correct answers.

3. What can you learn in this museum/ Da b. Ss work in pairs.

Nang museum?

T correct as a class Ex 2: Ss work in pairs and talk II. Speaking 100

GV: Vũ Xuân Minh

Năm học: 2019- 2020

about what their family members like to do in their free time.

Encourage them to talk as much as possible, using the verbs of liking they have learnt.

Activity 2: Talk about what your family member like to do in their free time.

II. Listening:

After some time, T let Ss swap Activity 3: pairs and continue to talk. T goes around and gives assistance if Keys: necessary.

1. B 2. A 3. A 4. C 5. B Ex 3: Play the recording once or twice.

III. Writing: Activity 4: Ss listen and choose the answers Sample writing: Ss listen to the recording again In my opinion, life in the countryside has many good points. Firstly, country folk are and check the answers friendlier than city folk. Secondly, life is T explain the new words or slower and simpler than in the city. The anything difficult if necessary. food is fresher and the air is cleaner.

Ex 4: T has Ss brainstorm ideas Finally, there are lots of traditional about life in the countryside : activities that we can do in the countryside advantages, dis advantages, what they like and dislike,……….. and such as horse- riding, swimming in the river or kite-flying. For these reasons, I words and phrases they need for the writing.then explain the writing like country life. task.

HOMEWORK: - Review the target knowledge - Prepare for Review- Skills * Adjustment: ……………………………………………………………………………………………… ………………………………………………………………………………………………

Date of preparing: December 11th, 2017 Date of teaching: December 12th, 2017

Period 42:

English Test 2

I. Objectives.

T checks Ss’ understanding in Unit 4 and Unit 5 about the topics: Music and arts; Vietnamese food and drink.

101

GV: Vũ Xuân Minh

Năm học: 2019- 2020

II. Teaching aids: - A CD and a CD player, - Paper test III. Procedure 1. Class organization.

- Greetings.

- Checking attendance: 2. New lesson.

Nhận biết Chủ đề KQ TL 12 4 I. Grammar and vocabulary 3.0ms 1.0m II. Reading

Thông hiểu KQ TL 4 1.0m 4 2.0ms

2 0.5m

III.Pronunciation IV. Writing V. Total

18 4.5 ms

8 3.0 ms

Vận dụng KQ TL

Tổng

20 5.0 ms 4 2.0 ms 2 0.5 m 5 5 2.5 ms 2.5 ms 5 31 2.5ms 10marks

Paper test Question I: Find the odd one out A,B,C or D. ( 1m) 1. A.meal B. breakfast C. lunch D. dinner 2. A. meat B. milk C. egg D. fish 3. A. music B. violin C. drums D. saxophone 4. A. sour B. sweet C. bitter D. cook Question II. Choose the word whose underlined part is pronounced differently from that of the other words in each group( 0,5 m ).

1. A.measure B. leisure C. pleasure D.sure 2. A.sport B.spot C. short D.sort Question III: Choose the best answer A, B, C or D (2ms) 1. I do not have ………….. oranges, but I have …………. apples.

A. any/ any B. some/ any C. any/ some D. some/ some 2.…………………….milk do you drink everyday ?

A. How many B. How much C.How often D. How long 3. ………………….books does he want for his studying?

A. How many B. How much C.How often D. How long 4. You have to take a bath right away, and she has to a bath, …………………….

A. so B either C. neither D. too.

5. Give me…………umbrella, please.

102

GV: Vũ Xuân Minh

Năm học: 2019- 2020

A. some B.any C. an D. a 6. We hate…………………….

A. wash B. washing C. to wash D. washed 7. There is …………………….book on the table.

A. an B. some C. any D. a 8. My father doesn’t like eating tofu and I don’t like it,……………..

A. so B either C. neither D. too.

Question IV: Supply the correct verb forms:(1m) 1…………… you (write)…………. the essay yet ?

- Yes. I (write)………………… it yesterday.

2. My mother (cook)………………….. in the kitchen at the moment.

- She likes (cook)…………………very much.

Question V. Read the passage and answer the questions (2ms) Banh Tom (Crispy Shrimp Pastry ) Although Banh Tom is available almost everywhere in the country, it is best at the Nha Hang Ho Tay (Ho Tay Restaurant) on the banks of Truc Bach Lake, close to Ho Tay (West Lake) in Ha Noi. While diners await the arrival of the hot fried shrimp pastry, they can enjoy the picturesque lake and landscapes offered by the vast expanse of water from West Lake and the tree-lined Thanh Nien Road.

The dish should be eaten as soon as it arrives at the table. The fried pastry is topped with red shrimps and is eaten together with dishes of spicy vegetables mixed with sweet and sour sauce.

To remind you of the local shrimping business, waiters will often tell you that the shrimps that you have ordered for your meal have just been netted in nearby West Lake.

This will be a memorable meal that will ensure you remember your stay in Ha Noi. 1. Where is Banh Tom best in Viet Nam? ………………………………………………………………………………….

2. What can diners do while they await the arrival of the hot fried shrimp pastry ? …………………………………………………………………………………..

3. When should the dish be eaten ? …………………………………………………………………………………...

4. What is it eaten together with ? …………………………………………………………………………………

Question VI. Each sentence has one mistake, find and correct them.( 1m ).

1. How many petrol is there in the motorbike ? ………………………………………………….

2. Iced tea is my favourite food. ……………………………………………………..

3. Schools in Viet Nam are different to schools in the USA. …………………………………………………….

103

GV: Vũ Xuân Minh

Năm học: 2019- 2020

4. I don’t know him, and my sister doesn’t neither. ....................................................................................

Question VII. Complete the second sentence in each pair so that it means the same as the sentence before it :(2,5 ms) 1. My school is big. Your school is big,too.

->My school …………………………………………………….

2. This car is more expensive than that one.

-> That car is not………………………………………………….

3. Mai’s shoes are the same as Hoa’s shoes.

->Hoa’s shoes are not……………………………………………..

4. Nam is taller than Minh.

-> Minh is not……………………………………………..

5. The film we saw lastweek was more boring than we thought at first.

->The film we saw lastweek was not …………………………………… ĐÁP ÁN VÀ THANG ĐIỂM CHẤM: 1A 2B 3A 4D 1D 2B 1C 2B 3A 4D 5C 6B 7D 8B 1. have you written - wrote 2. is cooking - cooking

Question I: Question II: Question III: Question IV: Question V: 1. It is best at the Nha Hang Ho Tay (Ho Tay Restaurant) 2. While diners await the arrival of the hot fried shrimp pastry, they can enjoy the picturesque lake and landscapes offered by the vast expanse of water from West Lake and the tree-lined Thanh Nien Road.

3. The dish should be eaten as soon as it arrives at the table.

4. It is eaten together with dishes of spicy vegetables mixed with sweet and sour sauce.

Question VI : 1. many -> much 2. food -> drink 3. to - > from 4. neither -> either.

Question VII. 1. My school is as big as your school.

2. That car is not as expensive as this one.

3. Hoa’s shoes are not different from Mai’s shoes.

4. Minh is not as tall as Nam .

5.The film we saw lastweek was not as interesting as we thought at first. * Adjustment : …………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………. …………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………

104

GV: Vũ Xuân Minh

Năm học: 2019- 2020

………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………...

Date of preparing: December 11th, 2017 Date of teaching: December 12th, 2017

Period 43:

Unit 6: THE FIRST UNIVERSITY IN VIET NAM Lesson 1: Getting stared

I. Objectives: 105

GV: Vũ Xuân Minh

Năm học: 2019- 2020

- By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to understand the content of the dialogue. Ss ask and answer questions about historic places such as “ the Temple of Literature and the Imperial Academy.”.

- Develop listening and speaking skills II. Content: Vocab - words about historic places and things to take on a trip.

III- Teaching aids - CD playe, CD… IV. Procedure 1. Class organization.

- Greeting.

- Checking attendance: 2. New lesson.

Ss’ and T’s activities 1. Warm up: T introduces something about the Temple of Literature and the Imperial Academy and asks Ss some questions: 2. Activities Teaching new words: Elicit some new words (pictures, realias, situations ….)

Have Ss read twice * Checking vocab: Rub-out and remember.

Ex 1: Play the recording. Ss listen and read.

Ss can read the conversation in pairs and answer the questions.

T corrects and gives the feedback.

Contents.

Ss look at the picture and answer the questions: Who are they?

What are they doing?

What are they talking about?

Vocabulary: - Imperial Academy (n): Quốc Tử Giám - historic (adj): có thật trong lịch sử - cultural ( adj): thuộc văn hóa - surround (v): bao quanh - definitely (adv): = completely 1. Listen &read: a) Read the conversation again and answer the questions: 1. She is going to visit the Temple of Literature - the Imperial Academy.

2. It’s the first university in Viet Nam. 3. About one thousand years ago. / in the 11 century.

4. In the center of Ha Noi. 5. Because It will be cold. b) Read the conversation again.

106

GV: Vũ Xuân Minh

Năm học: 2019- 2020

Complete the table.

Keys: Things Mai needs to take and why: - Warm clothes - will be cold - camera - take photos of interesting T. asks Ss to read the conversation again and underline the things Mai needs to take things.

Things Mai doesn’t need to take /why not. and why.

- an umbrella - cold (winter) and not much sunlight and rain.

Ex2: Ss look at the table and tick the 2. Imagine that you are going to take a items they would like to take with them. trip to a temple or a pagoda. a) Look at the table and tick the items you would like to take with you. b) Work in pairs Example: I’ll take warm clothes because it’ll be cold.

Ss work in pairs. …………. c) Give advice to your partners.

Examples: Partner A : I want to take a trip to Sapa.

Partner B : You’d better take warm clothes because it’s cold.

Ex3: Ask Ss to ask and answer the 3. Think about their favorite foods and questions in groups about how to plan a drinks.

Example: trip to a place.

A: Where will you go?

B: We’ll go to Huong Pagoda.

A: When will you go?

B: …..

Ex 4: Ss read the conversation in pairs and translate it into Vietnamese.

Have Ss work independently.

3. Homework: Prepare for A closer look 1.

Learn by heart some new words. * Adjustment : …………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………. …………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………. ………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….

107

GV: Vũ Xuân Minh

Năm học: 2019- 2020

Date of preparing: December 15th, 2017 Date of teaching: December 16th, 2017

Period 44: Unit 6: THE FIRST UNIVERSITY IN VIET NAM Lesson 2:

A Closer look 1

I. Objectives: 108

GV: Vũ Xuân Minh

Năm học: 2019- 2020

- By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to know about some historic places in Viet Nam. Ss can practice pronouncing / tȓ / and / dȢ / fluently.

- Develop listening and speaking skills II. Content: - Vocab: - words about historic places and things to take on a trip.

- Grammar: Passive voice Prepositions of positions.

III. Teaching aids: - CD, CD player IV. Procedure 1. Class organization.

- Greeting.

- Checking attendance: 2. New lesson.

Ss’ and T’s activities 1. Warm up: Activity 1: Matching: T asks Ss to match the words with the pictures.

2. Activities Uses some techniques to teach vocabularies.

Checking: Rub out and remember:

Ex: Play the recording twice.

Ss guess the names of five sections (1-5) in the layout.

Contents.

1. Matching Key: 1.d 2.c 3.e 4.b 5.a Vocabulary: - well (n) : giếng - stone tablet (n) bia đá - pavilion (n) đình, tạ - heritage (n) di sản - architectural (adj) thuộc kiến trúc 2. Read the names in 1 again and listen to the recording. Complete the layout of the Temple of Literature.

Key: 1. Van Mieu Gate 2. Khue van Pavilion 3. Thien QuangTinh Well 4. Doctor’s stone tablets 5. The Temple of Literature 3. With a partner, use the prepositions in the box below to describe the layout of the Temple of Literature.

109

GV: Vũ Xuân Minh

Năm học: 2019- 2020

Ex: Have Ss describe the layout using the Example: Thien Quang Tinh Well is in the prepositions suggested. T may ask some to middle of the Temple of Literature. write the sentences on the board. ….

Pronunciation T models the sounds / tȓ / and / dȢ / first and then play the recording.

Ask Ss to practice the sounds together and write the words in the correct columns.

Ss sing the chant.

3. Homework: Prepare for next.

Learn by heart some words

Pronunciation: 4. Listen and write the words in the correct columns. Pay attention to the sounds / tȓ / and / dȢ /.

- / tȓ/ : children, chair, architectural, cultural, watch, teach, question.

- / dȢ / : job, jeans, engineer, heritage, village.

5. Listen and repeat the chant.

6. Write the words from 5 with the sounds / tȓ / and / dȢ / Key: / tȓ / : chicken, chop, cherry, chip, cheap, cheaper, which, lunch. / dȢ / : orange, jam, juice, jill, John

* Adjustment : …………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………. …………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………. ………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….

Date of preparing: December 16th, 2017 Date of teaching: December 17th, 2017

Period 45: Unit 6: THE FIRST UNIVERSITY IN VIET NAM Lesson 3: A Closer look 2 I. Objectives: 110

GV: Vũ Xuân Minh

Năm học: 2019- 2020

- By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to master the form, the use of the present simple passive.

II. Content: - Vocab: - words about historic places and things to take on a trip.

Grammar: Passive voice, Prepositions of positions.

III. Teaching aids: - CD, CD player IV. Procedure 1. Class organization.

- Greeting.

- Checking attendance: 2. New lesson.

Ss’ and T’s activities Contents.

1. Warm up: Grammar: Chatting with Ss Eg: Active: People speak English all over the 2. Activities.

T asks Ss to look at the table and explains world. how the present simple passive is used.

Passive: English is spoken all over the ..

Form?

Affirmative: S + be + PP+ (by sb).

Negative: S + be not + PP + (by sb).

We use the present simple passive when The use? the action is more important than the person who does it.

New words. relic (n) di tích regard (v) coi construct (v) = build Emperor (n) hoàng đế scholar (n) người có học thức erect (v) xây dựng Activity 1: 1. Complete the passage using the past Ask Ss to do the grammar exercise participle. individually.

Key: 1. located 2. surrounded 3. displayed 4. taken 5. considered Activity 2: 2. Using the verbs in brackets, Have Ss study the example to know how Singular: Plural to write the sentences.

Key:1. Many precious relics are displayed Ask Ss to write sentences individually. in the Temple of Literature.

111

GV: Vũ Xuân Minh

Năm học: 2019- 2020

Activity 3: T asks Ss to make sentences.

Activity 4: Form?

Ss work individually.

Activity 5: Ask Ss to read and put the passage in the correct order.

Activity 6: 3. Homework: Be ready for Communication Learn by heart some words and grammar. * Adjustment :

2. Many old trees and beautiful flowers are taken care of by the gardeners.

3. Lots of souvenirs are sold inside the Temple of Literature.

4. Khue Van pavilion is regarded as the symbol of Ha Noi. 5. The Temple of Literature is considered as one of the most important cultural and historical places in Viet Nam. 3. Using the words in the box to make sentences.

Eg: The Temple of Literature is surrounded by brick walls.

4. The past simple passive.

Affirmative: S + was/ were+ PP + (by sb).

Negative: S + wasn’t/ weren’t + PP+ (by sb).

Key:1. was 2. constructed 3. were 4. regarded 5. renamed 5. Put the parts of the passage below in the correct order. Then circle the examples of the past simple passive in the text.

Key: D-C- A -B 6. make sentences in the present and past passive voice about the places below?

Example: The One Pillar pagoda is located in the center of Ha Noi. The One Pillar was pagoda built in 1049.

…………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………. ………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………

Date of preparing: December 18th, 2017 Date of teaching: December 19th, 2017

Period 46:

Test correction 2

I. Objectives: - Help students find out their mistakes which they have had in the test.

112

GV: Vũ Xuân Minh

Năm học: 2019- 2020

- Help teacher distingush students’ level then she has suitable methods for them.

II. Correct mistakes: - Correct students’ mistakes.

- Give the answer key: III. Answer key: Question I: 1A 2B 3A 4D Question II: 1D 2B Question III: 1C 2B 3A 4D 5C 6B 7D 8B Question IV: 1. have you written - wrote 2. is cooking - cooking Question V: 1. It is best at the Nha Hang Ho Tay (Ho Tay Restaurant) 2. While diners await the arrival of the hot fried shrimp pastry, they can enjoy the picturesque lake and landscapes offered by the vast expanse of water from West Lake and the tree-lined Thanh Nien Road.

3. The dish should be eaten as soon as it arrives at the table.

4. It is eaten together with dishes of spicy vegetables mixed with sweet and sour sauce.

Question VI : 1. many -> much 2. food -> drink 3. to - > from 4. neither -> either.

Question VII. 1. My school is as big as your school.

2. That car is not as expensive as this one.

3. Hoa’s shoes are not different from Mai’s shoes.

4. Minh is not as tall as Nam .

5.The film we saw lastweek was not as interesting as we thought at first.

IV. Adjustment : …………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………. ………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….

Date of preparing: December 20th, 2017 Date of teaching: December 21st, 2017

Period 47: Unit 6: THE FIRST UNIVERSITY IN VIET NAM Lesson 4: Communication 113

GV: Vũ Xuân Minh

Năm học: 2019- 2020

I. Objectives: - By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to talk about what they should do and shouldn’t do while taking tourist trips.

- Give tips for trips.

- Develop speaking skills II. Content: 1. Vocab: - words about historic places and things to take on a trip.

2. Grammar: Passive voice III. Teaching aids - Sub-board, Cd player, CD IV. Procedure 1. Class organization.

- Greeting.

- Checking attendance: 2. New lesson.

Ss’ and T’s activities 1. Warm up: Game cards.

Preparation: Ss have five pieces of paper on which the following phrases are written: grow rice, speak English, keep the keys here, visit Van Mieu, do the homework.

T explain how the game is played;

Contents.

2. Activities T reminds Ss of the structures: Giving advice: Have Ss understand the meaning of them.

Ss predict.

Read aloud 3 times and then have students make sentences individually.

Vocabulary and structures in advance (adv) trước You’d better…..because…

It’s a good idea to ….. because…

I think you should……

You’d better…..so (that)…..

Activity 1: Ss work individually.

1. Tips for trips. a. Imagine some overseas friends are planning a trip to Ha Noi. Advise them what they should and shouldn’t 114

GV: Vũ Xuân Minh

Năm học: 2019- 2020

do. Write Do or Don’t in each box.

1. Do 2. Do 3. Don’t 4. Don’t 5. Do 6. Don’t 7. Don’t 8. Do 9. Don’t 10. Do b. Work in pairs. Practise giving advice to your partner.

Example: You’d better book a hotel in advance so that you are sure you have a room. ….

Activity 2: Let Ss have time to think about their advice.

Activity 3: T calls on some Ss to change the sentence into the present simple passive voice.

3. Homework:

2. b. Instructions: Example: S1: They grow a lot of trees and flowers in the Temple of Literature.

S2: A lot of trees and flowers are grown in the Temple of Literature. …..

Do exercises in the workbook.

* Adjustment : …………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………. ………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….

Date of preparing: December 22nd, 2017 Date of teaching: December 23rd, 2017

Period 48:

Unit 6: THE FIRST UNIVERSITY IN VIET NAM Lesson 5:

Skills 1

115

GV: Vũ Xuân Minh

Năm học: 2019- 2020

I. Objectives: - By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to know about some famous scholars and Emperors in Viet Nam. - read a passage about the first university in Viet Nam for specific information.

- Develop reading and speaking skills.

II. Content: 1. Vocab: - words about historic places and things to take on a trip.

2. Grammar: Passive voice III. Teaching aids: - CD, CD player. Sub-boards IV. Procedures: 1. Organization Checking attendance.

2. New lesson Ss’ and T’s activities 1. Warm up T asks Ss to look at the pictures and discuss the questions.

2. Activities T presents new words Check understanding: Rub-out and remember.

Activity 1: Ask Ss to scan the passage to answer the questions.

T gives the feedback.

Activity 2: T asks Ss to note where they found the

Contents.

- Do you think the Temple of Literaturethe Imperial Academy is a good English name for Van Mieu - Quoc Giam?

- Why do many Ss pay a visit to the Temple of Literature - the Imperial Academy before their exam?

- What do you think will happen to this historic place in the future?

I. New words: statue (n) bức tượng recognize (v) công nhận recognition (n) sự công nhận reconstruct (v) = rebuild III. Practice *Reading: Exercise 2. Read the passage and answer the questions.

1. in 1076 2. Because thousands of Vietnamese scholars graduated from it.

116

GV: Vũ Xuân Minh

Năm học: 2019- 2020

information that help them to match.

Activity 3: T asks Ss to do exercise 4 in groups. And ask some Ss to give answers in front of the class. The rest of the class listens and gives comments.

T gives the key and Ss check.

3. Chu Van An was.

4. It is considered the first university in Viet Nam. 3. Read the passage again and match the time in A with the events in B. Key: 1D 2A 3B 4C * Speaking: Exercise 4. Look at the four statues and talk about them. You can use the information in 2 or 3 and the other parts of the unit to help you.

Key: Emperor Ly Thanh Tong is considered the founder of the Temple of Literature.

Emperor Ly Nhan Tong is regarded as the builder of the Imperial Academy.

The erection of the first doctors’ stone table was ordered by King Le Thanh Tong.

Activity 4: Ss work in groups.

3. Homework.

- Learn by heart new words.

- Do ex. D1,2,3 ( workbook) - Prepare for the next. * Adjustment : …………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………. ………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….

Date of preparing: December 24th, 2017 Date of teaching: December 25th, 2017

Period 49: Unit 6: THE FIRST UNIVERSITY IN VIET NAM Lesson 6:

Skills 2

117

GV: Vũ Xuân Minh

Năm học: 2019- 2020

I. Objectives: - By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to listen to a passage about a famous person for specific information.

- Write a short passage about a historic place.

- Develop listening and writing skills.

II. Content: 1. Vocab: - words about historic places and things to take on a trip.

2. Grammar: Passive voice III.Teaching aids: - CD player,CD IV. Procedures: Ss’ and T’s activities Contents 1. Warm-up T invites two groups of 5 students to Chain game: Eg: Literature…….. take part in the game and gives some rules of the game.

2. Activites T uses some techniques to present some new words.

Check understanding: Rub- out and remember.

I. New words: District (n) huyện doctoral (aj) thuộc tiến sỹ regional (aj) thuộc vùng royal (aj) thuộc hoàng gia career (n) sự nghiệp

Activity1: First, Have Ss read each sentence and discuss the option ( A, B, C) that is most appropriate to complete the sentence.

T plays the recording.

II. Practice. * Listening 2. Listen to the recording and circle the appropriate answer (A, B, or C).

Key: 1. C 2. B 3. B 4. A

Activity2:

2. Listen to the passage again and write short answers to the questions below.

Key:

T calls on some Ss to write their answers 118

GV: Vũ Xuân Minh

Năm học: 2019- 2020

on the board.

T asks Ss to discuss in groups to find the information to complete the table.

1. in 1292 2. He was an honest man.

3. He continued his career and wrote books.

4. 78 * Writing 3. Discuss the table in groups.

Complete the table about the Temple of Literature- the Imperial Academy.

Key: 1070 - Emperor Ly Thanh Tong 1076 - First university in Viet Nam 1484 - King Le Thanh Tong 2003 - Founders and developers of the Temple of Literature.

4. Write a passage about the history of the Temple of Literature - the Imperial Academy.

Activity 3 T tells Ss to write a short passage about the history of the Temple of Literature the Imperial Academy.

3. Homework - Complete the writing tasks into your notebook at home.

- Do exercise E 1, 2 ( workbook ) - Prepare for the next. * Adjustment :

…………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………. ………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….

Date of preparing: December 29th, 2017 Date of teaching: December 30th, 2017

Period 50: Unit 6: THE FIRST UNIVERSITY IN VIET NAM Lesson 7: Looking back- Project 119

GV: Vũ Xuân Minh

Năm học: 2019- 2020

I. Objectives: - By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to cover the whole unit and do exercises.

- Understand the form of the present simple and past passive to do exercises - Communication.

II. Content: 1. Vocab: - words about historic places and things to take on a trip.

2. Grammar: Passive voice III- Teaching aids: - CD player, CD, sub-board IV. Procedures: Ss’ and T’s activities Contents 1. Warm-up 1. Write the past participle of the following T calls on some Ss to go to the verbs. board and write the past participle Key: of the following verbs.

Base Form Past Participle Sell sold grow grew speak spoke buy bought build built see saw 2. Complete the sentences with the past 2. Activity 1: participle form.

2. named Ss complete the exercise individually. 1. considered, stated 3. spoken 4. located 5. recognized

120

GV: Vũ Xuân Minh

Năm học: 2019- 2020

Activity 2: Grammatical exercises.

T asks Ss to work individually first.

Ss do exercise 3.

Ss do exercise 4, 5

T asks Ss to go to the board and write.

Ss work in pairs.

Activity 3: T asks Ss to work in groups.

Exercise 3. Change the sentences from the present simple active into the simple present passive.

Key: 1. Tickets are sold at the gate …. site.

2. A lot of flowers are grown in Da Lat 3. The Hung King’s Temple is visited by thousands of people every day.

4. Many beautiful Cham Towers can be seen by tourists in Binh Duong province.

5. many kinds of goods can be bought by tourists in Ben Thanh Market.

Exercise 4. Change the sentences from the past simple passive into the past simple active.

1. Emperor Ly Thai Tong founded One Pillar Pagoda.

2. Emperor Ly Nhan Tong constructed the Imperial Academy.

3. King Le Thanh Tong ordered the erection of the first Doctor’s stone tablet.

4. They built Tan Ky House in Hoi An two centuries ago.

5. They completed the construction of Tu Duc Tomb in 1876.

Communication Exercise 5 Ask and answer questions about the Temple of LiteratureEg: A: Where is the Temple of Literature?

B: It’s located in the centre of Ha Noi. 6. Report your discussions, using the information in 5.

Example: The Temple of Literature is located in the centre of Ha Noi.

3. Homework - Project - Prepare for the next.

121

GV: Vũ Xuân Minh

Năm học: 2019- 2020

* Adjustment : …………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………. ………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….

122

GV: Vũ Xuân Minh

Năm học: 2019- 2020

Date of preparing: December 30th, 2017 Date of teaching: December 31st, 2017

Period 51:

Revision

I. Objectives.

By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to listen and write a reply giving advice to someone with a health problem.

II. Teaching aids: - A CD, a CD player.

III. Procedure I. Class organization.

- Greetings.

- Checking attendance: 7A………..

IV. New lesson.

Ss’ and T’s activities 1. Warm up - Tell me the instruction how to cook rice.

2. Activities *Listening -Ask Ss to focus on the listening skill.

-Practice listening.

Contents

1. Listening 1-Listen to a holiday in England and fill in the missing words.

Holiday in England November 21st -26th

*Reading - Focus on how to do T/F exercises + Read the statements first + Scan the passage to find the information + Compare the information with the statements + Decide whether the statement is T or F + Write T/F on your paper test.

- Reading comprehension: Ask Ss to do exercises in workbook. *Writing - Review: 1. as + adj + as to show that two things are

Monday: leave at 6.30a.m 1. Tuesday : visit…Castle……

2. Wednesday: sleighing.in hills.

3. Thursday: go to…museum 4. Friday: play volleyball 5. Saturday: buy presents….

2. Reading 1-Read the blog about Vietnamese food.

Tick ( ) which sentences are true and which sentences are false. ( Exercise D1 – page 40workbook) 1. T

123

GV: Vũ Xuân Minh

Năm học: 2019- 2020

similar Not as + adj + as to mean something is more or less than something else.

- The same as…..to show similarity.

- different from to show that two or more things are different.

2. Structure : It (only) takes/ took sbd time to V… How much/ how many? *Language focus + Review : N/Ns/ Nu Phrases: a bottle of, a piece of, …

3. Homework Redo exercises again. * Adjustment :

2. F 3. T 4. T 5. F 2- Practice exercise1,2,3 P33-34, 2P41- Workbook 3. Writing Exercise E1 P34 workbook.

Key: 1.The tickets to the show cost too much.

2. Giang can’t paint as well as Khanh can.

3. A lot of children are attracted by Charles Dickens’ novels.

4. Her book is different from mine.

5. It only takes us half an hour to get to the art gallery…

- Exercise 6 P38 workbook.

4. Language focus Exercise 3- P.37 workbook.

5. Test yourself

…………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………. ………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….

124

GV: Vũ Xuân Minh

Năm học: 2019- 2020

Date of preparing: January 4th, 2018 Date of teaching: January 5th, 2018

Period 52:

Revision

I. Objectives : - Revise to prepare for the second test.

II. Knowledge : - Knowledge in unit 4 and unit 5 III. Preparation : Exercises IV. Procedures: Question I: Choose the best answer A, B, C or D 1. I do not have ………….. oranges, but I have …………. apples.

A. any/ any B. some/ any C. any/ some D. some/ some 2. What is there……………………. ?

A. drinking B. drink C. to drink D. drinks 3. ……………………. ? – There’s some meat and some rice A. What’s for lunch?

B What’s lunch?

C. What’s lunch for?

D. What for lunch?

4. You have to take a bath right away, and she has to a bath, …………………….

A. so B either C. neither D. too.

5. Thousands of people take part ……………………. paintings festival each year.

A. in B. on C. to D of 6. We hate…………………….

A. wash B. washing C. to wash D. washed 7. There is …………………….book on the table.

A. an B. some C. any D. a 8. Her brother is as intelligent ……………………. her.

A. from B. with C.as D. to Question II: Supply the correct verb forms: 1. you (write) the essay yet ?

- Yes. I (write) it yesterday.

2. My mother (cook) in the kitchen at the moment. She likes (cook) very much.

3. The new painters (decorate) my house last week.

4. The weather last year (be) not so cold as this year.

5. there (be) any oranges? - Yes, there (be) one.

Question III. Each sentence has one mistake, find and correct them.

1. How many petrol is there in the motorbike ?

2. Iced tea is my favourite food.

3. Schools in Viet Nam are different to schools in the USA. 4. I don’t know him, and my sister doesn’t neither.

Answer: 125

GV: Vũ Xuân Minh

Năm học: 2019- 2020

Question I: 1C 2C 3A 4D 5A 6B 7D 8C Question II: 1. have you written - wrote 2. is cooking - cooking 3. decorated 4. was 5. are there - is Question III : 1. many -> much 2. food -> drink 3. to - > from 4. neither -> either. * Adjustment : …………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………. ………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….

126

GV: Vũ Xuân Minh

Năm học: 2019- 2020

Date of preparing: January 6th, 2018 Date of teaching: January 7th, 2018

Period 54: Correction first term examination I. Objectives.

- Gióp häc sinh cñng cè l¹i kiÕn thøc ng÷ ph¸p, tõ vùng vÒ c¸c bài học của học kì 1 - Đánh giá chất lượng của học sinh ở học kì 1.

- Gi¸o viªn n¾m ®−îc møc ®é nhËn thøc cña häc sinh. T×m vµ ¸p dông ph−¬ng ph¸p gi¶ng d¹y phï hîp h¬n.

II. Language contents.

1, Vocabulary: 2, Structures: -Preposition -Gerund -Passive voice III. Procedures Content Activieties Stages Ask Ss how they feel about the test.

Teacher Warm up What they feel the most difficult whole class 3’ Repeat the main knowledge of the test 18’

Correct the test

Repeat the main language content.

1. Past simple tense - Ask Ss to repeat how to use past simple tense and form a) Use: is used to express an action which happened in the past b) Form: S +V-ed c) Keywords: yesterday, last ,ago.

2. Prepositions - Ask Ss to remember prepositions: at, in ,on, before, after, between 3.Gerund like/ enjoy...+V-ing He likes playing volleyball 4. Passive voice S + to be+vPP + ( by) + O -Give examples Question I.Find the word which has different sound in the part underlined.(1pt)

Teacher whole class

Teacher whole class

127

GV: Vũ Xuân Minh

Năm học: 2019- 2020

20’

1. B 2. A 3.C 4. B Question II. Choose the correct answer A, B, C or D to finish the sentences: (2.5pts) 1. B 2. A 3.C 4.D 5.C 6.A 7.C 8. B 9.A 10.C Question III..Complete the sentence with less, more, a, an, some ,any (1.5pts) 1.more 2.some 3.an 4.any 5.less 6.a Question IV. Put the verbs in the correct tense. (2 pts) 1.has donated 2. did….. go 3.watches 4.doing Question V.Read the passage and answer (2pts) 1. It (The average age of Japanese women) is 85 2. It is made from soybeans 3. It (Tofu) contains less fat 4. Seafood like fish and vegetables( play an important role in their diet.)

Question VI.Rewrite the following sentences so that the meaning of the sentences stay the same.(1pt) 1.Peter enjoys providing care for animals 2. Thephotogrard is not as big as the painting

Teacher Valuate Líp SL G K TB Y Student’s 7A 36 10 8 16 2 test 2’ V.Adjustment: .................................................................................................................................................. ..................................................................................................................................................

Date of preparing: January 8th, 2018 128

GV: Vũ Xuân Minh

Năm học: 2019- 2020

Date of teaching: January 9th, 2018

Period 55:

Unit 7 : TRAFFIC

Lesson 1: Getting started I. Objectives.

By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to know some words, phrases related to traffic topic. The usage of “How” to ask about means of transport.

II. Language content: III.Teaching aids: - Projector.

IV. Procedure Ss’ and T’s activities 1. Warm up.

- T introduces the topic “ Traffic” Ask: How/ By what means do you go to school every day?

On foot? By bicycle? By bus? On your parents’ motorbike…

- What means of transport is faster? What mean is safer? What means do you like most?Why? - What can you see on the way to school every day?

- Who are Mai and Oanh?

- What may they talk about? + Play the recording. Ss listen and read.

2. Activities.

1-a: Ss work independently or in pairs to choose the correct answer to the questions.

T then checks their answers, and gives explaination if necessary. b- Ss work in pairs. T lets them check the answers in pairs or groups, then gives the keys. If there’s time, call some pairs to read the questions and give answers.

C- Colloquial expressions.

Contents 1. Getting started a. Choose the correct answer.

1. B 2. A 3. B 4. C b. Answer the following questions.

1. She played with her brother/ stayed at home.

2. It’s about 2 kilometers.

3. She usually goes to school with her dad.

4. Because sometimes there are traffic jams 5. She goes to school by bike. c. Can you find the following in the conversation? Do you know what they mean?

1. to have someone’s attention.

2. when you strongly support or agree with something.

3. very excited and keen to do something. d. Work in pairs. Make short role-plays with the expressions above. Then practice them.

Example: - How about cycling to school with me tomorrow?

- Great idea!

129

GV: Vũ Xuân Minh

Năm học: 2019- 2020

Tell Ss to refer back to the conversation to find the phrases. Ss practise saying them together ( T plays the recording again if necessary). Explain the meaning to the Ss, then give some examples. d. Ask Ss to role-player the short conversations in pairs before creating their short role-plays. More able Ss can try to extend the conversation.

2. Means of transport.

Write the words using the first letter given.

1. bike/ bicycle 2. bus 3. plane 4. boat 5. ship 6. train 2. Ss work in pairs and write the means of 7. motorbike transport under the right pictures. Then T 8. car lets Ss read each word correctly. Check 3. Match a verb on the left with a means and correct their pronunciation. of transport on the right. There may be more than one correct answer.

3. Ss work individually to do the task, and 1. ride a bike 2. drive a car write their answers in their notebooks. T 3. fly by plane 4. sail on/ in a boat checks their answers.

5. get on/ get off a bus/ a train/ a bike/ a motorbike.

4. Let Ss stand up and go round the class to 4. Find someone in your class who never. ask everyone the question: - How often do you walk to school/ go to Ss have to take notes, and then some of school by bus…? them report their result to the class.

- Do you (often walk to school/ go to school by bus?

3. Homework -Learn new words and phrases Prepare A closer look 1. * Adjustment : …………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………. ……………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………… …………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………..

Date of preparing: January 10th, 2018 130

GV: Vũ Xuân Minh

Năm học: 2019- 2020

Date of teaching: January 11th, 2018

Period 56: Unit 7 : TRAFFIC Lesson 2: A closer look 1 I. Objectives.

By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to use the lexical items related to the topic “Traffic”. Pronounce sounds /e/, /ei/ correctly in isolation and in context.

II. Language content: sounds /e/, /ei/ III. Teaching aids: - Projector.

IV. Procedure Ss’ and T’s activities 1. Warm up.

- Brainstorm the Ss: let them give all road signs they see every day on the way to school, or elsewhere, and all the words they know related to the topic of traffic and transport. Encourage them to say out as many words as possible.

2. Activities.

VOCABULARY 1. Ss work in pairs to talk about the meaning of the road signs, then write out their answers.

Contents

I- Vocabulary ROAD SIGNS 1. Have you seen these road signs? Talk about the meaning of the signs below with a partner.

2. Label the signs in 1 with the words/ phrases below.

1. trafic lights.

2. no parking 3. no right turn 4. hospital ahead 5. parking 6. cycle lane 7. school ahead 8. no cycling 2. Ss work individually to label the road signs in 1 with the words/ phrases.

Look out!

Look out: There are usually three kinds of - A sign within a red triangle will warn signs: informative, prohibitive, and you of something. warning.

- Signs with red circle are mostly prohibitive- that means you can’t do something.

- Signs in blue are usually to give information.

3. Let Ss work in pairs and talk about the 3. Work in pairs. Discuss which of the traffic signs they see on the way to school ( signs you see on the way to school.

131

GV: Vũ Xuân Minh

Năm học: 2019- 2020

or else). T goes around and gives assitance if necessary, and check their answers.

PRONUNCIATION 4. First, T give examples of the sounds /e/, /ei/. Let Ss practise the sounds together.

Ask Ss to observe the T’s mouth and listen to the teacher for these two sounds carefully. Play the recording and let Ss listen and repeat as many times as required. Correct their pronunciation.

5. Play the recording 2 or 3 times. Help Ss distinguish the sounds /e/ , /ei/ and recognize all the words with the two sounds, then underlined them as assigned 6. Refer back to the page 8. Ask Ss to find all the words having sounds /e/, /ei/

Example: A: On the way to school, I can see a “ no left turn” sign.

B: On my way to school there is a hospital, so I can see a “hospital ahead” sign.

II- PRONUNCIATION /e/ /ei/ 4. Listen and repeat. Pay attention to sounds /e/, /ei/ /e/: left, ahead, present, helicopter, centre, never, seatbelt /ei/: plane, way, station, train, indicate, mistake, pavement, break.

5. Listen to these sentences carefully.

Single-underline the words with sound /e/, and double-underline the words with sound /ei/ /e/: 1. ever /ei/: break, way 2. very railway, station 3. 0 always, obey, safety 4. left, when UK 5. next They, waiting, train 6. Read a loud

3. Homework -Learn new words and phrases Prepare A closer look 2. * Adjustment : …………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………. …………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………. ………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….

Date of preparing: January 12th, 2018 132

GV: Vũ Xuân Minh

Năm học: 2019- 2020

Date of teaching: January 13th, 2018

Period 57: Unit 7 : TRAFFIC Lesson 3: A closer look 2 I. Objectives.

By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to use “it” for distances, use “ used to” to talk about past habit or state.

II. Language content: Used to + Vinfi III.Teaching aids: - Projector.

IV. Procedure Ss’ and T’s activities 1. Warm up.

Chatting: You have already learned it as the formal subject to indicate time and weather, climate,…In this unit, it appears to indicate distance.

2. Activities GRAMMAR It indicating distance - T explains, then give example 1. Let Ss work by themseves and write down the sentences. T observes and help when and where necessary. After that ask some Ss to read their sentences. T corrects Ss’ mistakes.

2. Ss work in pairs. They ask and answer qustions about distances in their neighbourhood, following the example.

Encourage them to talk as much as possible. T corrects their answers, and their pronunciation and intonation.

Used to Explain to the Ss that used to is the same form for all persons. It is used to discribe an action, a habit or a state that happened

Contents I. It indicating distance - We can use it in the position of the subject to indicate distance 1.Write sentences with it. Use these cues.

1. It is about 700 metres from my house to Youth Club 2. It is about 5 km from my home village to the nearest town.

3. It is about 120 km from Ho Chi Minh to Vung Tau. 4. It is about 384,400 km from the Earth to the Moon.

5. It is not very far from HaNoi to Noi Bai Airport.

2. Work in pairs. Ask and answer questions about distances in your neighbourhood.

Example: A:How far is it from your house to school?

B: It’s about a kilametre.

II- Used to - We use used to to describe an action or a

133

GV: Vũ Xuân Minh

Năm học: 2019- 2020

regularly in the past, but does not happen now.

3. Ss work independently, writing down the answers. Then let them work in groups to check and say out the sentences. T goes round giving help when and where necessary. Some Ss may write their answers on the boards. Other Ss give comments and T give corrections.

4. Let Ss work individually to rewrite the sentences in their notebooks.

While Ss do their task, T goes round to monitor the whole class. When Ss finish their task, call some to read out their sentences. Let others give comments, T corrects mistakes if necessary.

5. Ss work in groups. They take turns to ask and answer questions. Then T may ask some Ss to report their result to the class.

One S may report to the class.

state that happened regularly in the past but does not happen at present.

Example: There used to be many trees on the street, but now there are only shops.

Form: (+) S + used to + V (-) S + didn’t use to + V (?) Did + S + use to Watch out: In questions and negative sentences, the final “d” in used is dropped.

3. Complete the sentences with used to or use to and the verbs in the box below. be ride play go feel 1. used to ride 2. used to be 3. used to go 4. Did…use to play 5. did…..not use to feel 4. Rewrite the sentences using used to.

1. My mum used to live in a small village when she was a girl.

2. There did not use to be (as) many vehicles on the road.

3. We used to cycle to school 2 years ago.

4. Now there are more traffic accidents that there used to be.

5. My uncle used to be a bus driver some year ago, but now he has a desk job.

5. Work in groups. Did you use to do those things? Ask and answer.

Example: Did you use to play marbles?

Yes, I did …………

3. Homework - Do exercise part A, B workbook Prepare: Communication V. Adjustment : …………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………. ………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….

Date of preparing: January 15th, 2018 134

GV: Vũ Xuân Minh

Năm học: 2019- 2020

Date of teaching: January 16th, 2018

Period 58: Unit 7 : TRAFFIC Lesson 4:

Communication

I. Objectives.

By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to know names of some countries and some strange laws in other countries.

II. Language content: 1. Vocab: roof: nóc, mái nhà illegal: bất hợp pháp, trái luật Laws: luật, phép tắc đảo, nghịch, lùi xe Reverse: Right-handed: thuận tay phải 2. Grammar: Revision III. Teaching aids: - Projector.

IV. Procedure Ss’ and T’s activities 1. Warm up - Have you ever heard about strange laws in other countries?

2. Activities - Pre- teach vocabulary.

- First, have Ss read the new vocabulary after the teacher saying that they will appear in the task that follow. Explain their meaning.

Contents

I- Extra vocabulary. roof: nóc, mái nhà illegal: bất hợp pháp, trái luật Laws: luật, phép tắc Reverse: đảo, nghịch, lùi xe Right-handed: thuận tay phải

II- Practice 1: Look at the flags of some countries.

1: Ss work in groups and give the names of Give the names of these countries. the five countries.

1. The UK 2. Australia 3. India 135

GV: Vũ Xuân Minh

Năm học: 2019- 2020

4. Thailand 5. Malaysia 2. Play the recording. Ss listen carefully and check their answer to 1. Then T gives the correct answers - Play the recording again. Let Ss complete the table by themselves, then share their answer with a partner. T goes round the class to give support if necessary.

2. Now listen and check your answers.

Complete the blanks. Share your answer with a partner.

Reasons this happened: 1. some countries used the same system as UK. 2. many people are right-handed ( so on the left-hand side, it is easier for them to use a sword or something when they are on horseback – in the past)

3. Ss work in pairs, discussing to find one false driving law.

T may ask the question: Which one do you think seems most unreasonable? Then let Ss think and give the answer.

3. Look at the strange driving laws below. Five of them are true, but one is false. In pairs, can you find the fasle driving law?

- “In France, you can only reverse your car on Sundays”. This sentence is false!

4. Ss work in groups and dis cuss the laws in 3 and put them in order from the strangest ( N01) to the least strange ( N05).

T may ask Ss to explain why.

4. Now, work in groups. Discuss the laws and put them in order from the trangest (1) to the least strange (5) The groups may have different results

3. Homework - Do exercise part C workbook - Prepare: Skills 1 V. Adjustment : …………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………. ………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….

Date of preparing: January 17th, 2018 136

GV: Vũ Xuân Minh

Năm học: 2019- 2020

Date of teaching: January 18th, 2018

Period 59: Unit 7 :TRAFFIC Lesson 5:

Skills 1

I. Objectives.

By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to read for specific information about traffic rules/ laws. Talk about obeying traffic rules/ laws, and how to use the road safely.

II. Language content: Revision III.Teaching aids: - Projector.

IV. Procedure Ss’ and T’s activities 1. Warm up - Chatting: Look at the picture. What can you see in the picture?

2. Activities.

READING 1. T tells Ss to look at the picture and say why it is dangerous.

Example: It is dangerous to ride a motorbike on the pavement.

2. Ss work in pairs to do the matching. T checks their results.

Then T asks Ss which they can see in the picture in 1.

3. Ss work in group. Tell them to answer the question: When you are a road user, what should you Not do?

Then they make a list to compare with other groups.

T may give some cues: not pay attention, not look around, go in red light,….

Contents I- Reading.

1. Look at the picture. Can you see anything that is dangerous?

2. Now match these words to make common expressions.

1. g 2. d 3. b 4. c 5. a 6. h 7. f 8.e 3. Answer the following question.

- not pay attention - not look around - not go in red light,.. + Make a list: 4. Read the following text and do the tasks below.

5. Answer these question.

1. We should cross the street at the zebra crossing.

2. He/ She must always fasten the seabelt.

3. No, He/ She shouldn’t. Because it is dangerous.( He/ She may cause an accident.)

137

GV: Vũ Xuân Minh

Năm học: 2019- 2020

4. Tell Ss to read the passage two or three times. Set a strist time limit to ensure Ss read quickly for specific information.

Explain the new words and clarify anything difficult. T may ask questions to see if Ss understand the passage.

5. Ask Ss to read the passage again, than they work with a partner to answer the questions.

Speaking 6. Ss do the class survey. After that call some Ss to report to the class.

7. Allow some time for Ss to read individually. Then they work in groups to discuss who is using the raod safely, and who is acting dangerously, and give reasons.

3. Homework - Do exercise part D workbook - Prepare: Skills 1

4. We must give a signal.

5. Because the other road users can see them clearly and avoid crashing into them.

II- Speaking 6. Class survey. Ask your classmates the question.

How do you go to school every day? + Make a list of the means of transport that is used the most, and use the least.

7. Read the following sentences. In groups, discuss who is using the road safely, and who is acting dangerously.

Give reasons.

1. safely 2. dangerously ( because he is likely to have an accident) 3. safely 4. dangerously ( it is difficult for him to see the road properly, and to ride) 5. dangerously ( a car or motorbike may crash into him) 6. dangerously ( She may have an accident if something happeneds unexpectedly.)

V. Adjustment : …………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………. ………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….

Date of preparing: January 19th, 2018 138

GV: Vũ Xuân Minh

Năm học: 2019- 2020

Date of teaching: January 20th, 2018

Period 60: Unit 7 :TRAFFIC Lesson 6:

Skills 2

I. Objectives.

By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to listen to get information about traffic problems in big city, write a paragraph about traffic problems in a city/ an area.

II. Language content: Revision III. Teaching aids: - Projector.

IV. Procedure Ss’ and T’s activities 1. Warm up.

- Show pictures of traffic problems in big cities.

Contents

I- Listening.

Traffic problems in a big cities 1. Work in groups. Where do you think this picture was taken? Why is it special?

- In a big city…..

2. Tell Ss to look at the newspaper 2. Look at the following headline and headline and check their answers. check your answers.

- In Brazil - long traffic jam ( very long line of vehicles).

3. Play the recording one or two times. Ask 3. Now listen to the passage and choose Ss to listen carefully and circle the correct the correct answer.

1. B 2. C 3. A 4. C answers.

2. Activities.

LISTENING 1. Ss work in groups. They study the picture and answer the tow questions.

II- Writing WRITING - What do you think about traffic problems in big cities in Viet Nam are.

4. Have Ss look at the pictures, read the pgrases and tick the problems

4. Tick the traffic problems in big cities in Viet Nam.

139

GV: Vũ Xuân Minh

Năm học: 2019- 2020

Picture: 1,2,3,4,6 Writing: - There are too many vehicles ( on the road).

- Many roads are narrow and bumpy - There are traffic accidents every day.

- Many young children ride their bikes dangerously.

5. Tell Ss to study the sentences they have 5. Write a paragraph about the traffic written, then practise writing the problems where you live, or in a town, or paragraph. a city you know well. Use the cues above, Tell Ss to use proper connector: first/ and the following outline.

Introduction: firstly, second/ secondly, ……and pay Problem1: attention to spelling and punctuation.

- Collect some Ss’ writing papers and mark Problem 2: Problem 3: them, then give comments to the class.

Conclusion: (Reason or advice/suggestion) Then Ss write full sentences. Call some Ss to write on the board. Others give comments. T gives corrections.

3. Homework

- Do exercise workbook - Prepare: Looking back

V. Adjustment : …………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………. ………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….

Date of preparing: January 22nd, 2018 140

GV: Vũ Xuân Minh

Năm học: 2019- 2020

Date of teaching: January 23rd, 2018

Period 61: Unit 7 : TRAFFIC Lesson 7: Looking back + Project I. Objectives.

By the end of the lesson, Ss can use what they have learnt during the unit to help them answer the questions. Ss need to see how for they have progressed, and which areas need further practice.

II. Language content: Revision III. Teaching aids: - Projector.

IV. Procedure Ss’ and T’s activities 1. Warm up.

- Chatting: What is the topic of Unit 7.

2. Activities.

VOCABULARY 1. Ss do this task individually to write the meaning below each sign. T corrects their mistakes and lets them read the words correctly.

- Then let Ss work in groups and put the signs into the correct boxes.

3. Let Ss work in pairs. Tell Ss to write the answers in their notebooks. T checks their answers.

GRAMMAR 3.Have Ss work in pairs or in groups and write their answers in their notebooks. T checks their answers.

Contents I- Vocabulary 1. What do these signs mean? Write the meaning below each sign. Then put them into the correct box.

1. Traffic lights 2. School ahead 3. Hospital ahead 4. Cycle lane 5. Parking 6. No parking 7. left turn only 8. No cycling Prohibition signs: 6,8 Warning signs: 1,2, 7 Information signs: 3,4,5 2. Write the names of means of transport in the word web below. Then draw lines joining the correct verbs to the transport.

- Suggestion: bicycle, motorbike, car, bus, taxi, train, plane, boat, ship…

II- Grammar 3. Change the sentences according to the prompts in brackets.

1. Did you use to go to school on foot?

141

GV: Vũ Xuân Minh

Năm học: 2019- 2020

2. Mr. Van didn’t use to ride his motorbike dangerously.

3. Did the streets use to be cleaner and more peaceful?

4. I used to go out on Sundays.

5. They didn’t use go to on holiday together.

4. Write sentences using these cues.

1. It is over 100 km from my home-town to HCM city.

2. It is about 25 km to my grandparents’s house.

3. I used to ride a small bike in the yard before my flat.

4. There used to be a bus station in the city centre, but it was/ has been moved to the suburbs.

5. Children must learn about road safety before they are allowed to ride a bike on the road.

III- Communication COMMUNICATION 5. Ss read the questions and answers once 5. Match the questions 1-6 with the or twice ( they can read alound), then answers a-f match them.Ss work in pairs and role- play 1. b 2. a 3. e 4. d 5. f 6. c the questions and answers, then write all Finish! Now I can…

Talk about road signs and means of sentences in their notebooks. transport Finished!

Use it to talk about distance Finally ask Ss to complete the selfUse used to to talk about a past habit assessment. Identify any difficulties and Write a paragraph about traffic problems. weak areas and provide further practice if need be.

PROJECT 1- Ss work in groups.

3. Homework - Make some traffic signs of your own out of paper, cardboard or other materials.

- Prepare: Unit 8- Getting started 4.Ss work individually first to write the sentences. Then they work in pairs to swap their sentences. T gives correction and calls some Ss to read the sentences aloud.

V. Adjustment : 142

GV: Vũ Xuân Minh

Năm học: 2019- 2020

…………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………. ………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….

Date of preparing: January 24th, 2018 Date of teaching: January 25th, 2018 143

GV: Vũ Xuân Minh

Năm học: 2019- 2020

Period 62:

Unit 8 : FILMS

Lesson 1: Getting started ( What film shall we see?)

I. Objectives.

By the end of the lesson, Ss will listen and read about topic” What film shall we see?”.

Use the lexical items related to the topic “ Films” II. Language content: Related to films: Type of film, Actors/ stars, The plot III. Teaching aids: - Projector.

IV. Procedure Ss’ and T’s activities 1. Warm up - Write the title on the board “Films”.

Elicit any information Ss know about films by asking about types of film they know, the latest films they have seen, their favourite films and film stars.

- What the picture might show or what the conversation might be about.

2. Activities.

1. Ask Ss questiona about the picture: - Where are Phong and his sister Mai? What might be happening to them? What are thet doing? What are they talking about?

Contents

I- Getting started 1. Listen and read a. Read the conversation again and and answer the questions.

1. b 2. a 3.a 4. c 5. b

- Can you guess what kind of films Phong and Mai would like to see.

- Have you ever gone to see a film with your brothers/ sisters? When and where?

What film did you see then? How did you feel then?

- Plat the recording. Ss listen and repeat.

144

GV: Vũ Xuân Minh

Năm học: 2019- 2020

a. First, have Ss work independently. Then allow them to share answers before discussing as a class. b. First, Ask Ss not to look at the book and try to remember what questions Mai asks Duong about the film they are going to see.

Then let Ss open their books and check their answers.

b. Find the questions in the conversation that ask about Coconut Crazy. Then listen, check and repeat the question. a. What kind of film is it? b. Who does it star? c. What is it about? d. What do critics say about it?

2. Have Ss quickly match the types of film with their definitions. Then play the 2. Match the types of films with their recording for Ss to check their answers. definitions. Then listen, check and repeat.

- Do you often see a sci-fi/ horror film…..? 1. d 2. f 3. a 4. c 5. b 6. e 7. h 8.g 3a. Have Ss work independently, filling in the table with the information of the film they have seen recently. Remind them to use the words and phrases they have learnt in 2 and from the conversation in 1.

b. First, model this activity with a more able Ss. Then ask Ss to work in pairs. T may go around to help weaker Ss. Call some pairs to practice in front of the class.

3. Homework - Listen and read the getting started again - Prepare: Unit 8- A closer look 1

3a. Think of a film. Fill in the blank below.

Type of film……………….

Actors/ stars……………….

The plot……………………

Reviews…………………… b. In pairs, interview each other and try to guess the film.

Example: A: What kind of film is it?

B: It’s an action film A: Who does it satr?

B: It stars Daniel Craig.

A: What is it about?

B: It’s about a spy called 007.

A: Is it Skyfall?

B: Yes!

V. Adjustment : …………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………. ………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….

Date of preparing: January 26th, 2018 Date of teaching: January 27th, 2018 145

GV: Vũ Xuân Minh

Năm học: 2019- 2020

Period 63:

Unit 8 : FILMS

Lesson 2: A closer look 1 I. Objectives.

By the end of the lesson, Ss will use the lexical items related to the topic “Films”.

Know the meaning and how to use –ed and –ing adjectives. Pronounce correctly the –ed ending in verbs.

II. Language content: 1. Vocab : Adjectives which are often used to describe films 2. Grammar: How to read “ed” III.Teaching aids: - Projector.

IV. Procedure Ss’ and T’s activities 1. Warm up Chatting: Do you know the adjectives which are often used to describe films?

2. Activities VOCABULARY 1. First, hace Ss work independently. Then, ask them to share their answers with one or more partners. With weaker class, ask for translation of some adjectives in the box to check their understanding. Ask Ss to make some examples with the adjectives they have learnt.

Remember: -ed and – ing adjectives Ask Ss to study the Remember Box. 2. Have Ss compare the table individually.

Then have some Ss write their answers on the board before checking with the whole class.

3. Ask Ss to do the exercise individually and then check with the whole class. When checking, ask Ss to refer to the Remember Box to make the meanings of the adjectives

Contents

I- Vocabulary 1. The following are adjectives which are often used to describe films. Can you add some more?

1. hilarious 2. moving 3. boring 4. gripping 5. shocking 6. scary 7. violent 8. entertaining * Remember: -ed and –ing adjectives 2. Complete the table with the –ed and – ing forms of the adjectives.

1. interested 2. embarrassing 3. exciting 4. disappointed 5. exhausted 6. surprising 7. confused 8. frightening 3. Choose the correct adjectives.

1. moving 2. frightened 3. disappointed 4. amazed 5. terrified 146

GV: Vũ Xuân Minh

Năm học: 2019- 2020

clearer to them.

4. (a+b) First, model this activity with some more able Ss. Then, ask Ss to work in pairs.

T may go around to help weaker Ss. Call some pairs to practise in front of the class.

4a. Work in pairs. Look at the questions below. Tell your partner how you felt, using –ed adjectives.

Example: I felt terrified before my last Maths test.

4b. Now use –ing adjectives to describe these things & experiences in your life Example: The last film I saw was called Norwegian Wood. It was really moving.

PRONUNCIATION II- Pronunciation 5. T models the sounds /t/ /d/, and /id/ in 5. Listen and repeat the verbs. Pay different words with the ending –ed. Play the attention to the sounds /t/, /d/, and /id/ recording and ask Ss to listen and repeat the at the end of each verb. words, paying attention to the sounds /t/, /d/, /t/ /d/ /id/ and /id/ at the end of each word. T may play watched waited played the recording as many times as necessary. danced needed bored Then, ask Ss to put the words in the correct walked hated closed columns while they listen. Ss compare their answers in pairs. T checks.

Remember: Ask Ss to look at the rules in the * Remember: remember Box. Tell them the rules of pronunciation.

6. First, model this activity with a more able 6. Work in pairs. Ask and answer Ss. Then ask Ss to work in pairs. T may go questions about the pictures. Then around to help listen to the recording.

- Call some pairs to practice in front of the Example:cry a lot/ laugh a lot class. T checks pronunciation.

A: He cried a lot, didn’t he?

B: No, he didn’t. He laughed a lot.

- Do exercise A in workbook 3. Homework - Prepare: Unit 8- A closer look 2 V. Adjustment : …………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………. ………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….

Date of preparing: January 29th, 2018 Date of teaching: January 30th, 2018 147

GV: Vũ Xuân Minh

Năm học: 2019- 2020

Period 64: Unit 8 : FILMS Lesson 3: A closer look 2 I. Objectives.

By the end of the lesson, Ss will use although, despite, and in spite of to express contrast between two prices of information in the same sentence. Use however and nevertheless to express contrast between two sentences.

II. Language content: although, despite/ in spite of; however/ nevertheless III.Teaching aids: - Projector.

IV. Procedure Ss’ and T’s activities 1. Warm up Chatting: We are going to learn about although, despite/ in spite of; however/ nevertheless.

2. Activities Grammar Although, despite/ and in spite of - Ask Ss to study the Grammar Box. Draw Ss’ attention to the meaning and use of although, despite, and in spite of by analysing the examples in the grammar Box. Then ask some more able Ss to give some more examples.

- For 1,2and 3, tell Ss what they should do.

Ask Ss to do the grammar exercises individually. Remind them to look back to the Grammar Box and use a dictionary if necessary. Then have Ss compare answers in pairs before checking with the whole class.

Contents GRAMMAR Although, despite/ and in spite of We use although, despite/ in spite of to express contrast between two pieces of information in the same sentence. We use although before a clause and despite/ in spite of before a noun or a phrase.

1. Complete the sentences. Use although + a clause from the box.

1…..although few people came to see it 2. Although they spent a lot of money on the film 3. Although the acting is exellent.

4. ….although it was a comedy 5. …although it is set in modern times.

2. Complete the sentences, using although, despite/ in spite of. Sometimes, two answers are possible.

1. Although 2. despite/ in spite of 3. although 4. Despite/ In spite of 5. Although 3. Rewrite these sentences using the words in the brackets. Change other 148

GV: Vũ Xuân Minh

Năm học: 2019- 2020

However and nevertheless Ask Ss to study the Grammar Box. Draw Ss’ attention to the meaning and use of however and nevertheless by analysing the instruction and examples in the Grammar Box. Then ask some more able Ss to give some more examples.

4. Tell Ss what they should do. Ask Ss to do the grammar exercise individually.

Remind them to look back to the Grammar Box and use a dictionary if necessary.

Then Ss compare answers in pairs before checking with the whole class.

5. Read the instructions.

Ask Ss to do the exercise individually, using their own ideas to write sentences.

Then have them work in pairs, comparing their sentences.

3. Homework - Do exercise B in workbook - Prepare: Unit 8- Communication

words in the sentence if necessary.

1. I don’t think…..although he is…

2. Although many…, …

3. Despite having to work…,…..

4. Although he has….,…..

5. In spite of (having) a happy ending,…

However and nevertheless.

We also use however and nevertheless to express contrast between two sentences.

We usually use a comma after them.

4. Complete the sentences…

1. However/ Nevertheless 2. Despite/ In spite of 3. However/ Nevertheless 4. Although 5. Although

5. Use your own ideas…

Ss’ ideas

V. Adjustment : …………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………. ………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….

Date of preparing: January 30th, 2018 Date of teaching: February 1st, 2018 149

GV: Vũ Xuân Minh

Năm học: 2019- 2020

Period 65: Unit 8 : FILMS Lesson 4: Communication I. Objectives.

By the end of the lesson, Ss will do a survey on favourite actors/ films…then report their results to those group members.

II. Language content: Ask and answer questions to take a survey III.Teaching aids: - Projector.

IV. Procedure Ss’ and T’s activities 1. Warm up - Today, we are going to do an interview with your classmate about films. Please think of the questions you may ask your friends in your interview with them.

2. Activities - Translate the meanings of the words in extra vocabulary.

1. Ask Ss to look at the picture and read the conversation and guess what the missing words from the blanks may be. T plays the recording and lets Ss check their guesses. Play the recording again for Ss to check the answers.

2. Ask Ss to work in group of six or eight, asking their group members one set of questions. Remind them to write the names of names of the people they interview and note the answers in the table.

Contents

- What kind of films you like to see?

- Who are your favourite actors/ actresses?

I- Extra vocabulary survey: cuộc khảo sát go ahead: cứ làm đi, cứ tự nhiên violence: có nhiều cảnh bạo lực 1. Listen to the conversation and fill in the blanks with the words you hear.

1. survey 2. actor 3. Tom Cruise 4. actrwess 5. Angelina Jolie 2. Work in groups of six or eight. Each of student chooses one of the following sets of survey questions.

- Survey on favourite actors - Survey on the best films.

- Survey on action films - Survey on cartoons 150

GV: Vũ Xuân Minh

Năm học: 2019- 2020

3. T has Ss make notes of their survey result, using the suggestions in Student’s book. T may have them practice reporting the results of their surveys in pairs or in groups.

4. Ask Ss to join another group, reporting the results of their survey to the new members. Choose some Ss to report the results of their interviews before the whole class. After each S has finished his/her report, T invites some comment from other Ss. Then T makes comments and corrects Ss’ mistakes.

3. Homework

3. Make notes of your results.

- Most people I have surveyed….

- About half of the people I have surveyed - Almost no one I have surveyed….

4. Join another group. Report your results to those group members.

- Do exercise part C in workbook - Prepare: Unit 8- Skills 1

V. Adjustment : …………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………. ………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….

Date of preparing: February 2nd, 2018 Date of teaching: February 3rd, 2018 151

GV: Vũ Xuân Minh

Năm học: 2019- 2020

Period 66: Unit 8 : FILMS Lesson 5: Skills 1 I. Objectives.

By the end of the lesson, Ss will read for specific information about someone’s review of his/her favourite film. Talk about film (its plot, main characters, cast, etc.)

II. Language content: sinking must-see special effects visuals III.Teaching aids: - Projector.

IV. Procedure Ss’ and T’s activities 1. Warm up Now, look at the picture of the film Titanic and answer the questions 2. Activities.

READING 1- Ask Ss to scan the passage to find where the words sinking, must-see, special effects, and visuals are in the passage. T may help Ss work out the meanings of these words out of the context.

Contents - Have you ever seen this film?

- Do you know who actor and actress in the picture are?

- Do you like him/her? Why/ Why not?

I- Reading 1. Read Nick’s review of the film Titanic on his blog. Then find and underline the words from the box below. What do they mean? sinking: (sự) chìm, sự đánh chìm must-see: bộ phim hấp dẫn cần xem special effects: kỹ xảo đ.biệt, h.ứng đ.biệt visuals: thị giác, nhìn 2- T may set a longer time limit for Ss to 2. Read Nick’s blog again and answer the read the text again and answer the questions. questions. Ask Ss to note where they found 1. It is a romantic film. the information that helped them to answer 2. It stars Leonardo DiCaprio and Kate the questions. Ss can compare answers Winslet. before discussing them as a class.

3. It is about the sinking of the ship Titanic on its first voyage.

4. The main characters are Jack Dawson and Rose Dewitt Buckater. Jack saves 152

GV: Vũ Xuân Minh

Năm học: 2019- 2020

SPEAKING 3- First, ask Ss to read every film poster. T may help them with the new vocabulary.

Then ask Ss to work in pairs, talking about the films they would/ wouldn’t like to see.

- T may go round to help.

- Some pairs practise in front of the class.

4- First, ask Ss to work in pairs, asking and answering about the films from the posters.

- T may go round to help.

- Calls some pairs to practise in front of the class.

5- First, remind Ss of the words phrases about films. Ss may refer to the words and phrases they can use to talk about films.

- Ss work in groups; T goes around to provide support if necessary.

3. Homework

Rose from killing herself by jumping from the ship. Although they are from different social class and Rose is already engaged, the two fall in love.

5. The ending of Titanic is very sad.

6. They say it’s a must-see in the 20th century.

II- Speaking 3- Look at the film posters below. Work in pairs. Talk about the films you would/ wouldn’t like to see.

4- Now, ask and answer questions about the films.

Example: A: I want to see War of the Worlds.

B: What kind of film is it?

A: It’s a science fiction B: What is it about?

A: It’s about….

5- Hotseating: In groups, choose a student to play the role od a character in any of the films above. Brainstorm questions you’d like to ask. Then interview the student.

Example questions: - Can you describe your new film in three words?

- Did you enjoy making the film?

- Why should we watch this film?

- Do exercise part D in workbook - Prepare: Unit 8- Skills 2

V. Adjustment : …………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………. ………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….

Date of preparing: February 2nd, 2018 Date of teaching: February 3rd, 2018 153

GV: Vũ Xuân Minh

Năm học: 2019- 2020

Period 67:

Unit 8 : FILMS Lesson 6: Skills 2

I. Objectives.

By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to listen to get information about traffic problems in big city, write a paragraph about traffic problems in a city/ an area.

II. Language content: traffic problems III.Teaching aids: - Projector.

IV. Procedure Ss’ and T’s activities 1. Warm up.

- Show pictures of traffic problems in big cities.

Contents

I- Listening.

Traffic problems in a big cities 1. Work in groups. Where do you think 2. Activities. this picture was taken? Why is it special?

- In a big city…..

LISTENING 1. Ss work in groups. They study the 2. Look at the following headline and picture and answer the tow questions. check your answers.

- In Brazil - long traffic jam ( very long line of 2. Tell Ss to look at the newspaper vehicles). headline and check their answers.

3. Now listen to the passage and choose 3. Play the recording one or two times. Ask the correct answer.

2. C 3. A 4. C Ss to listen carefully and circle the correct 1. B answers.

II- Writing WRITING 4. Tick the traffic problems in big cities in - What do you think about traffic problems Viet Nam. Picture: 1,2,3,4,6 in big cities in Viet Nam are.

Writing: - There are too many vehicles ( on the 4. Have Ss look at the pictures, read the road). pgrases and tick the problems Then Ss write full sentences. Call some Ss - Many roads are narrow and bumpy - There are traffic accidents every day. to write on the board. Others give - Many young children ride their bikes comments. T gives corrections.

154

GV: Vũ Xuân Minh

Năm học: 2019- 2020

dangerously.

5. Tell Ss to study the sentences they have 5. Write a paragraph about the traffic written, then practise writing the problems where you live, or in a town, or paragraph. a city you know well. Use the cues above, Tell Ss to use proper connector: first/ and the following outline. firstly, second/ secondly, ……and pay Introduction: Problem1: attention to spelling and punctuation.

- Collect some Ss’ writing papers and mark Problem 2: them, then give comments to the class.

Problem 3: Conclusion: ( Reason or advice/ suggestion) 3. Homework - Do exercise workbook - Prepare: Looking back V. Adjustment : …………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………. ………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….

Date of preparing: February 2nd, 2018 Date of teaching: February 3rd, 2018 155

GV: Vũ Xuân Minh

Năm học: 2019- 2020

Period 68:

Unit 8 : FILMS

Lesson 7: Looking back and Project I. Objectives.

By the end of the lesson, Ss will revise the knowledge they have learnt about the topic “films”.

II. Language content: types of films -ed or –ing adjectives III,Teaching aids: - Projector.

IV. Procedure Ss’ and T’s activities 1. Warm up - Chatting:What topic have you learnt inU8 - How to write a film review?

2. Activities VOCABULARY 1. Ask Ss to think of as many examples of different types of films as possible. Then ask some Ss to say out their examples in front of the class.

2. Ask Ss to read the sentences carefully and decide which types of films the people are talking about. Remind that the adjectives in the sentences will provide the context for them to choose the correct types of films.

3, 4: Ask Ss to do individually. Check the results with a partner. T gives feed back.

Contents

I- Vocabulary 1. Think of an example of every type of films in the box.

Example: Mr. Bean is a comedy.

“Big Ben Down” is an action film 2. Read the sentences. What types of films are people talking about?

Key: 1. It’s a comedy.

2. It’s a horror film 3.It’s a documentary.

4.It’s a romantic comedy.

5.It’s a Sci-fi film.

3. Fill in the blanks with -ed or –ing adjs that are formed from the verbs in brackets 1. terrified 2. disappointing 3. annoying 4. satisfied 5. shocking 4. Complete the second sentences…

1. They were excited about the film.

2. The film was boring so they left halfway through it.

156

GV: Vũ Xuân Minh

Năm học: 2019- 2020

3. We were moved at the ending of thefilm 4. You’ll be surprised at his new film.

5. Lots of people find the way he behaves/ GRAMMAR his behaviour confusing.

5, First, ask Ss to do individually. Then ask II- Grammar them to check their answers with a partner 5. Match the first half in A with the before discussing the answers as a class. suitable half in B. Remind Ss to keep a record of their 1. d 2. e 3. a 4. b 5. c original answers so that they can use that information in their Now I can…statement.

COMMUNICATION III- Communication 6, First, ask Ss to do the task individually 6. Number the lines of the dialogue in the to number the lines of the dialogue. Then correct order. ask them to check their answers with the 1. E 2. I 3. A 4. D 5. F 6. B 7. G whole class. After finishing, ask Ss to 8. C 9. H practise saying the dialogue with their IV- Finished! partners.

Finished! Now I can…

Finished! * Use words and Finally, ask Ss to complete the selfphrases for different assessment. Identify any difficulties and types of films. weak areas and provide further practice. * distinguish the uses of –ed adjectives and – ing adjectives. * use connectors: PROJECT althpugh, despite, in 1. Ask Ss to read the film posters and point spite of, however, and out what information should be included in nevertheless a film poster. Then ask Ss to work in pairs/ * talk about your groups to discuss the question in 1. Each favourite films Ss may make notes about the ideas from * write a film review his/her partner or other group member.

PROJECT 2. Ask each s to choose one of their 1. Look at the film below. Think about the favourite films, and design a poster for it. following questions.

They may use the ideas from the notes for - What is the purpose of a film poster? their task.

E.g: To give information of a film.

3. Display Ss’ leaflets on the wall. T 2. Choose one of your favourite films and choose some of the posters of the film design a poster for it. posters and ask Ss to give comments.

3. Then organise an exhibition of film 3. Homework posters in your class.

- Do exercise in work book ( The rest ones) 157

GV: Vũ Xuân Minh

Năm học: 2019- 2020

- Prepare: U 9- Festival around the World.

V. Adjustment : …………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………. ………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….

Date of preparing: February 21st, 2018 Date of teaching: February 22nd, 2018 158

GV: Vũ Xuân Minh

Năm học: 2019- 2020

Period 69:

Unit 9 : FESTIVALS AROUND THE WORLD Lesson 1: Getting started – The Festival Project

I. Objectives.

By the end of the lesson, Ss can use the lexical items related to the topic “ Festivals around the world” and read for specific information about an unusual festival.

II. Language content: fascinating (aj) hấp dẫn amazing (aj) đáng ngạc nhiên religious (aj) thuộc tôn giáo firework (n) pháo hoa make a camp (v) cắm trại III.Teaching aids: - Projector, cassette players, disc…

IV. Procedure Ss’ and T’s activities 1. Warm up.

- Play games: Solve the crossword below.

- Review the previous unit before Ss open their books by asking them to solve a crossword puzzle.

2. Activities.

T uses some techniques to present some new words.

Checking the understanding by making sentences with the new words.

Contents

T shows keys on the projector.

New words fascinating (aj) hấp dẫn amazing (aj) đáng ngạc nhiên religious (aj) thuộc tôn giáo firework (n) pháo hoa make a camp (v) cắm trại 1. Getting started 1-a: Ss work independently. Allow them to a. Answer the following questions. share answers before discussing as a class. 1. No, she didn’t because she said “ Oh T then checks their answers, and gives really?” to show her surprise. explanation if necessary.

2. People light candles and display/ let off fireworks.

3. It’s La Tomatina 4. Because to celebrate the festival people go to the desert, make a camp, and have a party.

5. They should write up reports and hand 159

GV: Vũ Xuân Minh

Năm học: 2019- 2020

b- Ss read the conversation again to do this exercise. Ask for Ss’ answers as well as the explanation for their choices.

2. Tell Ss that in the box are some festivals. Ss do this activity in pairs.

T plays the recording for Ss to listen, check and repeat their answers. Make sure that Ss pronounce correctly the name of the festivals.

3. Explain to Ss that festivals are held for different reasons.

Ask Ss if they know the meaning of these words.

Seasonal (aj) relate to or happening a during a period in the year.

Religious (aj) connected with religion or with a particular religion.

Superstitious (aj) based on the belief that particular events happen in a way that cannot be explained by reason or science.

4. Ss work with classmate and compare their answers. T reminds them to follow the model conversation in the box.

5. Organize a competition game for this activity.

3. Homework -Learn new words and phrases Prepare A closer look 1.

V. Adjustment :

them in to the teacher. b. Tick (v) T (true) or F (false).

1. T 2. T 3. F 4. T 2. Write the festivals in the box under the pictures. Then listen and repeat.

1. Water festival 2. Cannes Film Festival 3. Ghost Day 4. Tet 5. Rock in Rio 6. Christmas 7. Halloween 8. Easter 3. Match the festivals below with the reasons they are held.

Key: Religious: Halloween, Ghost Day Music /Arts Rock in Rio, Cannes Film Festival Seasonal: Tet, Water Festival Religious: Christmas, Easter

4. Compare your answers with a partner.

Example: A: I think Rock in Rio and the Cannes Film Festival are music or arts festivals.

B: I agree.

A: Which do you think are seasonal festival?

B: I think Christmas and Easter. How about you?

A: I think Halloween and Ghost day.

5. Can you add more festivals to the groups in 3?

…………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………. …………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………

Date of preparing: February 23th, 2018 160

GV: Vũ Xuân Minh

Năm học: 2019- 2020

Date of teaching: February 24th, 2018

Period 70:

Unit 9 : FESTIVALS AROUND THE WORLD Lesson 2: A closer look 1

I. Objectives.

By the end of the lesson, Ss can use adverbial phrases correctly and appropriately. The lexical items related to the topic “Festivals around the world”. Pronounce two-syllable words with correct stress in isolation and in context..

II. Language content: celebratory (aj) mang tính kỷ niệm parade (n) cuộc diễu hành carnival (n) ngày hội joyful (aj) vui mừng adopt (v) kế tục pumpkin (n) quả bí ngô III.Teaching aids: - Projector, cassette player, disc…

IV. Procedure Ss’ and T’s activities 1. Warm up.

- T asks Ss some questions about festivals in their home village.

2. Activities.

VOCABULARY T uses some techniques to present some new words.

Checking the understanding by making sentences with the new words.

1. a. Ss work individually to complete the table and compare their answers with a partner.

T plays the recording for Ss to check their answers.

Contents Ss answer: I- Vocabulary celebratory (aj) mang tính kỷ niệm parade (n) cuộc diễu hành carnival (n) ngày hội joyful (aj) vui mừng adopt (v) kế tục pumpkin (n) quả bí ngô 1. a. Can you complete the table below with appropriate verbs, nouns and adjectives?

Listen and check your answers.

Key: 1. celebration 2. festive 3. parade 4. culture 5. performance b. Now complete the following sentences with the words from the table.

Key:

161

GV: Vũ Xuân Minh

Năm học: 2019- 2020

b. Have them read all the sentences and guess the part of speech of the word to be filled in each blank.

T comments on and confirms the correct answers.

1. festival 2. celebrate 3. celebrations 4. culture 5. parade 6. performers 2. In groups, choose a festival. Take turns to say the festival.

Example: A: I am going to Rio Carnival to watch performers dance.

2. Ss work in groups, Ss do the activity.

B: I’m going to Rio Carnival to watch They choose one activity and take turn to performers dance, and musicians play samba lengthen their sentences by adding the music. activities. …

Look out!

In two-syllable words the mark’ represents the stress syllable.

PRONUNCIATION - Most nouns and adjs have two syllables: 3. T explains the rules: Stress falls on the first syllable.

- Most verbs have two syllables: Stress falls on the second syllable.

Exceptions: the sound / ə /, / i /,…. hardly falling on.

T can give some examples to illustrate.

Key: Stress on 1st syllable: gather, picture, Ss listen and repeat the words. artist,lovely, famous Stress on 2nd syllable: relax, enjoy, hotel, describe, rename.

Have Ss read out the words first. Then play 4. Circle the word with a different stress the recording. pattern from the others. Then listen and check.

Key: 1. balloon 2. complete 3. prepare 4. alone 5. tidy 5. Ss do this exercise individually first then 5. Read the following sentences and mark compare their answers with a partner. “ ’ ” the stressed syllable in the underlined words.

1. ‘project 2. ‘dancers 3. Homework 3. a‘ttend 4. ‘answer 5. ‘music -Learn new words and phrases Prepare A closer look 2.

V. Adjustment : …………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………. ………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….

Date of preparing: February 26th, 2018 162

GV: Vũ Xuân Minh

Năm học: 2019- 2020

Date of teaching: February 27th, 2018

Period 71: Unit 9 : FESTIVALS AROUND THE WORLD Lesson 3: A closer look 2 I. Objectives.

By the end of the lesson, Ss can review H/ Wh questions and use adverbial phrases.

Do exercises.

II. Language content: - Adverbial phrases - W- question: When, Where , How ,Why,What III. Teaching aids: - Projector, cassette player, disc….

IV. Procedure Ss’ and T’s activities 1. Warm up.

Chatting: T chats with Ss about festivals in the pictures.

Ask Ss to look at the pictures and think of the information they want to get about the festival.

2. Activities GRAMMAR 1. Adverbial phrases: - T explains and gives examples: +Adverbial phrases made with nouns: Eg: every year, every day, last year…. + +Adverbial phrases made with prepositions: Eg: in 2013, in a small town, with beautiful plants. +Adverbial phrases made with toinfinitive: Eg: to enjoy the party, to have more friends.

Contents

Grammar: Look out! An adverbial phrase gives extra information about the time, place, manner, etc. of an action. Adverbial phrases are made with nouns, prepositions or infinitives. They can be used to answer different questions.

Type/ question: When time Where place How often frequency Why reason How manner What thing 2. Now look at the webpage. Complete the 2. Tell Ss that they are going to read table about the festival. information about the Cannes Film Festival Key: 163

GV: Vũ Xuân Minh

Năm học: 2019- 2020

and complete the table.

3. Think about a festival you know in VietNam.

4. Ss do exercise individually, and then compare their answers with a classmate.

Check Ss’ answers and confirm the correct ones.

What?

Who? Where?

When?

How often?

How? Why?

A film festival By film star, In a city in France May Every year In a very serious way To win the Palme Do’r

4. Join the questions to the types of answers.

Key: who person Why reason Which whole sentence ……

5. Phuong is doing an interview for VTV.

6. Now make questions for the underlined parts.

Key: 1.Where did you buy this T- shirt?

2. How often do you go to the music festival?

3. Why did your friends save money?

4. When did you go to the Flower Festival in Da Lat? 7. Games.

Example: A: Where is the festival held?

7. Ss work in groups. One student thinks B: In the USA and some other countries in of any festival he/she likes. Other Ss ask the world. questions about the festival to find out C: When do people celebrate it? what festival it is. Remember to use H/Wh- ………… questions and adverbial phrases.

3. Homework - Do exercise part A, B workbook Prepare: Communication V. Adjustment : 5. Ss do this activity in pairs. Check Ss’ answers and have them role play the conversation.

6. Ss work independently, writing down the questions.

T can call on some Ss to write their answers on the boards.

Other Ss give comments and T give corrections.

…………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………. ………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….

Date of preparing: February 28th, 2018 164

GV: Vũ Xuân Minh

Năm học: 2019- 2020

Date of teaching: March 1st, 2018

Period 72: Unit 9 : FESTIVALS AROUND THE WORLD Lesson 4: Communication I. Objectives.

By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to ask and answer questions about festivals.

II. Language content: thanksgiving: (n) lễ tạ ơn chúa stuffing: (n) lông vũ, gối ôm feast: (n) bữa tiệc gravy: (n) nước sốt thịt cranberry: (n) quả man việt quất III. Teaching aids: - Projector, cassette player, disc…

IV. Procedure Ss’ and T’s activities 1. Warm up - T asks Ss to tell some festivals in their home village.

- Make some questions about festivals.

2. Activities - Pre- teach vocabulary.

- First, teacher uses some techniques to present new words. Then have Ss read the new vocabulary after the teacher.

Check the understanding: Make sentences with the new words.

1. Ss look at the picture and discuss the questions in pairs.

2. Play the recording. Ss listen carefully and check their answer to 1. Then T gives

Contents

I- Extra vocabulary. thanksgiving: (n) lễ tạ ơn chúa stuffing: (n) lông vũ, gối ôm feast: (n) bữa tiệc gravy: (n) nước sốt thịt cranberry: (n) quả man việt quất II- Practice 1: Look at the animal below. Discuss the following questions with a partner.

Key: a. A turkey b. It’s one of the traditional foods of important festival. c. Thanksgiving 2. Now listen and check your answers.

165

GV: Vũ Xuân Minh

Năm học: 2019- 2020

3. In pairs, write true (T) or false (F) for the following sentence.

3. Ss work in pairs to decide if the Key: 1. F ( It’s also held in Canada) statements are true or false.

2. F ( It’s celebrated on the fourth Thursday of November and in Canada it’s celebrated on the second Monday of Oct. 3. T 4. F ( Children also take part in food preparation.)

5. T 6. F ( Some people like to go for a walk or takes naps) 7. F 4. Ss work in pairs. Imagine that one of 4. Work in pairs. Imagine that one of them is a student from the US and the other them is a student from the US and the is from Phu Yen, Viet Nam. Explain that other is from Phu Yen, Viet Nam. the only the Ss from Viet Nam read the Ask and answer about Thanksgiving information on page 35. and Hoi Mua, a harvest festival in Phu T calls some pairs to act out the Yen. conversations in class.

3. Homework - Do exercise part C workbook Prepare: Skills 1 the correct answers

V. Adjustment : …………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………. ………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….

Date of preparing: March 2nd, 2018 166

GV: Vũ Xuân Minh

Năm học: 2019- 2020

Date of teaching: March 3rd, 2018

Period 73: Unit 9 : FESTIVALS AROUND THE WORLD Lesson 5: Skills 1 I. Objectives.

By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to read for specific information about an unusual festival. Help Ss to read quickly ( scanning).

II. Language content: greasy (aj) vấy mỡ, dính mỡ pole (n) cái cột cannon (n) súng jet (n) vòi phun nước chaos (n) sự lôn xộn goggle (v) gương mắt, trợn tròn mắt III. Teaching aids: - Projector, cassette player, disc…

IV. Procedure Ss’ and T’s activities 1. Warm up - In pairs, look at the picture below. They are all from the La Tomatina festival in Spain. Put them in the order you think they happen at the festival.

- Present some new words.

2. Activities.

READING 2. Ss read the text quickly and check the answers.

Contents I. New words. greasy (aj) vấy mỡ, dính mỡ pole (n) cái cột cannon (n) súng jet (n) vòi phun nước chaos (n) sự lôn xộn goggle (v) gương mắt, trợn tròn mắt 2. Now quickly read the texts below and check your answers.

Key: C – D – A - B

3. Answer the following questions.

3. Ss read the text again and answer the 1. It is celebrated on the last Wednesday questions: every August.

2. He stayed up late Ss can underline parts of the text that help 3. They placed a ham on top of greasy pole.

167

GV: Vũ Xuân Minh

Năm học: 2019- 2020

them with the answers.

4. Ss work in groups and read the newspaper headlines.

They discuss what is unusual about the festivals.

Have some Ss present their group’s ideas.

5-6. Tell Ss that the table includes information about the two festivals in 4.

Ss work in groups and prepare a short presentation about the festival they like.

3. Homework - Do exercise part D workbook - Prepare: Skills 2

4. They had to wear goggles to protect their eyes.

5. It was a jet from water cannon.

6. It was red with rivers of tomato juice.

Speaking 4. Work in groups and read the newspaper headlines.

5. Choose one festival to teach your group about. .

Suggestion questions: 1. What do they often do at Season festival?

2. Where do they organize activities?

3. When does the festival take place? ……

V. Adjustment : …………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………. ………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….

Date of preparing: March 5th, 2018 168

GV: Vũ Xuân Minh

Năm học: 2019- 2020

Date of teaching: March 6th, 2018

Period 74: Unit 9 : FESTIVALS AROUND THE WORLD Lesson 6: Skills 2 I. Objectives.

By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to listen to get specific information about a music festival.

II. Language content: Related to festivals III. Teaching aids: - Projector.

IV. Procedure Ss’ and T’s activities 1. Warm up.

- Look at the pictures below.

What kind of festival do you think it is?

Share your ideas with a partner.

2. Activities.

LISTENING 2. Ss read the statements in exercise 2 and guess if they are true or false. Write the guesses on the board.

- Play the recording one or two times. Ask Ss to listen carefully and check their guesses.

3. T plays the recording again.

Ss answer the questions.

Have Ss compare their answers in pairs before giving T the answers.

Contents

Suggestions: It is a music festival.

I- Listening.

2. Listen to Nick talk about a music festival he attended. Tick (V) T (true) or F (false).

Correct the false sentences.

1. F ( one of the most famous festivals) 2. T 3. F ( They stayed in a tent) 4. F ( He’s Nick’s father’s favorite singer) 3. Now listen and answer the questions.

1. It takes place every June.

2. They are music bands.

3. He interested the audience with the hit song.

4. They also went to the Bohemian Woods.

5. They enjoyed a mixed of good music from around the world.

169

GV: Vũ Xuân Minh

Năm học: 2019- 2020

WRITING 4. Think of a festival they attended and make notes about it.

- What was the festival?

- Who celebrated it?

- Where was it held?

- When was it held?

- How was it held?

- Why was it held?

II- Writing 4. Think about a festival you attended.

Make notes about it below.

Writing: - answer Suggestions.

It was a cock fighting festival.

It was held in the common house’s yard in my village.

It was held on January 15th ( Lunar New Year) ……..

5. Ss write a paragraph individually based on the notes they have made.

T can ask one or two Ss to write the paragraph on the board. Other Ss and teacher comment on the paragraphs.

5. Write a paragraph about the festival you attended use the notes above.

Ss can start like this.

Last week I attended a festival. It was called “ Harvest festival” It was held by farmers in my village. ….

3. Homework - Do exercise workbook - Prepare: Looking back

V. Adjustment : …………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………. ………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….

Date of preparing: March 7th, 2018 170

GV: Vũ Xuân Minh

Năm học: 2019- 2020

Date of teaching: March 8th, 2018

Period 75: Unit 9 : FESTIVALS AROUND THE WORLD Lesson 7: Looking back and project I. Objectives.

By the end of the lesson, Ss can cover the whole unit: Grammar, vocabularies and structures. Ss apply them to do exercises.

II. Language content: Revision III. Teaching aids: - Projector.

IV. Procedure Ss’ and T’s activities 1. Warm up.

- Cain game: T divides the class into two teams and calls on some representatives to go to the board.

2. Activities VOCABULARY 1. Ss do this activity individually then compare their answer with a partner. T asks Ss to go to the black board to write the answers.

2. Ss do this activity individually then compare their answer with a partner.

GRAMMAR 3. Ss do this exercise individually. Check their answers. Accept all the answers if they make sense.

Contents Start like this: Festivalikegg……..

I/ VOCABULARY 1. Rearrange the letters to make reasons for holding festival. Then match them to the pictures of the festivals.

1. religious ( Christmas) 2. music ( Glastonbury) 3. superstitious ( Day of the Dead) 4. seasonal ( Thanksgiving) 2. Complete the sentences with the correct form of the words in brackets.

Key: 1. cultural 2. parade 3. celebratory 4. festive 5. performance 6. celebration II- Grammar 3. Complete each question with a suitable H/Wh- question word. More than one question word may be accepted.

Key:

171

GV: Vũ Xuân Minh

Năm học: 2019- 2020

1. What 2. Where 3. How 4. Which 5. Where/ When / How / Why 6. When 4. Ss make up their own sentences with the 4. Make your own sentences with the adverbial phrases in the box. adverbial phrases from the box.

1. My father went to Ho Chi Minh city last Have two Ss write their sentences on the week. board. T goes around and observes and 2. take notes of Ss’ mistakes.

Other Ss comment on the sentences on the 3.

4. board.

5.

III- Communication 5. Ss work in pairs to role-play. They ask 5. Role-play in pairs. Student A is a and answer about their favorite festival. reporter. Student B is a secondary school Ask some pairs to act out the role-play. student. Continue the conversation below.

Reporter: I’m a reporter from Culture Other Ss comment and vote for the best Magazine. Can I ask you some questions conversation. about your favorite festivals?

Student: Yes, of course. I like……….best.

Reporter: Where’s the festival held?

PROJECT Finish! Now I can…

Talk about the festival….

1- Ss work in groups.

3. Homework Get to know about some festivals - Prepare for: Unit 10.

V. Adjustment : …………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………. ………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….

Date of preparing: March 9th, 2018 172

GV: Vũ Xuân Minh

Năm học: 2019- 2020

Date of teaching: March 10th, 2018

Period 76:

REVIEW 3

I. Objectives.

By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to review the pronunciation, vocabulary, and grammar that they have learnt from unit 7 to unit 9.

II. Teaching aids: - Projector.

III. Procedure Sts’ and T’s activities 1. Warm up: Brainstorming ? What have you learnt in unit 7, 8, 9 in terms of language?

Contents Vocab

Pronunciation

Unit 7

Grammar

Vocab

Pronunciation

Unit 8

Grammar

2. Activities 1. Ss do this exercise individually then ….. share their answers with a partner before I. Pronunciation giving T the answers. Write the correct Activity 1 answers on the board. Have some Ss read 1. B 2. C 3. C 4. A 5. B out the words.

2. Organise this as a game. Ss do this in Activity 2 Suggested answers: pairs. Which pair adds the most words will go to the board and write their answers. - O’bey: receive, polite, perform Other pairs may want to add more words. ‘Dancer: beauty, copy, teacher Write other words on the board.

II. Vocabulary 173

GV: Vũ Xuân Minh

Năm học: 2019- 2020

-

3. Ss do this individually and then share their answers with a partner. Check Ss’ answers.

4. Ask Ss what kind of word can be filled in each blank (i.e. noun, verb, etc). Elicite answers. Ss do this exercise individually.

Two Ss write their anwers on the board.

Confirm the correct answers.

Activity 3 1. Ahead only 2. No crossing 3. No U-turn 4. Right turn only 5. Railway crossing Activity 4 1. celebrations 2. cultural 3. performances 4. parades 5. festive

Activity 5 5. This can be done as a small competion 1. documentary 2. hilarious game. The student who solves the 3. boring 4. thriller crossword the fastest is the winner 5. moved 6. animation III. Grammar 6. Elicit the kinds of H/Wh question. Ss do Activity 6 this exercise individually. Chech Ss 1. c 2. f 3. a 4. b answers and write the correct answers on 5. d 6. e the board.

Activity 7 7. Ss do this individually and compare 1. It’s about 1,877 kilometres from Ha their answers with a partner. Call some Ss Noi to Can Tho. to go to the board to write their sentences. 2. How far is it from Hue to Da Nang?

Other Ss comment. Confirm the correct 3. There didn’t use to be many traffic jams when I was young. sentences.

4. In spite of being tired/their tiredness, they wanted to watch the film./ They wanted to watch the film in spite of being tired/their tiredness.

5. Although the festival took place in a remote area, a lot of people attended it./ A lot of peole attended the festival although it took place in a remote area.

IV. Everyday English Activity 8 ___1___ Mai, let’s …..

8. Ss do this in pairs. Afer checking their answers, ask one or two pairs to act out the ___2___ Great idea, Mi. Which.. ___3___ How about the Cinemax?... conversation. ___4___ That’s fine. How…..? ___5___ It’s only two kilometres….. ___6___ Yeah. Things have changed… ___7___ Haha. Look at this…. ___8___ OK. That’s a good idea……

174

GV: Vũ Xuân Minh

Năm học: 2019- 2020

3. Homework - Review the target knowledge - Prepare for Review- Skills V. Adjustment : …………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………. ………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….

Date of preparing: March 12th, 2018 175

GV: Vũ Xuân Minh

Năm học: 2019- 2020

Date of teaching: March 13th, 2018

Period 77:

ENGLISH TEST 3

I. Objectives.

- T checks Ss’ understanding from Unit 1 to Unit 3 about three topics ( My hobbies/ Health/ Community service.

II. Teaching aids: - A CD and a CD player, - Paper test III. Procedure I. Class organization.

- Greetings.

- Checking attendance: II. New lesson.

Chủ đề Listening Reading

Nhận biết KQ TL 5

Thông hiểu KQ TL 5

Vận dụng KQ TL

10

5

2

7 5

Writing

Language focus

Tổng

5 10

5

5

10 18

8

VI. Total 15

5

5

5

5

5 10marks

Paper test Q.1: Choose the word whose underlined part is pronounced differently from the others.

6. A. played B. frightened C. excited D. bored 7. A. hand B. transport C. character D. celebration 8. A. washed B. attended C. decided D. disappointed Q. 2: Choose the word that has a different stress pattern from the others.

9. A. traffic B. agree C. noisy D. student 176

GV: Vũ Xuân Minh

Năm học: 2019- 2020

10. A. listen B. visit C. borrow D. obey Q.3: Choose the correct answer to complete each following sentence by circling A, B, C or D. 11. Lan used to ________ morning exercise when she got up early.

A. did B. does C. doing D. do 12. My father __________the bus to work every day, but I cycle.

A. catches B. drives C. goes D. runs 13. You should look right and left when you go________the road.

A. down B. across C. up D. along 14. Bus is the main public________in Viet Nam. A. travel B. tricycle C. transport D. vehicle 15. The play was so boring. ________, Hoa saw it from beginning to end.

A. Therefore B. Despite C. However D. Although 16. She’s sure that they will find the film_________.

A. entertaining B. entertain C. entertainment D. entertained 17. – “ Do you like seeing a film?” – “_________________” A. No, I don’t like it at all B. Sure. What film shall we see?

C. Who is in it?

D. I’m sorry, I can’t.

18. ____________ being frightened by the images, Lan still liked the film so much.

A. In spite B. Despite C. Although D. Nevertheless 19. ____________ is La Tomatina celebrated? – Every August.

A. Where B. Why C. When D. Which 20. My father liked the ____________ of that singer.

A. perform B. performer C. performance D. performing Q.4: Put the following in correct order to make a dialogue. Write your answer into the left column.

21._____________ A. That would be perfect. Where shall we meet?

22._____________ B. Great. I’ll meet you guys there.

23._____________ C. Hey Kien! I’m going to join Thinh Temple Festival with some 24._____________ friends. Do you want to come?

25._____________ D. Sunday morning.

26._____________ E. Let’s meet at the school gate at nine o’clock.

27._____________ F. Who else is going?

28._____________ G. Just some of my close friends.

H. When are you guys going?

177

GV: Vũ Xuân Minh

Năm học: 2019- 2020

Q. 5: Read the following text carefully and choose the correct answer A, B, C or D for each of the gap.

Ewan McGregor was (29)_____ in Scotland in 1971. He decided to be an (30)______ when he was only nine and he (31)_____his first film in 1992. So far in his career he has appeared (32)_____ a lot of different types of films, including comedies, musical, dramas and the Star Wars movies. In his career Ewan has worked with (33)_____ like Cameron Diaz and Nicole Kidman, and his films have won (34)_____ of awards. He loves acting and when he finished (35)_______ the musical, Moulin Rouge, he said, “I have never been happier to do anything in my life”.

29. A. bear B. born C. bearing D. beared 30. A. acting B. actress C. actor D. action 31. A. made B. played C. worked D. starred 32. A. at B. on C. with D. in 33. A. directors B. actors C. actresses D. writers 34. A. a lots B. lots C. much D. some 35. A. to film B. filmed C. film D. filming Q.6: Writing A. Rewrite these following sentences using given words.

36. What is the distance between Vinh Phuc and Ha Noi city?=> How………………?

37. I often walked to school when I was a student.=> I used……………………………

38. Although they are short, they still love playing sports.=> In spite of…………………

B. Make questions for the underlined parts in each following sentence: 39. It’s about 8 km from Phuc Yen town to Ha Noi.=>…………………………

40. Last year I went to Hai Luu Buffalo Fighting Festival with my parents. =>…………………………………………………………………………

B. Key Q1- Listening: ( 2.5 marks- 0,25 mark for each correct answer) 1. F 2. T 3. F 4. F 5. T Q2: Choose the word whose ….(0,25 mark for each correct answer)6. C 7. D 8. A Q3: ….(0,25 mark for each correct answer)9. B 10. D Q4 : ….(0,25 mark for each correct answer) 11. D 12. A 13. B 14. C 15. C 16. A 17. B 18. B 19. C 20.C Q5: ….(0,25 mark for each)21. C 22. F 23. G 24. H 25. D 26. A 27. E 28. B Q6. 29. B 30. C 31. A 32.D 33. C 34. B 35. D Q7: Writing ….(0,25 mark for each correct answer) 36. How far is it from Vinh Phuc to Ha Noi city?

178

GV: Vũ Xuân Minh

Năm học: 2019- 2020

37. I used to walk to school when I was a student.

38. In spite of being short, they still love playing sports.

39. How far is it from Phuc Yen town to Ha Noi? 40. Which festival did you go with your parents last year?

V. Adjustment : …………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………. ………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….

179

GV: Vũ Xuân Minh

Năm học: 2019- 2020

Date of preparing: March 16th, 2018 Date of teaching: March 17th, 2018

Period 78: Unit 10: Sources of Lesson 1: Getting Started

energy

I. Teaching points: - By the end of the lesson Ss can understand about environmental problems and their effects.

- Training listening, reading, speaking, writing skills.

II. Teaching aids: - Pictures, posters, cassette & tape.

III. Teaching steps.

Teacher and Students Warm up * Ask and answer: Ss ask and answer the question about The piture Ss work individually to make and answer questions Write quickly 5 questions on the board.

Play the recording

Board & contents A. WARM UP. .Ask Ss to look at the picture and answer Who are they?

Where are they?

What are they doing?

Who are talking?

What are they talking about?

B. NEW LESSON -Present new words. * Vocabulary . New words - Check: Rub out and Remember.

Non- renewable (n): Solar panel Renewable >< non-renewable Use up Resources of energy Carbon footprint Run out (of) 1.Listen & Read 1. Listen and Read ? Look at the picture. a. 1. It’s the negative effect we have on What are they talking about? the environment Have some pair read aloud the conversation.

2. Non-renewable energy means that - Have Ss listen to the tape Then get them to it will run out if we use it. answer the questions.

3. Sunlight is renewable energy -Get them to read aloud the answers. because we can’t use it all up, it will -Ask Ss to read the text again and check. last forever.

-Give feed back.

4. Mai has small carbon footprint 180

GV: Vũ Xuân Minh

Năm học: 2019- 2020

because she recyles the products she uses and she goes everywhere by bike.

5.the produts we use that are bad for the environment or the energy we use that produces carbon dioxide might creat a big carbon footprint b.

- Then have Ss read the network that includes Renewable source: wind, hydro, solar two types energy: Renewable and non- Non-renewable source: coal,natural gas, oil. renewable sources ask Ss to read the conversation again to complete the network below . _ Have Ss look the table again listen and repeat the words or phrase. Ask Ss to read the words or phrase - - Ask Ss to look the table and discuss the Renewable source: wind, hydro, solar, biogas, nuclear.. meaning of the words or phrase Non-renewable source: coal,natural - Explain some words if necessary. gas, oil C. CONSOLIDATION - Ask Ss to ask and answer about renewable and non-renewable sources in sectinon 4 .

Homework -Sumarize the main point of the lesson.

-Asign home work.

- Learn by heart new vocabulary - Practice reading “Listen and read” -Prepare new lesson: A closer look 1.

* Adjustment: .................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................. ..................................................................................................................................................

181

GV: Vũ Xuân Minh

Năm học: 2019- 2020

Date of preparing: March 19th, 2018 Date of teaching: March 20th, 2018

Period 79: Unit 10: Sources Lesson 2: A closer look 1

of energy

I. Objectives.

- By the end of this lesson, students will be able to : +/ Use the words related to Renewable and non-renewable sources +/ Stress pattern +/ New words: - limited, available, abundant , .......

II. Preparation.

- Teacher: Auxiliary boards.

- Students: Prepare the new words , practice pronouncing these words.

III. Procedure.

Teacher’s and students’activities 1. Warm up. To introduce the new lesson.

-vocabulary

- Discuss some adjectives to describe the type of energy Divide Ss into two groups to describe the advantages and dis advantages of energy sources

Contents How to protect our energy sources ?

New words.

- limited >< unlimited Abundant= plentiful available exhaustible 1. advantages and disadvantages of energy sources energy advatages disadvantages sources wind Abundant, Not available unlimited water Clean an safe Expensive, Not available solar Renuable,plentiful, Expensive , Clean an safe Renuable,plentiful, Harmful, biogas available, Clean an polluting safe 182

GV: Vũ Xuân Minh

Năm học: 2019- 2020

2. Compare the answers with the partner.

Ss listen and read.

3. Complete .

- Ask Ss to work in groups. Ss discuss and give their ideas - Read and act out the sentences for Ss. - Clicit ideas for sentense1.

4. Production.

-Guide the way to do - Practice together - Play the recording once and ask Ss to n mark stress syllable of the words they hear them.

- Play the recroding again

5. Home work.

- Copy and learn the new words.Prepare the new lesson.

2.

Example; A:I think wind is abundant, unlimited B: Me too 1. solar; safe; 2. non-renewable 3. wind; clean 4.expensive; dangerous

Pronunciation 4. Listen and repeat which are stress pattern on the first syllable and which are stress pattern on the second syllable 0oo Dangerous Plentiful Limited Easily energy

o0o Expensive Abundant Convenient enormous

5.Listen and repeat , mark stress syllable.

A`nother; re`newable; con`venient; A`bundant; en`vironment; `Plentiful; `Easily

Adjustment: ................................................................................................................................................. ................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................

183

GV: Vũ Xuân Minh

Năm học: 2019- 2020

Date of preparing: March 21st, 2018 Date of teaching: March 22nd, 2018

Period 80: Unit 10: Sources of energy Lesson 3: A closer look 2 I. Objectives.

- By the end of this lesson, students will be able to use the future continuous - Ss can do all exercises correctly .

II. Preparation.

- Teacher: extra - boards.

- Students: Prepare the new words , practice pronouncing these words.

III. Procedure.

Teacher’s and students’activities 1. Warm up. To introduce the new lesson.

- Discuss some sources of energy in the previous : 2. Presentation.

- T can introduces how to use the future continuous 3. Practice.

- SS read the sentences carefully and write the correct form of each verb in brackets.

- Ss come to the board and write down the answers.

- T corrects - Ask Ss to write the sentences dependently, using the words/ phrases given and then compare with a partner. When Ss have finished the exercise, some ss write their sentences on the board. Check their answers as a class - Ss read and make sentences

Contents */ Revision : What sources of energy can be renewable, .

- .....

Eg: This time tomorrow we will be studying unit 11 S+will/won’t+be Ving

Ex1:Write the correct form of each verb in brackets.

Keys: 1.will be putting; 2. will be taking 3. will be installing 4. will be spending 5. will be using Ex2. write what these students will be doing tomorrow afternoon 1. jenny will be giving a talk about saving energy 2. hellen will be putting solar panels in the 184

GV: Vũ Xuân Minh

Năm học: 2019- 2020

- Ss complete the sentences

Have ss read the example to understand the future continuous tense is used. Remind ss some phrases from 1 to 4 used to express a definite time in the future. Let ss do Ex in pairs.

Chek SS’ answers

Have ss complete the magazine article with the passive voice

Have ss change the sentences into passive

Have ss discuss the pictures. What will they be doing 4. Production.

-Guide the way to do .

- Ss can present their flowers to class or make a display of the flowers on a noticeboard.

5. Home work.

- Copy and learn the new words. Prepare the new lesson.

- Do exercises in workbook

playground.

3. Susan will be checking cracks in the water pipes.

4. Jake will be putting low energy bulbs in the classrooms.

5. kate will be showing a film on types of renewable energy sources Ex3.put the correct form to complete the conversation 1will wach 2. will put . 3.will be having .

4. will .....travel.

5. will walk or cycle 6. will be cycling 7. will be going Future passive voice.

S+ will Vinfi +O S(o) + will be + Vpp Ex5. complete the magazine article with the passive voice 1.Be provided 2. be used 3. be placed 4. be store 5. be sovled Ex6. Change the sentences into passive 1. be used as .....

2. be installed......

3. be burned.....

4. be reduced......

Ex7. Discuss the pictures. What will they be doing Suggested answersa A hydro power station will be built in the region to increase the electricity.

Solar energy will be put on the roof of the house A network wind turbines will be installed to generate electricity.

Bikes will be used to travel in the city.

- Homewok

185

GV: Vũ Xuân Minh

Năm học: 2019- 2020

- Prepare fpr the next lesson.

Adjustment: ................................................................................................................................................. ...............................................................................................................................................

186

GV: Vũ Xuân Minh

Năm học: 2019- 2020

Date of preparing: March 21st, 2018 Date of teaching: March 22nd, 2018

Period 81: TEST CORRECTION 3 I. Objectives: - To correct the test number 1. Give comments to encourage the students to study hard.

Discuss the ways to improve the test score.

II. Teaching aids: - Testing papers.

III. Procedure: - Greetings.

- Checking attendance: A. Remark on the tests: -The number of the tests: +Exellent tests: +Good test +Average: +Under average: -The number of the tests: +Exellent tests: +Good test +Average: +Under average: -In general, all Ss have achieved the basic knowledge.

-There are many exellent and good tests.

- Some Ss' skill of doing general test is not good.

-The teacher shows some best and worst tests to correct before class: B. Key Q1- Listening: ( 2.5 marks- 0,25 mark for each correct answer) You will hear a tour guide talking to a group of tourists about a coach trip. Circle the correct option A, B or C. 1. C 2. A 3. B 4. A 5. B Q2: Choose the word whose ….(0,25 mark for each correct answer) 6. C 7. D 8. A Q3: ….(0,25 mark for each correct answer) 9. B 10. D Q4 : ….(0,25 mark for each correct answer) 11. D 12. A 13. B 14. C 15. C 16. A 17. B 18. B 19. C 20.C Q5: ….(0,25 mark for each correct answer) 21. C 22. F 23. G 24. H 25. D 26. A 27. E 28. B 187

GV: Vũ Xuân Minh

Năm học: 2019- 2020

Q6. 29. B 30. C 31. A 32.D 33. C 34. B 35. D Q7: Writing ….(0,25 mark for each correct answer) 36. How far is it from Vinh Phuc to Ha Noi city?

37. I used to walk to school when I was a student.

38. In spite of being short, they still love playing sports.

39. How far is it from Phuc Yen town to Ha Noi? *Adjustment: ................................................................................................................................................. ................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................

188

GV: Vũ Xuân Minh

Năm học: 2019- 2020

Date of preparing: March 23rd, 2018 Date of teaching: March 24th, 2018

Period 82: Unit10: Sources of energy Lesson 4: Communication I. Objectives.

- By the end of this lesson, students will be able to understand more the carbon footprint .

- - Ss role-play being an environmentalist.Tell their partner how to save energy II. Preparation.

- Teacher: Auxiliary boards.

- Students: Prepare the new words , practice pronouncing these words.

III. Procedure.

Teacher’s and students’activities Contents 1. Warm up. To introduce the new lesson.

- T can use the picture the book to ask - Where are they? What are they doing? some questions and the Ss answer.

2. Presentation.

- T writes the newwords on the board and asks Ss to read all the newwords to check the pronunciation .

3. Practice.

- First, all of the Ss in the class work in pairs to ask and answer “Do you...” with always= 1; often = 2; sometimes= 3; never=4 to find out te scores - One student stands up and ask others to find out who has a small carbon footprint with score 10- 20 .

- T asks them to work in open pairs to practice roling a play.

4. Production.

- Guide the way to do .

- Ss can present their flowers to class or make a display of the flowers on a noticeboard.

1.look at the pictures eliciting the actions to save energy */ Newwords.

- take showers instead of baths - walk or ride..... ................................... ...............................

2. Interview a classmate. Compare his/her answers a.Do you take showers instead of baths 3. Role-play.Tell your partner what should you do to protect the environment

Talk about your partner’s carbon footprint

189

GV: Vũ Xuân Minh

Năm học: 2019- 2020

5. Home work.

- Copy and learn the new words.

- Prepare the new lesson. *Adjustment: ................................................................................................................................................. ................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................

190

GV: Vũ Xuân Minh

Năm học: 2019- 2020

Date of preparing: March 26th, 2018 Date of teaching: March 27th, 2018

Period 83: Unit 10: Lesson 5: Skills 1 I. TEACHING POINTS: By the end of the lesson, Ss can : - read a postcard for specific information about energy sources.

- ask and answer questions about the way to save energy sources .

II.Teaching aids: Poster, pictures.

III. TEACHING STEPS. Teacher and Students' activities

Contents and Board I. warm up - T asks Ss:What will you do if you Ss look at the picture. become greener? individually'

Answer

II. New lesson - T asks Ss to scan the blog to find these A. Reading: words in the pasage.

1. Vocabulary: - T may help Ss find out the meaning of generate (v): great deal (of) the words in the context. convert(v) alternative energy

T asks Ss to read the text again and answer the questions.

-T asks Ss to note where they found the information that helped them to answer the questions.

-Ss can compare their answers with their partners.

2.Matching: * Key: 1/ creative energy 2/ drive mechinery 3/ generate electricity 4/ turn turbines 5. heat house * Key: 1. two. They are renewable and nonrenewable 2. Hydro can be limited because dams cannot be used in certain areas. Nuclear power is dangerous.

3 because they are natural sources of energy and we use them instead of non-

191

GV: Vũ Xuân Minh

Năm học: 2019- 2020

-T corrects the answers: _ Ss scan the passage again and find the information to complete the table. _ Ss note where they found the information and compare with their partners.

- Feedback: 2Ss write on the board.

- T checks and corrects it

renewable sources to get electricty we need.

4. we use non- renewable sources the most but we are increasingly using hydro power.

5. he thinks Vn will use the wind and the sun as alternative sources of energy in the future

T reviews the tips for “going green”

B. Speaking: 4/ Work in groups to ask and answer the advantages and dis advantages of each types of sources of energy ?

.

5/ Can you tell us the advantages and dis advantages of each types of sources of energy ?

Summarize the main point of the lesson.

-Assign home work.

Homework: -Practice reading comprehension a blog.

Review the lesson.

-Prepare skill 2.

Adjustments: ................................................................................................................................................. ................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................

192

GV: Vũ Xuân Minh

Năm học: 2019- 2020

Date of preparing: March 28th, 2018 Date of teaching: March 29th, 2018

Period 85: UNIT 10 : SOURCES OF ENERGY LESSON 6: SKILLS 2 I. OBJECTIVES: - By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to write a passage about energy and the ways how to save energy in life .

II. TEACHING AIDS: - Materials: Ss’ books, , an extra- board, a CD & a cassette player III. PROCEDURES: Sts’ and T’s activities I. Warm- up - Have Ss play game “ spider-web of phrases ” - Read 3 times in chorus

Content I. Vocabulary.

Ride to work

Use public transport

What we should do to save energy

Turn off lights …..

- Discuss some questions - Set the sense - Lead to the new lesson

II. Activities.

1- Elicit some new words ( pictures , realias , situations ….)

- Have Ss read many times in chorus

……….

1. Look at the pictures . Discuss the followings .

1, What do you think is unusual about this means of transport ?

2, Have you seen any transport like this ?

3, What should we do to save energy in our life ?

I . Vocabulary : ( in developing countries) ……

1. to use up (v) …

2. to lead to 3. to change

193

GV: Vũ Xuân Minh

Năm học: 2019- 2020

- Call some individuals * Checking vocab: What & Where 2- Have Ss guess the answers before listening - Cross-check - Play the tapes - Call someone to give their answers - Play the tape again - provide the keys

3- Ask Ss to work individually - Cross –check - Call some Ss to the black-board - Provide the correct answers

- Have Ss work in groups to discuss what we should do to save energy

- T observe and feedback

- Ask Ss to write down the answers on their notebooks 4- Divide the class into 6 groups - Have Ss practice in group - Present their works on the subboards

4.

5.

6.

7.

8.

9.

to heat up to release to solve ( the problem) to protect to invest to increase >< to reduce 10.to avoid ( doing ST) II. Practice.

A. Listening .

2. Listen to the passage and tick true or false to the statements .

1, T 2,T 3,T 4, F 5, T 3. Listen to the passage again and complete the sentences .

1, mountainous 2, Cooking and heating 3, air pollution 4, on the increase 5, wind and the sun B. Writing .

4. Complete the article . Use the phrases below .

1 -E , 2 -D , 3 -A , 4-B , 5C 5. Discuss the following ways to save energy . Decide on the 5 most important , then write them in the box What should you do to save energy ?

1. Reduce our electricity 2. Use public transport 3. Reduce the use of fossil fuel .

4. Increase the tax on petrol.

5. Use low energy light bulbs .

194

GV: Vũ Xuân Minh

Năm học: 2019- 2020

IV. HOMEWORK. - Learn by heart all the new words.

- Redo Ex 6 ( student’sbook) Adjustments: ................................................................................................................................................. ................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................

195

GV: Vũ Xuân Minh

Năm học: 2019- 2020

Date of preparing: March 30th, 2018 Date of teaching: March 31st, 2018

Period 85: UNIT 10 : SOURCES OF ENERGY LESSON 7: LOOING BACK AND PROJECT I. OBJECTIVES: - By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to revise what they have learnt about ENERGY SOURCES in the previous lessons as well as make their own products slogans about how to save energy.

II. TEACHING AIDS: - Materials: Ss’ books, , an extra- board, a CD & a cassette player III. PROCEDURES: 1. Organization - Greetings.

- Checking attendance.

2. New lesson Sts’ and T’s activities Content I. Warm up I. Vocabulary. ( Review) - Have Ss put the words into the 1 . Put the words into the correct correct groups to recall some new groups . words Sources of Advantages Disadvantages - Read 3 times in chorus energy - Checking remembering by games Biogas Clean Polluted - Guide how to play Solar energy Cheap Expensive - observe & feedback Gas Plentiful Limited Nuclear energy

Available unlimited

Exhausted/ dangerous Harmful

Water power

II. Activity 1-Review briefly the usages and forms of the future continuous tense and the simple future passive voice .

- Give examples

II. Grammar: ( Review) A, The future continuous tense . => expressing an action in progress at a definite point of time in the future . (+) S + will be + V-ing (-) S + will not be + V-ing (?) Will + S + be + V-ing ?

B, The future simple passive form.

Passive form is used when….

196

GV: Vũ Xuân Minh

Năm học: 2019- 2020

- re-explain the uses and the form

2 - Have Ss do Ex ( pair work & group-work) - cross- check

- call someone to represent their answers.

- Provide the keys

- Ask Ss to write down their answers on their notebooks

- Have Ss look at the pictures and say out

- Call some ones to present

- the doer is not known /not important - the object is not important * Form (+) S + will be + Vpp ( by O ) (-) S + will be + Vpp ( by O ) (?) will + S + be + Vpp ( by O ) ?

NOTE : If the doer is definite and still important , we can add “ by O ” at the end of the sentence . * Practice : 2. Complete the sentences using the verbs in brackets in the future continuous.

1, will be wearing 2, will be lying 3, will be working 4, will be studying 5, will be building 3. Change the following sentences into the passive voice.

1. A lot of money will be spent on heating next year .

2. Biogas will be used for fuel in homes and for transport.

3. Renewable energy like wind and solar energy will be used to solve the problems of pollution.

4. The use of electricity will be reduced to save energy.

5. A hydro power station will be built in this area next year.

4. Complete the dialogue, using the future continuous form of the verbs .

1, will be earning 2, will be doing 3, will be doing 4, will be hosting

197

GV: Vũ Xuân Minh

Năm học: 2019- 2020

- Feedback and correct mistakes if necessary

3- Have Ss discuss the slogans - Observe and feedback.

- Divide the class into 6 groups - Have Ss work in groups to draw slogans about how to save energy.

- Call some groups to present their products ( exhibition) - T observe - Feedback

5, will be doing III. Communication: How to save energy 5. Look at the pictures and answer the question below .

What should you do to save energy ?

- We should turn off the fire when the kettle is boiling .

- We should turn off the faucet when the tub is full of water .

- We should close the refrigerator’s door when we do not use it .

- We should turn off the fan when we do not use it.

- We should turn off the lights when there is no one in the room .

- We should turn off the gas-stoves when we do not cook .

IV: Project.( Poster / sub-boards) 1. Look at the slogans and answer the questions below.

- How are they used ?

- Why are they important ?

2. Write a simple slogans in your groups about how to save energy . ( exhibition their slogans ) ( maybe do at home )

IV. HOMEWORK. - Learn by heart all the new words.

- Prepare for next lesson - Redo 3,5 and project (students’ book) 198

GV: Vũ Xuân Minh

Năm học: 2019- 2020

*Adjustments: ................................................................................................................................................. ................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................

199

GV: Vũ Xuân Minh

Năm học: 2019- 2020

Date of preparing: April 2nd, 2018 Date of teaching: April 3rd, 2018

Period 86: Unit 11: TRAVELLING IN THE FUTURE Lesson 1: Getting started I. Objectives.

By the end of the lesson, Ss can: - use lexical items ralated to future means of transport and movement.

- understand the difference between facts and opinions - use will for future prediction II. Teaching aids: - Projector.

III. Procedure I. Class organization.

- Greetings.

- Checking attendance: II. New lesson.

Ss and T’s activities

Contents Example: “motorbikes” 1. Warm up.

To start the lesson, ask Ss as a class to - have motors powered by engines. brainstorm on the board one or two means of - use petrol transport that are now commonly used in Viet Nam. Connect this with what they have learnt in - used for road traiffic Unit 7 (Traffic) andUnit 10 (Energy) by asking - advantages, practical, personal Ss to describe how these means of transport transport work in which situations they are used, and the - disadvantages: not safe cause advantages and disadvantages of using them. pollution Ask Ss how people in Viet Nam will travel around in year 2100.

2. Activities.

Ask them to predict it theirmeans Presentation of transport mentionedon the - Elicit the new words board will still be used. Ask them Write ‘flying car’ on the board. Ask Ss to explain their preductions. what they think how a ‘flying car’ might be 200

GV: Vũ Xuân Minh

Năm học: 2019- 2020

different from an ordinary car (e.g.appearance, energy, advantages, disadvantages, etc.)

Write ‘jet pack’ and ‘teleporter’ on the board. Ask Ss to guess what they are, them give explanations.

‘Jet pack’: a jet-powered device you wear on the back that will help you to fly (“động cơ phản lực mini”) ‘teleporter’: an imaginary method of transportation in which one disappears at one point, usually in an instant, and reappear at another - Check the new words: What and where - Let ss predict how people travel in the future, then write some of the students’ answers on the board.

- Let ss draw the usage of “will” in this situation.

Practice Have Ss cover the text and ask them to look at the piture only. Introduce the names of the students (Veronica, Mai, and Phuc). Ask them: - What can you see in the picture?

- What are Veronica, Mai, and Phuc doing?

What makes you think so?

- What do you think is on the screen? Is there a connection between what is on the screen with what Mai is thinking about?

- What topic are they talking about?

Ask Ss to uncover the text. Play the recording and ask them to locate the parts of ‘flying cars’, ‘jet pack’, and ‘teleporter’. a. Ss work individually to answer the

I. New words Flying car (n): ô tô bay Jet pack (n) : động cơ phản lực mini Teleporter (n): dịch chuyển tức thời Driverless car (n): ô tô không người lái Crash (v) (n): đâm, va chạm Avoid (v): tránh Helicopter (n) : máy bay trực thăng Imaginative(n) : giàu trí tưởng tượng

II. Model sentences: Eg: People will own driverless cars in the future.

Will + V: for future prediction.

III. Activities Activity 1 a. Answer the following questions.

201

GV: Vũ Xuân Minh

Năm học: 2019- 2020

questions. Ss compare answers in pairs and then discuss as a class. T goes through each question and asks Ss how the text in the conversation supports their answers. (For question 2, however, Key T may draw Ss’ attention to the suffix-less. For 1. a question 4, T may remind Ss of the meaning of 4. a green in previous units). After the discussion, T writes correct answers on the board.

Look out T emphasises-less is added to a noun to make an adjective.

Ask Ss to give more examples. For a more able class, ask Ss to make sentences with the new adjectives created. b. Ss work in pairs to ask and answer the question. After that call some pairs to ask and answer for the class to listen. For a more advanced class, questions 2 & # can be used as a team-based class debate.

2. Draw Ss attention to the Remember box.

Give more examples if necessary and ask Ss to identify which are facts and which are opinions.

Ask Ss to work in pairs to tick the Facts vs.

Opinions box. Then ask for their answers as a class. Ask Ss to explain their decisions before giving the keys. For question 5, tell Ss that a

2. b

3. c

b.

Key: 1. If there are too many flying cars, there will be traffic jams in the sky. Some means of transport will not be convenient in bad weather (e.g.jet pack). Future means of transport may use a lot of fuel which will make pollution worse.

2&3: Open answers from Ss.

Activity 2 Write a fact and an opinion (which could be your personal opinion) about flying cars on board. Ask Ss to decide which statement could be proved and 202

GV: Vũ Xuân Minh

Năm học: 2019- 2020

prediction is always an opinion. Ask Ss to expain which is what you feel.

1. F 2. O 3. F before giving your own explanation.

4. O 5. O 3. a. Ss work individually to come up with Activity 3 the means of transport mentioned in the a.

Key: flying conversation. driverless car b. T makes an example by giving a comvination, e.g. an electric car. Ask Ss to say how they think an electric car works. Then Ss work individually to make a list of the combined words.

car

Production: 3C c. Tell Ss how to do this task by looking at the example given. Then ask Ss to work in pairs.

After the discussion, ask the class how many comvined words they have. Elicit the words on the board. Then ask Ss to pick up one favourite combination from their list. Call on several pairs and have them to explain why they choose that means of transport as their favourite one.

3. Homework -Learn new words and phrases Prepare A closer look 1. *Adjustments: ................................................................................................................................................ ................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................

203

GV: Vũ Xuân Minh

Năm học: 2019- 2020

Date of preparing: April 4th, 2018 Date of teaching: April 5th, 2018

Period 87: Unit 11: TRAVELLING IN THE FUTURE Lesson 2: A Closer Look 1 I. Objectives.

By the end of the lesson, Ss can: - appropriately use rising and falling intonation for Yes-No and Wh-questions.

- use lexical items ralated to future means of transport and movement.

II. Teaching aids: - Projector.

III. Procedure I. Class organization.

- Greetings.

- Checking attendance: 7A1……….. 7A2: …………..

II. New lesson.

Ss and T’s activities 1. Warm up.

The class can be started with a game. Write the verbs: drive, ride, fly, sail, pedal on pieces of paper. Ask one S at a time to volunteer to perform the action looking at the verb and the class guess what action the S is doing.

After each correct guess, write the verb on the board. Ask Ss to add means of transport they know that go with that verb. Explain that there may be a means of transport that is not suitable for particular verbs.

Contents

2. Activities.

I. New words Pedal (v), (n): đạp (xe), bàn đạp Presentation Let Ss work in pairs to do activity 1then Float (v): nổi Heated (adj): nóng elicit the new words from the pictures Hot air balloon (n): kinh khí cầu Tram (n): Bullet train (n): tàu hỏa siêu tốc 204

GV: Vũ Xuân Minh

Năm học: 2019- 2020

(tàu viên đạn) Practice 1. Check ss’ answer After having the keys, Ss work in pairs again to say the correct pharases. e.g.drive a train, drive a car, drive a bus.

2. Ask Ss to underline the most important key words in the thinking bubbles. Do the first item with Ss as an example. Ss then work individually and compare their answers in pairs.

3. Ss work individually then pairs. Explain the use of in and on in Remember box.

If time allows, ask Ss to ask and answer how they often go/travel to some places (school, supermarket, the sea, etc.)

Write two questions on the board: one Y/N question and one Wh-question. Tell Ss to say the questions aloud and ask them to notice how the two questions are said in different ways. Tekk Ss to find out the rules in Look out! Box. Ask Ss to give some questions and have more practice.

4. Play the recording. Ss work individually and tick in the appropriate box.

II. Activities Activity 1 Key:a. a motorbike (explain when ride is used and drive is used) b. a car c. a train d. a bus e. a plane Activity 2 Key: a. a ship c. a hot air balloon d. a bicycle f. motorbikes Activity 3 Key: 1. in 3. on 4. in

Audio script: 1. What will be next?

2. Do you think you can use it in bad weather?

Activity 4 1. falling 3. How much fuel will these means of transport Key: 2. rising 3. falling use?

4. Will pollution be much worse?

5. Ss practise saying the questions individually

b. a bus e. a plane

2. on 5. in; on

4. rising

205

GV: Vũ Xuân Minh

Năm học: 2019- 2020

then as a class.

6. Ss practise saying the questions individually and decide if they are spoken with rising or falling voices. Do not give the keys at this point.

Play the recording for Ss to check their answers, then confirm their correct answers.

7. Ss work in pairs and ask and answer the question in 6.

Production: * Survey Give ss survey form then guide them to conduct it ( pay attention to intonation when questioning) 3. Homework -Learn new words and phrases Prepare for A closer look 2. * Survey: Have you ever (travelled in/on..)..?

What is your favorite means of transport? *Adjustments: ................................................................................................................................................ ................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................

206

GV: Vũ Xuân Minh

Năm học: 2019- 2020

Date of preparing: April 6th, 2018 Date of teaching: April 7th, 2018

Period 88: Unit 11: TRAVELLING IN THE FUTURE Lesson 3: A Closer Look 2 I. Objectives.

By the end of the lesson, Ss can: - use will for future prediction - use possessive pronouns II. Teaching aids: - Projector.

III. Procedure I. Class organization.

- Greetings.

- Checking attendance: II. New lesson.

Ss and T’s activities 1. Warm up.

Set up the situation to lead into the lesson: T- Ss exchange: T: How do you go to school everyday?

Ss: I go to school by….. (by bike).

T: What color is your bike?

Ss: My bike/ It is red/…..

T: Mine is white.

And how will you travel when you are 25?

Ss: I will ……..

Lead into the objectives of the lesson are to use will for future prediction and use possessive pronouns.

2. Activities.

Presentation 1. Remind Ss of Phuc, Veronica, and Mai and the group’s project in Getting Stated. Ask Ss if they are talking about the past, the prensent, or the future. For more able class, elicit from Ss more information about what the group discuss.

Ask Ss to cover the text to listen carefully to pick

Contents

I. Grammar 1. Will for future predition Key: We often use will to make a prediction about the future.

Prediction Affirmative

S + will + V

207

GV: Vũ Xuân Minh

Năm học: 2019- 2020

up any phrases/sentences that contain will.

Negative

S + will not (won’t) + V

4. Go through the example with Ss. Say the two Interrogative Will + S + V? sentences have the same meaning.

Highlight the changes in the possessive in the 2. Possessive pronouns two sentences.

This is your pen. ‘your’is a Explain that we use possessive pronouns to possessive adjective and it is put before the noun. avoid repeating information.

This pen is yours. ‘yours’ is a Draw Ss’ attention to the table: The personal pronouns I, you, she, he, it, we, possessive pronouns and stands they, correspond the respective possessive alone. adjectives my, your, his, her, its, our, their, and Instead of saying: This pen is the respective possessive pronouns mine, yours, your pen (which sounds his, hers, its, ours, theirs. repetitive), we say This pen is Practice 4. Ss work individually to complete task 4. yours.

Then T calls on some Ss to write the answers on Instead of saying: This bike is my bike, not his bike, we say This bike the board and gives feedback. is mine, not his

2. Ss work individually then compare their answers with each other.

II. Activities Activity 4 Key: 1. This computer is theirs.

2. The black bike is mine 3. These shoes are his.

4. The cat is Veronica’s 208

GV: Vũ Xuân Minh

Năm học: 2019- 2020

Production: 3. Write ‘fortune teller’ on the board. Ask Ss why people want to visit a fortune teller, and what the fortune teller is expected to talk about.

If you have experience asking a fortune teller to predict your future (or simi-lar), tell the class what the fortune teller says (in direct form). Ask Ss if they have ever talked with a fortune teller about the future, and if the predictions have become true or not.

Ss work in pairs to complete the task. Then T gives feedback to Ss as a class.

If time allows, ask Ss to play roles to predict the future of each other.

5. The picture is ours

5. Game Have Ss work in groups of 4 or 5. Each group member writes 5 sentences individually, then the group get together to see how many sentences they have. The group that has the most correct sentences wins.

For more advanced classes, this can be done using ‘Sentence - making race’.

Have groups write in 10 minutes as many sentences as possible. The group that has the most correct sentences wins.

Activity 3 Key: 1. Will I be 2. will be 3. Will I be 4. will be 5. Will I be 6. won’t be 7. will travel

Activity 2 Key: 1. Pepple won’t use flying cars until the year 2050.

2. Do you think the fuel price will increase next month?

3. The mail won’t arrive until next week.

4. I don’t think he will take the new position.

5. We will use more solar energy in the future

3. Homework -Learn new words and phrases Prepare for Communication. *Adjustments: ................................................................................................................................................ ................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................

209

GV: Vũ Xuân Minh

Năm học: 2019- 2020

Date of preparing: April 9th, 2018 Date of teaching: April 10th, 2018

Period 89: Unit 11: TRAVELLING IN THE FUTURE Lesson 4: Communication I. Objectives.

By the end of the lesson, Ss can: - talk about their footprint II. Teaching aids: - Projector.

III. Procedure I. Class organization.

- Greetings.

- Checking attendance: 7A1……….. 7A2: …………..

II. New lesson.

Ss and T’s activities Contents 1. Warm up - Chatting: What are renewable sources of - Non-renewable sources of energy: coal, oil, natural gas… energy and What are the non-renewable - Renewable: wind, water, solar energy sources of energy?

2. Activities + Ask Ss to look at the picture of the footprint at the bottom right hand side of page 43 and answer the questions: What does the carbon footprint mean? How big is your carbon footprint?

1. Have Ss read each item in 1 independently and write the number (from 1-4) in the boxes in accordance with what they always, often, sometimes or never do.

Ask Ss to mark each other’s answers in pairs. After adding up the marks, ask Ss to write the score in the total score box.

2. Have Ss explain in pairs how well they

1. Answer the questions below with a number from 1-4.

1= always 2= often 3= sometimes 4= never Do you….?

2. Work in pairs. Add up each other’s answers, and look up the score below.

210

GV: Vũ Xuân Minh

Năm học: 2019- 2020

save energy, using the three levels of scores in 2

3. Have Ss talk about their partners’ footprint in groups, using the prompts in c and the ideas in a.

3.Homework.

-Do exercise in workbook ( part C) - Prepare: Skill 1

Then explain how well your partner saves energy.

Score: 10-20: Your footprint is small…

Score: 21-30 : Your footprint is quite small…

Score 31-40: Your footprint is big…

3. Talk about your partner’s carbon footprint to your group. Use the following frompts. * My partner footprint is…. * He/she is considerate because… * He/ she could try hard to… * by….in the future, he/she can help to…

*Adjustments: ................................................................................................................................................ ................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................

211

GV: Vũ Xuân Minh

Năm học: 2019- 2020

Date of preparing: April 11th, 2018 Date of teaching: April 12th, 2018

Period 90:

Unit 11: TRAVELLING IN THE FUTURE Lesson 5: Skill 1

I. Objectives.

By the end of the lesson, Ss can: - read a text about special vehicles - give facts or opinions II. Teaching aids: - An extra- board.

III. Procedure I. Class organization.

- Greetings.

- Checking attendance: 7A1……….. 7A2: …………..

II. New lesson.

Ss and T’s activities

Contents

1. Warm up.

Brainstorming: means of transport 2. Activities.

Pre- reading and speaking 1. Ask Ss to look at the pictures and describe what they see. If the pictures are too small, T can prepare bigger photos of a hover scooter, a monowheel, and a segway. Help Ss to find out the connection between the pictures by asking questions such as: How many people can travel on them? Where are these vehicles used?

How can these people control the vehicles? Do not give the names of the vehicles at this point.

- Elicit the new words

Suggested answers: These are all personal of transport.

One person can travel on them.

They are all used for ground transport. People control them by using handle bars

I. New words Flop (v): thất bại Hover scooter (n): xe trượt trên 212

GV: Vũ Xuân Minh

Năm học: 2019- 2020

While- reading

mặt đất Monowheel (n): xe đạp một bánh Pedal (n), (v): bàn đạp Segway (n): segway (tên một loại phương tiện giao thông di chuyển bằng sự di chuyển tay lái) Pull (v): kéo> < push Handle (n): tay cầm Create (v) – Creation (n)

2. Ask Ss to read the text and try to identify which picture is a hover scooter, a monowheel, and a segway. Ask Ss to explain their decisions. II. Activities Activity 3 3. Ss work individually then compare the Key: 1. invention answers with their partners.

3. weird

2. flop

4. Ss work in pairs to complete the task. Ask Activity 4: Ss to underline the words in the text that help 1. The Segway. them to find the answers.

2. Maybe because a personal For more able class, ask Ss if they agree or hover scooter is expensive, and it disagree with what the author says and why. may be difficult to park.

While- speaking:

3. The monowheel.

4. The Segway

5. Explain the Stydy Skill box for opinion signal words. T may bring in some photos or write on the board some interestiong topics and ask Ss for their opinions. Ask Ss to use opinion signal words where possible.

1. fact Remind Ss of the difference between a fact and an opinion that they have learnt in Getting 2. opinion 3. opinion Satrted. Ss work in pairs to complete the task.

4. fact 5. opinion Post- reading and speaking: 6. fact 6. Ss work in pair to prepare their 213

GV: Vũ Xuân Minh

Năm học: 2019- 2020

presentation about the vehicle. Remind them to use statements about both facts and opinions. Ss can add their own ideas where possible. Call on some pairs to present it to the class.

3. Homework -Learn new words and phrases Prepare for skills 2. *Adjustments: ................................................................................................................................................ ................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................

214

GV: Vũ Xuân Minh

Năm học: 2019- 2020

Date of preparing: April 13th, 2018 Date of teaching: April 14th, 2018

Period 91: Unit 11: TRAVELLING IN THE FUTURE Lesson 6: Skill 2 I. Objectives.

By the end of the lesson, Ss can: - listen for specific information about inventions of future means of transport.

- Write a paragraph about future means of transport.

II. Teaching aids: - Projector, CD III. Procedure I. Class organization.

- Greetings.

- Checking attendance: 7A1……….. 7A2: …………..

II. New lesson.

Ss and T’s activities Contents 1. Warm up.

Chatting: Which transport do you think of in the future?

2. Activities.

I- Listening 1. Have Ss guess the answers first. Tell Ss 1. Look at the picture. Which do you that the questions ask about what they think are the correct options below. think, and not what is true about the - Ss’ opinion vehicle. Remind them to use opinion signal 2. Now listen and check your answers. words where possible. Do not give 1. can corrective feedback.

2. doesn’t - Accept all answers from Ss and ask them 3. not easy to explain why they think so.

4. can’t 2. Play the recording and ask Ss to check 5. is their answers in 1.

3. Listen again and answer the following 3. Ss work individually to answer the questions. questions and compare the answers with 1. The vehicle is called TF-X their partners.

2. It can travel at 300 kph.

3. It was designed in 2013.

215

GV: Vũ Xuân Minh

Năm học: 2019- 2020

4. Ss work in pairs to do the task. Give correct feedback and play the recording again if necessary.

5. Refer to the text in Reading to support Ss in this task.

6. Have Ss swap their writing with each other. Ask them to identify facts and opinions. For more able classes, ask Ss to give their own feedback about their friend’s writing.

4. Tick the benefits of this vehicle that are mentioned in the recording.

1. It can avoid traffic.

2. It can avoid bad weather.( not mention) 3. It travels fast.

4. You can invite three of your relatives and three of your friends to travel with you on this vehicle at the same time.( the car has two seats) 5. Learning to drive the car is simple.

II- Writing 5. Write a short paragraph about a future means of transport in this unit. Include both facts and your opinions about the vehicle.

- name of mean of transport.

- how it looks - how its functions.

- what you think about it.

6. Swap your writing with your partner.

Find which sentences are facts, and which ones are opinions. Do you agree or disagree with your friend’s opinions?

3. Homework -Learn new words and phrases.

- Exercise: Part D, E ( Workbook) Prepare: Looking back and project. *Adjustments: ................................................................................................................................................ ................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................

216

GV: Vũ Xuân Minh

Năm học: 2019- 2020

Date of preparing: April 16th, 2018 Date of teaching: April 17th, 2018

Period 92: Unit 11: TRAVELLING IN THE FUTURE Lesson 7: Looking back + Project I. Objectives.

By the end of the lesson, Ss can: - Look back the unit to review: II. Teaching aids: - Projector, CD III. Procedure I. Class organization.

- Greetings.

- Checking attendance: II. New lesson.

Ss and T’s activities 1. Warm up.

Chatting: Ss talk about their future means of transport.

2. Activities. + VOCABULARY 1. Have Ss work individually to combine the pictures together to form a phrase

2. Ss first work individually, then work in groups to fill the table.

Contents

I- Vocabulary.

1. Use the clues in the two pictures to form a phrase. b.solar-powered taxi c. driverless plane d. space car e. underwater bus.

2. Complete this table.

Transport possibilities in the future.

Verb bicycle

+ GRAMMAR 3. Ss work individually then compare their answers with each other.

car

Ride, pedal drive

train

drive

airplane

Fly, drive

Energy used Windpowered Waterpowered Solarpowerd Solarpowered

Characteristics Automated, high-speed Flying, driverless Underwater, supersonic driveless

II-Grammar 3. Change the personal pronouns in

217

GV: Vũ Xuân Minh

Năm học: 2019- 2020

4. Ss write the text and swap with each other for peer comments.

5. Ss work individually then compare their answers with each other.

+ Project Encourage Ss to draw picturesor use videos to illustrate their ideas. They may use posters or prepare a presentation using computer if possible.

brackets into suitable possessive pronouns.

1.mine 2. yours 3.theirs 4. hers 4. Look at the information about skycycling tubes. Then write a description of this means of transport using will and won’t.

Skycycling tubes will be easy to drive….

5.Complete the dialogues using will (+) or won’t (-).

1. (I don’t know).Perhaps we won’t travel in driveless cars in the future.

2. Will we have high speed trains in the next five years?

Yes, maybe we will 3. I think we will have electric taxis very soon.

Oh, I think we won’t have them until the year 2030.

III- Project.

Our own future transport.

In groups, brainstorm ideas for your future means of transport. Think about the following: + Where does it travel? Does it fly, float, drive or something else? + How does it travel? Do you pedal it?..... ……………………………………………

3. Homework -Learn new words and phrases.

- Exercise: Workbook Prepare for the second term test. *Adjustment : ……………………………………………………………………………………………… ………………………………………………………………………………………………

218

GV: Vũ Xuân Minh

Năm học: 2019- 2020

Date of preparing: April 23rd, 2018 Date of teaching: April 24th, 2018

Period 93:

REVISION

I. Objectives.

By the end of the lesson, Ss can review for the coming test.

II. Teaching aids: - Projector, CD III. Procedure I. Class organization.

- Greetings.

- Checking attendance: II. New lesson.

I: Choose the word whose underlined part is pronounced differently from that of the other words in each group.

1. A. teenager B. together C. guess D. regular 2. A. meat B. reader C. sea D. realize 3. A. horrible B. hour C. hundred D. hold 4. A. much B. drug C. future D. buffalo 5. A. serious B. symptom C. sugar D. sauce II: Choose the best option to complete the following sentences.

6. I have known her………………..two years.

A. with B. for C. since D. in 7. He ......... many old books for 5 years.

A. recycled B. is recycling C. has recycled D. will recycle 8. To prepare for the new year, I .................. my house again since last month .

A. paint B. painted C. have painted D. has painted 9. They ………..the used plastic bottles with water several times yesterday.

A. washed B. is washed C. are washed D. were washed 10. It is dangerous ............. quickly.

A. driving B. drove C. to drive D. driven III: Match the verbs in A with the phrases in B A B 11. donate a. flu 12. have b. eggshells 13. have a c. a mural 14. carve d. blood 15 . paint e. temprature V. Supply the correct form of verbs 1.It (rain)………………….. ……for two hours?

219

GV: Vũ Xuân Minh

Năm học: 2019- 2020

2. What our children (do)…………… when we( come)………………….home tomorrow.

3. He still (sleep)………………this time tomorrow? No, he ( do)…………the gardening.

4. We(not do) …………………………….the cooking last night. We(eat)……………out VI- Reading Read the following passage and choose the best answers.

My Television My television is an important (1) _____of furniture to me. I can’t get (2) ____ the house very often, but my TV brings the whole (3) ______to me. From the evening news and the “all-news” channels. I learn about events(4) ______ the outside world: politics, the environment, recent changes in technology and medicine, and (5) ______on. I like game shows and travel programs, (6) ______. And I love comedies: I think it’s important to be (7) _____to laugh. I can even watch shows (8) _____other languages and “go shopping” by TV. With the major national networks, I have a (9) ______of fifty different programs (10) ___the same time!

1. A. bit B. piece C. slice D. pair 2. A. out B. in C. out of D. in to 3. A. world B. places C. towns D. cities 4. A. on B. in C. out D. over 5. A. such B. this C. that D. so 6. A. too B. so C. either D. neither 7. A. ability B. enable C. able D. inability 8. A. of B. in C. at D. by 9. A. choose B. chose C. choice D. choosing 10.A. in B. at C. on D. of VII- Writing Write the second sentence so that it has a similar meaning to the first one: 1. Although his leg was broken, he managed to get out of the car.

In spite of …………………………………………………………..

2. I haven’t met my grandmother for a month.

It …………………………………………………………………..

3. We have two- month summer vacation.

Our summer vacation …………………………………………………….

4. My father spent two hours repairing my bike.

It …………………………………………………………………………

5. I prefer playing outdoor games to indoor games I’d ………………………………………………………………………. *Adjustment : ……………………………………………………………………………………………… ………………………………………………………………………………………………

220

GV: Vũ Xuân Minh

Năm học: 2019- 2020

Date of preparing: April 25th, 2018 Date of teaching: April 26th, 2018

Period 94:

ENGLISH TEST 4

I. Objectives.

- Check the Ss’understanding. Have a future plan.

II. Teaching aids: - Paper test III. Procedure I. Class organization.

- Greetings.

- Checking attendance: A.Matrận Chủ đề

Nhận biết KQ TL

Listening

Thông hiểu KQ TL 3

Writing

16

5

Tổng 3

4

Reading

Language focus

Vận dụng KQ TL

4 5

5

7

28

VI. Total B. New lesson.

I. Choose the word that has the underlined parts pronounced differently from the others in each group: D. northern 1. A. there B. healthy C. gather 2. A. used B. practised C. talked D. liked 3. A. days B. ways C. bays D. says II. Choose the word whose stress pattern is different from that of the other words in each group.

1. A. diver B. vessel C. erect D. chopstick 2. A. construct B. marbles C. comic D. table 221

GV: Vũ Xuân Minh

Năm học: 2019- 2020

III. Choose the best answer from the four choices (A or B,C,D) to complete each of the following sentences. a. choose the correct answer 1. Our school will ______ the school festival next week.

A. hold B. take C. rehearse D. play 2. ______ naughty boy!

A. What B. What a C. How D. How a 3. That is my book and this is ……………….……

A. she B. her C. my D. hers 4. I and my brother usually spend two hour ……………….……every evening.

A. do our homework B. to do our homework C. doing our homework D. to doing our homework 5. Of the ten students , he is ……………….……

A. tall B. taller C. the taller D. the tallest 6. She came to the stadium…………………….. a bus A. in B. on C. with D. being happy 7. His often travel ……….his car A. on B. in C. by D. to 8. Look at the picture! You…………..a motorbike.

A. are driving B. are riding C. fly D. are flying 9. At 7.00 tomorrow, you ……………..to school.

A. cycle B. will cycle C. will be cycling D. will be cycled 10. – He …………….. in a white sports car A. walks B. drives C. takes D. flies b.Underline the correct answer 1. I usually read books when I am ( in / on / by ) …………….a train.

2. My children often sleep while ( in / on / by) ……………a plane 3. Their car is red. ( We / Our / Ours) ……………….car is grey.

4.Coal, natural gas, oil are ………………( renewable / non- renewable ) energy 5. It’s difficult to……………(pedal/ fly / drive)a bike up the hill.

6. The boat can…………………(float / fly / ride/ walk) on the water II. Supply the correct form of verbs 1.It (rain)………………….. ……for two hours?

2. What our children (do)…………… when we( come)………………….home tomorrow.

3. He still (sleep)………………this time tomorrow? No, he ( do)…………the gardening.

4. We(not do) …………………………….the cooking last night. We(eat)……………out

222

GV: Vũ Xuân Minh

Năm học: 2019- 2020

IV- Reading Read the text and answer the questions.

The first reason why many families do volunteer work is that they feel satisfied and proud. The feeling of fulfillment comes from helping the community and other people. In addition, volunteering is a great way for families to have fun and closer. But many people say they don’t have time to volunteer because they have to work and take of their families.

If that’s the case, try rethingking some of your free time as a family. You could select just one or two projects a year and make them a family tradition. For instance, your family can make and donate gift blankets for the old homeless people on holidays. Your family can also spend only one Saturday morning a month collecting rubbish in your neighborhood.

1. How do people often feel when they volunteer?..................................................................

2. How can your family benefit from doing volunteer?……………………………………

3. Why don’t some people have time to volunteer?………………………………

4. How can your family help the old homeless people? …………………………………………………………………………………………..

V- Writing Write the second sentence so that it has a similar meaning to the first one: 1. Although his leg was broken, he managed to get out of the car.

In spite of …………………………………………………………..

2. I haven’t met my grandmother for a month. It is………………………………

3. We will reduce our use of electricity to save our energy.

Our use of electricity …………………………………………………….

4. It took my father two hours to repair my bike.

My father …………………………………………………………………………

4. your book is different from mine My book ………………………………

Answers I- 1. T 2. F 3. F II- Language focus.

I. 1. B 2. A 3.DII. 1. C 2.A III.a. 1. A. hold 2 B. What a 3. D 4C 5.D 6. B 7. B 8. B. 9 . C 10 . B b. on 2. on 3. Our . 4.mine 5. pedal. 6.float.

II. Supply the correct form of verbs 1.Has it rained;2. Will …be doing- come;3. Will he still be ; will be doing;4. didn’t do/ ate IV- Reading Read the text and answer the questions.

1They feel satisfied and proud 2. volunteering is a great way for families to have fun and closer.

3. because they have to work and take of their families 4. your family can make and donate gift blankets for the old homeless people on holidays 223

GV: Vũ Xuân Minh

Năm học: 2019- 2020

V- Writing Write the second sentence so that it has a similar meaning to the first one: 1. In spite of his broken leg , he managed to get out of the car.

2. It is a month since I last met my grandmother 3.Our use of electricity will be reduced to save our energy.

4. My father spent two hours repairing my bike 5. My book is not the same as yours *Adjustment : ……………………………………………………………………………………………… ………………………………………………………………………………………………

224

GV: Vũ Xuân Minh

Năm học: 2019- 2020

Date of planning: 16/4/2016 Date of teaching: 18/4/2016 Period: 98 Unit 12: An Overcrowded world Lesson 1: Getting started I. Objectives.

By the end of the lesson, Ss can use the words to describe overcrowded places, words about the effects of overcrowding.

II. Teaching aids: - Projector, CD III. Procedure I. Class organization.

- Greetings.

- Checking attendance: II. New lesson.

Ss and T’s activities 1. Warm up.

Contents

Write the word ‘population’ on the board.

Make sure Ss know the meaning of this word by either giving the equivalent Vietnamese word or 225

GV: Vũ Xuân Minh

Năm học: 2019- 2020

writing: There are 5 million people in Ha Noi. → Ha Noi has a population of 5 million.

Ask Ss if they know the population of any area in the country or in the world. Once the Ss have done it, add the prefix “over” and elicit the meaning of this newly-formed word from Ss. 2. Activities.

Presentation I. New words Elicit the new words Overcrowded (adj): đông nghịt Overpopulation (n): dân số quá đông Slum (n): Khu nhà ổ chuột Peaceful (adj): thanh bình Crime (n): tội phạm Commit crime: phạm tội Healthcare (n): chăm sóc sức khỏe Wealthy (adj): giàu có Diverse (adj): đa dạng, khác - Set the scene: Ask Ss to look at the title of Lawful (adj): hợp pháp, đúng the text and the pictures and ask them prediction pháp luật > < Unlawful question about what they are going to read. The Spacious (adj): rộng rãi questions may be: • What is the conversation about?

• What do you think Brazil is like?

• Do you think Phuong likes Brazil?

• What can you find about Rio/Brazil in this conversation?

Ss guess the answers.

Practice Play the recording. Ss listen and read. Ask II. Activities Ss if their predictions are correct.

Activity 1a 226

GV: Vũ Xuân Minh

Năm học: 2019- 2020

1a. Ss work independently. Ask them to 1. T 4. T read the sentences and decide if they are true or false. Ss compare answers with a partner. Have Ss correct the false sentences. T writes the correct answers on the board.

2. T 5. F

3. F

b. Ask Ss to read the explanations in the exercise and try to find the words without checking the text. Then ask Ss to refer to the Activity 1b dialogue again for the correct words. Correct the 1. deverse 2. wealthy answers as a class.

3. major 4. slums 5. crime 2. Make sure Ss know the meaning of the words in the box. Then Ss work independently to label the pictures. Have them compare their Activity 2 1. a 2. c 3. b answers with a partner.

5. d Play the recording and have Ss repeat the 4. e words. T gives correction if necessary.

Production: 3. Ss complete the exercise independently.

T calls some Ss to share their sentences with the class. T can choose some good sentences and write them on the board for other Ss to learn from. Encourage Ss to make as many sentences as possible.

4. In groups, ask Ss to think of the problems and make a list of them.

If Ss have difficulty, suggest that they look for problems in their daily life at their own classes, schools, homes, areas or any other places they know for the answers.

5. Call each goup to report their list to the class. T may help write the problems on the 227

GV: Vũ Xuân Minh

Năm học: 2019- 2020

board. Ask the class if they agree or not.

Encourage them to give an explanation to their answers. Then move on to the next group and do the same.

3. Homework -Learn new words and phrases Prepare for A closer look 1 Adjustment: ……………………………………………………………………………………………… ……………………………………………………………………………………………

Date of planning: 17/4/2016 Date of teaching: 22/4/ 2012 Period: 99 Unit 12: AN OVERCROWDED WORLD Lesson 2: A Closer Look 1 I. Objectives.

By the end of the lesson, Ss can: use the lexical items related to the topic of an overcrowded world.

II. Teaching aids: 228

GV: Vũ Xuân Minh

Năm học: 2019- 2020

- Projector, CD III. Procedure I. Class organization.

- Greetings.

- Checking attendance: II. New lesson.

Ss and T’s activities 1. Warm up.

Brainstorming:

Contents

Ask Ss if they can remember any new words they learn in Getting Started.

Categorize them as positive (peaceful, wealthy…) and negative (poor, slums…).

Move on to this lesson which focuses on some problem as a result of overpopulation.

2. Activities.

I. New words Presentation Dense (adj): dày đặc, đông đúc Elicit the new words shortage (n): sự thiếu hụt nutrition (n): dinh dưỡng malnutrition (n): suy dinh dưỡng spread (v): lan tràn, phát tán Practice

II. Activities Activity 1

1. Ss listen to the recording and number 1. crime the words. Ss listen again and repeat the 3. poverty words.

5. disease 7. dense

T checks the understanding of the words bay asking questions like: ‘Do you think our school has enough space?’; ‘What causes disease?’

Activity 2 1. healthcare

2. malnutrition 4. shortage 6. space 8. healthcare

2. crime

229

GV: Vũ Xuân Minh

Năm học: 2019- 2020

2. Ss work individually. T checks the answer as a class. Encourage Ss to explain why they choose that word for the sentence.

3. T can give an example of causes and effects. Write the example on the board and ask Ss which one is the effect.

3. Diseae 5. poverty

4. Malnutrition

Activity 3 Eg: He fast

drove a. He had an accident. √ b. He felt hungry.

Ss work independently or in pairs.

When they have finished, let them exchange their answers with a partner/another pair. T then gives correct answer. T may ask Ss to explain why.

4. In groups, Ss discuss to fine out which 1.b 2. a 3. f 4. d 5. c 6.e problems each place may have. T collects Ss’ answers and write them on the board.

Then the whole class look at the problems Activity 4 and discuss for agreement/disagreement. a. Lack of entertainment, few opportunities for employment, not enough services.

Pronunciation b. Poverty, slums, disease, pollution, Word stress unempoyment, poor healthcare.

5. Ss listen and mark the stressed c. Noise/ air pollution, crime, syllables. T corrects the answers. Have Ss overcrowded, shortage of accommodation. listen again and repeat the words.

Production:

Activity 5

Look out!

Write two pair of the word’supply’ and ‘question’ on the board, denoting one

s’pacious

Po’llution ‘poverty

‘stressful

‘hungry

Nu’trition 230

GV: Vũ Xuân Minh

Năm học: 2019- 2020

is a verb and one is a noun. Ask some Ss to read them. Ask other Ss to listen and see if they can find the difference in pronunciation of the two words.

In’crease (v)

Su’pport

‘violence

‘shortage

Di’sease

‘healthcare

Key: su’pply (n), su’pply (v); ‘question (n), ‘question (v) 6. Have Ss listen and repeat the Activity 6 words.

As a noun

As a verb

‘record

‘record

‘picture

‘picture

‘answer

‘answer

pa’rade

pa’rade

Su’pport Su’pport 3. Homework -Learn new words and phrases Prepare for A closer look 2 Adjustment:

231

GV: Vũ Xuân Minh

Năm học: 2019- 2020

Date of planning: 17/5/2016 Date of teaching: 23/4/ 2016 Period: 100 Unit 12: AN OVERCROWDED WORLD Lesson 3: A Closer Look 2 I. Objectives.

By the end of the lesson, Ss can: use comparatives of quantifiers, make tag questions.

II. Teaching aids: - Projector, CD III. Procedure I. Class organization.

- Greetings.

- Checking attendance: II. New lesson.

Ss and T’s activities 1. Warm up.

Chatting: - Remind Ss of items they learnt in the previous lessons. + words of quantifiers (many,a little…) + countable and uncountable nouns. + imperatives with “more”, “less”, and “fewer”.

2. Activities.

GRAMMAR: COMPARISONS OF QUANTIFIERS. 1. Have Ss read the sentences and the rules in the table. Ask Ss to add more words to the table for each type of comparison.

2. Ss complete the reading independently.Encourage Ss to observe and recognise that both tables include the same kinds of information.

3. Ss complete exercise 3 by referring to

Contents

I- Comparisons of quantifiers.

1. Read the sentences.

- more + Nu/Ns + than…

- less + Nu + than…

- fewer + Ns + than….

2. Look at the information for the two cities below, and compare their data.

Eg: In Brumba, there are more people per square kilometre than in Crystal. ………………………………………

3. Read the comparisons of the two cities, and decide if they are true. If they are not, correct them.

1. Correct 2. Incorrect. In Brumba, more people live in slums.

3. Incorrect. People in Crystal earn more per day.

232

GV: Vũ Xuân Minh

Năm học: 2019- 2020

the tables.

4. Correct.

5. Correct.

4. Have Ss do this exercise independently. T then check the answers as a class.

4. Complete the sentences with more, less or fewer.

1. fewer 2. more 3. more 4. fewer 5. less GRAMMAR: TAG- QUESTIONS. II- Tag- questions.

- Write 3 questions on the board: + How can the government improve the Draw Ss’ attention to how these three life of people in the slums? questions are formed: the first two types Ss + Do you live in an overcrowded place? have already learnt and the new one, tag + They have moved to the city to look for a questions. job, haven’t they?

Have Ss read the conversation 5. Ss do this exercise independently. Then they share their answers with a partner. T checks and writes the correct tags on the board.

6. Ss do this exercise independently. T checks the answers as a class.

3. Homework -Learn the grammar rules Prepare for Communication.

5. Check if the tags are correct. If they are not, correct them.

1. Incorrect….do you? – don’t you?

2. Incorrect…aren’t they?- don’t they?

3. Correct 4. Correct 5. Incorrect…can’t they?- can they?

6. Choose one of the question tags in the box to complete each blank in the interview.

1. don’t they 2. isn’t it?

3. can’t we?

4. is it?

Adjustment : ……………………………………………………………………………………………… ………………………………………………………………………………………………

233

GV: Vũ Xuân Minh

Năm học: 2019- 2020

Date of planning: 17/5/2016 Date of teaching: 23/4/ 2016 Period: 101 Unit 12: AN OVERCROWDED WORLD Lesson 3: Communication I. Objectives.

By the end of the lesson, Ss can: use comparatives of quantifiers, make tag questions.

II. Teaching aids: - Projector, CD III. Procedure I. Class organization.

- Greetings.

- Checking attendance: II. New lesson.

Ss and T’s activities 1. Warm up.

Chatting: - Remind Ss of items they learnt in the previous lessons. + words of quantifiers (many,a little…) + countable and uncountable nouns. + imperatives with “more”, “less”, and “fewer”.

2..

- Write the word “ population” on the board

Contents I-.

1. Read the sentences.

- more + Nu/Ns + than…

- less + Nu + than…

- fewer + Ns + than….

2. Look at the information to answer - Ss answer the questions.

- T plays the recording. Ss listen and read. Ask Ss if their predictions are correct.

234

GV: Vũ Xuân Minh

Năm học: 2019- 2020

(?) Do you know the population of any area in the country or in the world.

- Ask Ss to look at the title of the text and the pictures and ask them to predict questions about what they are going to read. (?) What is the conversation about? (?) What do you think Brazil is like? (?) Do you think Phuong likes Brazil? (?) What can you find about Rio/ Brazil in this conversation?

- Ss answer the questions.

- T plays the recording. Ss listen and read. Ask Ss if their predictions are correct.

2. Activities.

5. answers as a class.

3. Homework -Learn the grammar rules Prepare for .

3. Read the comparisons of the two cities, and decide if they are true. If they are not, correct them.

1. Correct 2. Incorrect. In Brumba, more people live in slums.

3. Incorrect. People in Crystal earn more per day.

4. Correct.

5. Correct.

3. + How can the government improve the life of people in the slums? + Do you live in an overcrowded place? + They have moved to the city to look for a job, haven’t they?

Adjustment : ……………………………………………………………………………………………… ………………………………………………………………………………………………

235

GV: Vũ Xuân Minh

Năm học: 2019- 2020

Ss and T’s activities 1.Warm up.

- Write the word “ population” on the

Contents

236

GV: Vũ Xuân Minh

Năm học: 2019- 2020

board (?) Do you know the population of any area in the country or in the world.

- Ask Ss to look at the title of the text and the pictures and ask them to predict questions about what they are going to read. (?) What is the conversation about? (?) What do you think Brazil is like? (?) Do you think Phuong likes Brazil? (?) What can you find about Rio/ Brazil in this conversation?

- Ss answer the questions.

- T plays the recording. Ss listen and read. Ask Ss if their predictions are correct.

2. Activities.

+ There are 5 millions people in Ha Noi. - Ha Noi has a population of 5 million.

237

GV: Vũ Xuân Minh

Năm học: 2019- 2020

Week 29th Planning date: 28/2/2014 Teaching date: 7/3/2014 Period 75 Unit 9: FESTIVALS AROUND THE WORLD Lesson 7: looking back + Project I. Objectives.

By the end of the lesson, Ss can cover the whole unit: Grammar, vocabularies and structures. Ss apply them to do exercises.

II. Teaching aids: - Projector.

III. Procedure I. Class organization.

- Greetings.

- Checking attendance: 7A1……….. 7A2: …………..

II. New lesson.

Ss’ and T’s activities 1. Warm up.

Contents

BÀI KIỂM TRA SỐ 1 Môn: TIẾNG ANH LỚP 7- Năm học: 2013- 2014 (Dành cho học sinh tham gia học thí điểm theo Dự án ngoại ngữ Quốc gia 2020) Marks Teacher’s comments

I: Choose the word whose underlined part is pronounced differently from that of the other words in each group.

1. A. teenager B. together C. guess D. regular 2. A. meat B. reader C. sea D. realize B. hour C. hundred D. hold 3. A. horrible 4. A. much B. drug C. future D. buffalo 5. A. serious B. symptom C. sugar D. sauce II: Choose the best option to complete the following sentences.

6. I have known her………………..two years.

238

GV: Vũ Xuân Minh

Năm học: 2019- 2020

A. with B. for C. since D. in 7. He ......... many old books for 5 years.

A. recycled B. is recycling C. has recycled D. will recycle 8. To prepare for the new year, I .................. my house again since last month .

A. paint B. painted C. have painted D. has painted 9. They ………..the used plastic bottles with water several times yesterday.

A. washed B. is washed C. are washed D. were washed 10. It is dangerous ............. quickly.

A. driving B. drove C. to drive D. driven III: Match the verbs in A with the phrases in B A B 11. donate a. flu 12. have b. eggshells 13. have a c. a mural 14. carve d. blood 15 . paint e. temprature IV: Read the text and answer the questions.

The first reason why many families do volunteer work is that they feel satisfied and proud. The feeling of fulfillment comes from helping the community and other people. In addition, volunteering is a great way for families to have fun and closer. But many people say they don’t have time to volunteer because they have to work and take of their families.

If that’s the case, try rethingking some of your free time as a family. You could select just one or two projects a year and make them a family tradition. For instance, your family can make and donate gift blankets for the old homeless people on holidays. Your family can also spend only one Saturday morning a month collecting rubbish in your neighborhood.

16. How do people often feel when they volunteer? …………………………………………………………………………………………..

17. How can your family benefit from doing volunteer? …………………………………………………………………………………………..

18. Why don’t some people have time to volunteer? …………………………………………………………………………………………..

19. How can your family help the old homeless people? …………………………………………………………………………………………..

20. Is collecting rubbish in the neighborhood an example of volunteer work? …………………………………………………………………………………………..

V: Listen: You will some information about a place called Sea world. Listen and complete questions 21-25. You will hear the information twice.

Sea world Open: Tuesday – Sunday Closed during month of: 21……………………………………

239

GV: Vũ Xuân Minh

Năm học: 2019- 2020

Watch a film about the sea in: Dolphin show starts at: Shop sells: Child’s ticket costs:

22……………………………………

23…………………………………….

24…………………………………….

25…………………………………….

VI: Writing: Imagine that you are a doctor. Write an e-mail to respond your patient who is putting on weight. Give him/ her your advice. ………………………………………………………………………………………….. ………………………………………………………………………………………….. ………………………………………………………………………………………….. ………………………………………………………………………………………….. ………………………………………………………………………………………….. ………………………………………………………………………………………….. ………………………………………………………………………………………….. ………………………………………………………………………………………….. ………………………………………………………………………………………….. ………………………………………………………………………………………….. ………………………………………………………………………………………….. ………………………………………………………………………………………….. ………………………………………………………………………………………….. ………………………………………………………………………………………….. ………………………………………………………………………………………….. ………………………………………………………………………………………….. ………………………………………………………………………………………….. ………………………………………………………………………………………….. ………………………………………………………………………………………….. ………………………………………………………………………………………….. ………………………………………………………………………………………….. …………………………………………………………………………………………..

240

GV: Vũ Xuân Minh

Năm học: 2019- 2020

241

GV: Vũ Xuân Minh

Năm học: 2019- 2020

Hai An Secondary school

Buổi 1:

English lesson plan for grade 7 Ngày soạn : 11 / 9/ 2019

Revision Unit 1

Tiết 1+2+3: Present simple tense Future simple I. Mục tiêu: Giúp Hs ôn tập kiến thức có trong Unit 1 với chủ đề sở thích.

II. Kiến thức : 1.Vocabulary : Words related to hobbies.

2. Pronunciation : Sounds / / and / / 3. Grammar: - The present simple and the future simple.

- Verbs of liking + Ving 4. Communication : - Talking about and describing hobbies.

- Giving opinions about hobbies.

III. Bài tập: Teacher and students Content and board I. Present simple tense - Asks Ss to give the forms of present - Give the answer simple tense and how to use it. ? (Wh) do / does + S + Vinfi ?

- Gives feedback and correct answers: Ex;1. Do you like music ?

Tobe: is, are, am.

2. Where does he live ?

I- am (-) S + don’t/ doesn’t + Vinfi He, She, It – is Ex: 1. I don’t go to school on Sundays.

You, We , They – are 2. He doesn’t have many friends.

- Asks Ss to do exercise: (+) S + Vinfi/Vs/es Question 1: Complete the following Ex: They play soccer everyday sentences using the present simple tense.

- Do exercise individually.

1. They often (play).... soccer after school ? (?) What kind of each sentence (+)(-)(?)

2. My aunt is a teacher. She (work) …….. in - Gives correct answer: 1. play a primary school.

3. They (not go) to school by bus, they often 2. works 3. don’t go- go (go) by bike.

4. come 4. They ( come ) from Thanh Hoa. 5. does she watch 5. She ( watch ) TV every evening?

6.doesn’t live 6. Tung ( not live ) near my house.

7. teach 7. I ( teach ) English.

8. He ( walk ) to school everyday.

8. walks 9. Lan and Hue ( study ) English very well. 9. study 1

Hai An Secondary school English lesson plan for grade 7 10. My sister ( work ) in Hop Luc hospital. 10. works 11. read ( Class 7A ) 11. Her parents ( read ) books every night. 12. has 12. He ( have ) Maths at 8.35.

13. doesn’t do 13. Mai (not do) the housework very 1. Use: to express an action in the future carefully.

2. Form : - Givesfeedback and correct answer (+) S + will + Vinfi Ex : He will meet you next week II. The future simple : ( - ) S + won’t + Vinfi 1. Use? Ex: He won’t meet you next week 2. Form ? (?) Will + S + Vinfi ?

3. Advs ?

Ex: Will you go camping next week?

Exercise 2: Give the correct form of the verbs using future simple tense.

3. Advs ?

Cho dạng đúng của động từ trong ngoặc ở Tomorrow , next …., in the future… thì hiện tại đơn rồi chuyển các câu đó sang - Ss do individually dạng phủ định và nghi vấn rồi trả lời.

- Ss come to the board and give answer.

- Givesfeedback and correct answer - corrects: 1. will come 4. won’t teach III. Verbs of liking + Ving Revises some verbs of liking + Ving 2. won’t go 5. will he walk Like 3. will be 6. will … be Love + Ving - Do exercise individually Enjoy - Give answer keys : Hate 1. She likes watching TV 2. They dislike eating out Exercise 3 : Complete the following 3. Tuan loves listening to music. sentences : 1. She / like / watch TV 4. He doesn’t enjoy playing soccer 2. They / dislike / eat out - Write exercise on the notebook and do 3. Tuan / love / listen / music. it at home.

4. He / not enjoy / play soccer - Key : IV. Homework : Find and correct 1. to reading -> reading mistakes : 1. Her parents enjoy to reading books at 2. doesn’t -> don’t nights.

3. goes > go 2. My friends doesn’t like cooking 4. likes -> like 3. Will he goes out tomorrow ?

5. has -> have 4. Does she likes skipping ?

6. washs - > washes 5. He doesn’t has breakfast every morning. 7. haves -> has 6. She washs her face every morning.

7. He haves maths on Mondays and Weds. * Adjustment: ………………………………………………………….………………………

2

Hai An Secondary school

Buổi 2: Tiết 4+5+6:

English lesson plan for grade 7 Ngày soạn : 16/ 9/ 2019

Revision Unit 1 ( Cont ) Verbs of liking + Ving

I. Mục tiêu: Giúp Hs ôn tập kiến thức có trong Unit 1 với chủ đề sở thích.

II. Kiến thức : 1.Vocabulary : Words related to hobbies.

2. Pronunciation : Sounds / / and / / 3. Grammar: - Verbs of liking + Ving 4. Communication : - Talking about and describing hobbies.

- Giving opinions about hobbies.

T and Ss Content and board I. Checking old lesson : Give correct form of the following verbs: 1. He ( not drive ) to work, he ( walk ) 2. They ( live ) in Ha Noi in the future, they ( not live ) in Thanh Hoa. 3. She likes ( wear ) Jeans

II. Practice : - Retell what they have learnt in the last period.

Exercise 1: Give the correct form of the verbs: 1. your mother ( read ) book every night ?

- No, she ( watch ) TV. 2. The usually (play) soccer every afternoon ?

3. They like ( read ) books in the library.

4. There ( be ) four chairs in the kitchen ?

- No, there (not be) four, there (be) one.

5. I (go) to Ha Noi next week, I ( have) a party with my family.

6. She ( have) breakfast at 6.30 every

- Ss do exercise individually. (?) Which tense in each sentence ? sentence 1,2 ? ( present simple and future simple ) - doesn’t drive - walks - will live – won’t live (?) Which structure in sentence 3: -> wearing - verbs of liking + Ving -> wearing - Present simple - future simple - verbs of liking + Ving (?)Which tense in each sentence?Why? 1. Does …. read - watches 2. Do they.. play 3. reading 4. are there …. are not … is 5. will go – will have 6. Does she have- doesn’t have-has 7. do you go – go

3

Hai An Secondary school morning ?

- No. She (not have) at 6.30, she (have) at 6.00.

7. What time you ( go ) to school everyday ? – I (go) at 6.30 Exercise 2: Reorder the words to make the meaningfull sentences 1. a / is/ the / there / living room /TV/ in ?

2. house / next /the / my / is / to / hospital.

3. should / at / well / you / Tet / behave.

4. year / he / study / this / must / hard .

5. five / are / in / people / there / family / his.

6. statue /of / a / the / there / in / lakes / are / front / two / big. ( good students) 7. we / by /shall /market / the / go/ bus/ to.

8.the /on / turning / take / the /third / right.

III. Homework : Change the adjectives in backet into comparatives or superatives.

1. This house is (tall) than that one 2. My mother cooks (good) than me.

3. This is the (interesting) I’ve seen 4. Lam is the (short) student in my group 5. Today is the (happy) day in my life.

6. This is the (good) school in my village.

7. The roads in my town are ( noisy) than in your town. (good students) 8. This bag is (bad) than that one.

9. These books are ( expensive) than those ones.

10. She is the (bad) singer in her group.

English lesson plan for grade 7

- Ss do individually - Give the answer: 1. Is there a TV in the living room ?

2. My house is next to the hospital …………………

- Write exercise on the notebook and do it at home.

- Key : 1. taller 2. better 3. most interesting 4. shortest

* Adjustment: ………………………………………………………….………………………………… ………………..…………………………………………………………………………… …………………………………………………………………………………………….

4

Hai An Secondary school

English lesson plan for grade 7 Ngày soạn : 22 / 9/ 2019

Buổi 3: Revision Unit 2 Tiết 7+8+9: - Imperatives with more and less.

- Compound sentences I. Mục tiêu: Giúp Hs ôn tập kiến thức có trong Unit 2 với chủ đề sức khỏe.

II. Kiến thức : 1.Vocabulary : Words related to health problems and health tips.

2. Pronunciation : Sounds /f / and /v / 3. Grammar: - Imperatives with more and less.

- Compound sentences 4. Communication : - Talking about health problems.

- Giving advice on heathy lifestyle.

III. Bài tập: Teacher and students Content and board I. Check old lesson : - Asks Ss to give the forms of present simple tense , future - Give the answer simple and how to use it. ? (Wh) do / does + S + Vinfi ?

(-) S + don’t/ doesn’t + Vinfi II. New lesson : ………..

Question 1: Call the names of the health problems. ( good students) Call the names of the health problems and give advice.

- Do exercise individually.

- Answer: + spots + flu + sunburn + headache …….

- Corrects .

- Asks Ss to do exercise 2 : Exercise 2: Reorder the words to make the meaningful sentences.

1. apple/ keep/ An/ day/ doctor/ a/ the/ away. => ………………………………………………………

- Ss do exercises in pairs 2. sleep/ are/ the/ cures/ A/ good/ and/ best/ laugh/ a/ long. - some Ss come to the => ………………………………………………………… board and give the answer.

5

Hai An Secondary school English lesson plan for grade 7 3. eat/ not/ live/ eat/ to/ live/ to - corrects: => ……………………………………………………..

1. An apple a day keeps 4. thirds/ health/ Hygiene/ two/ is/ of. the doctor away. => 2. A good laugh and a long …………………………………………………………….. sleep are the best cures 3. eat to live, not live to 5. good/ eat/ cheerfully/ To/ health/ lightly/ ensure/ and/ eat laugh.

4. Hygiene is two thirds of => …………………………………………………………….. health 5. To ensure good health: Exercise 3. Match the beginnings in A with the endings eat lightly and laugh cheerfully. in B: A : 1. Wear a hat, 2. I have oily skin, 3. He keeps sneezing, - Explains some new 4. I do not have a temperature, words.

5. To say healthy, you eat more vegetable - Answer key: B: a. and his nose is running. It’s flu. b. or you’ll get sunburnt.

1b ; 2d ; 3a ; 4e ; c. and you eat less high-fat food 5c d. so I wash my face regularly ?What noun goes with e. but my face is read. each. Give some examples for each Exercise 4:Write the form of comparison T gives the answers and A little A few Many Much how to use each of them A little- less- the least+ * Homework : - Learn by heart vocab related to health problems uncoun-noun A few – fewer- the fewest + plurals Many- more – the most+ plurals Much- more – the most + uncoun-noun - Do exercise individually at home. * Adjustment: ………………………………………………………….………………………………

6

Hai An Secondary school

English lesson plan for grade 7 Ngày soạn : 02 /10 / 2019

Buổi 4: Revision Unit 2 Tiết 10+11+12: - Compound sentences I. Mục tiêu: Giúp Hs ôn tập kiến thức có trong Unit 2 với chủ đề sức khỏe.

II. Kiến thức : 1.Vocabulary : Words related to health problems and health tips.

2. Pronunciation : Sounds /f / and /v / 3. Grammar: - Compound sentences 4. Communication : - Talking about health problems.

- Giving advice on heathy lifestyle.

III. Bài tập: Teacher and students Content and board I. Check old lesson : - Call the names of the health problems and - Answer: give advice. + spots + flu + sunburn + headache …….

II. New lesson : Question 1: Fill in the gaps using “ more” (?) The meaning of “more” and “less” and “less” 1. Do …… exercise. and how to use them.

2. Wash your hands ……

- Ss do exercises individually.

3. Watch …… TV - some Ss come to the board and give the 4. Eat …… fruit and vegetables. answer.

5. Spend …… time playing computer games - corrects: 6. Eat …… junk food.

1. more 7. Eat …… fish.

2. more 8. Eat …… ice-cream.

3. less 4. more - Corrects .

5. less 6. less 7. more - Asks Ss to do exercise 2 : 8. less - Revision some words: and, so, but, or Exercise 2: Combine one independent - Explains some new words. clause 1 with the opposite independent 7

Hai An Secondary school clause 2 by using an appropriate coordinating conjunction. * Independent clause 1: 1. This afternoon you can go swimming.

2. The Asian diet is low in calories 3. My town has a small population with little traffic and a lot of trees, 4. To prevent flu, we eat a lot of garlic.

5. People in the countryside have less stress. * Independent clause 2: a.You can ride on the path through the forest. b. The Western diet is high in calories. c. It is quiet and peaceful. d. We keep our bodies, especially our feet, warm. e. They usually live longer. * Coordinating conjunction: and, so, but, or Exercise 3: Combine two sentences into one( more, less, fewer) as many ways as possible 1. I drink two littres of water a day . He drinks 2.5 littres of water a day.

2. He has ten comics . His friend has two comics.

3. She ate two cakes. He ate three cakes 4. Lan has ten books . Na has twelve books.

- good students : Make sentences using “more” and “less” w Homework : - Learn by heart vocab related to health problems.

English lesson plan for grade 7 - Ss work in pairs.

- some pairs give the answer.

- corrects: - Answer key: 1-or-a ; 2-but-b ; 3-so-c ; 4-and-d ; 5-so-e

- Make sentences.

How should you do this ?

Note: More + Uncountable nouns/ plurals Less+ Uncountable nouns Fewer + plurals

- Do exercise individually at home.

* Adjustment: ………………………………………………………….………………………………… ………………..…………………………………………………………………………… …………………………..…………………………………………………………………

8

Hai An Secondary school

English lesson plan for grade 7 Ngày soạn : 08 /10 / 2019

Buổi 5 :

Revision Unit 3 Tiết 13+14+15 : Past simple and present perfect Sounds /g / and /k /

I. Mục tiêu: Giúp Hs ôn tập kiến thức có trong Unit 3 với chủ đề công việc vì lợi ích cộng đồng.

II. Kiến thức : 1.Vocabulary : Words related to community service and volunteer work.

2. Pronunciation : Sounds /g / and /k / 3. Grammar: - Past simple and present perfect; contrast past simple tense with present perfect simple tense 4. Communication : - Talking about community service and volunteer work.

- Using because for giving.

III. Bài tập: Teacher and students Content and board - Give the answer I. Check old lesson : ? (Wh) do / does + S + Vinfi ?

- Revise the forms of present simple tense , (-) S + don’t/ doesn’t + Vinfi future simple and how to use it.

1. The past simple .

II. New lesson : Revision: Revise the past simple and present * Usage : ………… perfect. * Form : (+) S + V(qk) + O 1. The past simple .

Ex : He played soccer They went to the market.

(- ) S + didn’t + V(infi) + O He didn’t play soccer. ( ? ) Did + S + V(infi) ?

Did he played soccer ?

Where did they go ? * Adv: yesterday, ago , last ….

2. The present perfect.

2. The present perfect. * Usage : ………… * Form : (+) S + has/ have + V(pp) + O Ex : - He has studied English for 2 years 9

Hai An Secondary school

Exercise for good students : - Make 2 sentences using past simple tense and 2 sentences using present perfect, then change them into (-) and (?).

Ex 1: Give the correct form of the verbs: 1. It (rain) for 3 hours ?

-No, it (not rain) for 3 hours, it (rain) for 4 hours.

2. Last night we (not do) homework, we ( watch) TV. 3. How long you (live) here ?

- I (live) here since 1992.

4. You (get up) late yesterday?

- No, I (not get up) late, I (get up) early, at 5a.m.

5. Your brother ( go ) to HN 5 days ago ?

- No, he (not go) 5 days ago, he (go) yesterday.

Exercise 2: Make meaningful sentences: 1. They / finish / housework/ last night.

2. He / write / letter / yesterday ?

3. We / build / house / for 20 years.

4. She / not learn / E / since last year.

5. You / wait / him / an hour ?

English lesson plan for grade 7 - They have gone to the market.

(- ) S + hasn’t/ haven’t + V(pp) + O He hasn’t studied…. ( ? ) Have/ Has + S + V(pp) ?

Have they seen him since lastweek? * Adv: since , for ….

Exercise 1: Give the correct form of the verbs: - Ss find adv in each sentence, then find out what tense used in each sentence?

1. Has it rained – hasn’t rained- has rain.

2. didn’t do – watched 3. have you lived have lived 4. Did you get up Didn’t get – got up.

5. Did your .. go Didn’t go - went Ex 2: Make meaningful sentences: 1. They finished their housework last night.

2. Did he write a letter yesterday ?

3. We has built our house for 20 years.

4. She has not learnt E since last year.

5.Have you waited him for an hour?

Guides Ssto write the sentences Note: S+ started / began+ Ving/ to Vinfi at/ in /on + period of time = S + have / hass + Vpp Since + period of time S+ started / began+ Ving/ to Vinfi last week S + have / hass + Vpp +Since last week

Exercise 3: Rewrite sentences, keep the same meaning 1. I started learning Enhlish two years ago I have……………………………………..

2. They began cooking for the party at 2.00 They have………………………………….. * Homework : - Revise the past simple and present perfect.

- Do exercise individually at home.

- Make sentences using past simple and present perfect. * Adjustment: ………………………………………………………….…………………………………

10

Hai An Secondary school

English lesson plan for grade 7 Ngày soạn : 17 /10 / 2019

Buổi 6 : Tiết 16+17+18: Revision Unit 3 I. Objectives: Revision what Ss have learnt in units 1,2,3 II. Language content : - knowledge in unit 1,2,3 III. Procedures: Teacher and students

Content and board

Exercise 1: Find the word which has a differrent sound in the past underlined.

1. A. blanket B. calories C. donate D. allergy 2. A. help B. benefit C. elderly D. garden 3. A volunteer B. collage C. community D.doctor 4. A. provide B. individual C. situation D. children 5. A. tutor B. student C. university D. discuss

Exercise 1: Find the word which has a differrent sound in the past underlined.

1. C ; 2D ; 3C ; 4A ; 5D

Exercise 2: Put the words in the box into two groups.

Gold , book , get , garden , clothes , glass , clean , homework , skill , give. /k/ /g/

Exercise 2: Put the words in the box into two groups.

Exercise 3: Put the verbs in brackets in the correct tense form.

1. you ever (do) volunteer work?

- Yes. I (do) volunteer work last month.

2. I (collect) hundreds of old books and clothes for street children so far.

3. My sister wants to raise funds for street children so she (make) hundreds of postcards to sell them.

4. My hobby is carving eggshells and now I (carve) nearly 100.

Exercise 3: Put the verbs in brackets in the correct tense form.

1. have you ever done - did 2. have collected 3. has made 4. have carved 5. helped 6. went 7. has done

/k/ book clean homework skill clothes

/g/ Gold Get Garden Glass Give

11

Hai An Secondary school English lesson plan for grade 7 5. Going home from school yesterday, I (help) an 8. has never eaten 9. have known old man to go across the street.

6. Last Tuesday, I (go) home late because there was a traffic jam near my school.

7. At Tet, my mother and her close friends often go to the hospitals to donate cakes, sweets and toys for the sick children there. She (do) it for many years.

8. Lan never (eat) Banh tet. She will try some this year.

9. Linh is my close friend. We (know) each other for 5 years.

Exercise 4: ( for class 7A) Correct the tense in these Correct the tense in these sentences: 1. We clean the beach last Sunday sentences: 1. clean -> cleaned 2. I didn’t see her for two weeks.

2. didn’t see -> hasn’t seen 3. Do you do your homework yet?

3. do you do -> have you done 4. I have collected coins when I was a little boy.

4. have collected -> collected 5. I see a real elephant when I went to Ban Don 5. see -> saw last year. * Homework : - Revise the past simple and present perfect.

- Make sentences using past simple and present perfect. * Adjustment: ………………………………………………………….………………………………… ………………..…………………………………………………………………………… …………………………..…………………………………………………………………

12

Hai An Secondary school

Buổi 7 : Tiết 19+20+21:

English lesson plan for grade 7 Ngày soạn : 01 /11 / 2019

Revision Unit 4 - Comparisons :( not ) as ….. + the same as + different from

I. Mục tiêu: Giúp Hs ôn tập kiến thức có trong Unit 4 với chủ đề âm nhạc và Mĩ thuật.

II. Kiến thức : 1.Vocabulary : Words related to music and arts.

2. Pronunciation : Sounds / ʃ / and / ʒ / 3. Grammar: - Comparisons : + ( not ) as ….. as + the same as + different from - Expressing agreement : too and either 4. Communication : - Talking about music and arts.

- Writing an informal letter of invitation.

III. Bài tập: Teacher and students Ex 1: Find the word which has a different sound in the part underlined.

1. A. cough B. laugh C. enough D. high 2. A. collect B. clean C. city D. cracket 3. A.pottery B. melody C. modal D. profit 4. A. near B. clear C. dear D. learn 5. A.knocked B. needed C.founded D. wanted Exercise 2: Give the correct form of the verbs: 1. We like (come) to school by bus, but we hate (stand) and (wait) in the rain.

2. We (decorate) my house last week.

(7A) 3. There is nothing like (walk) as a means of (keep) fit.

Content and board - Ss read silently in 5 minutes - Ss give the answer.

- T corrects and give the answer: 1D, 2C, 3A, 4D, 5A

(?) Ss find out the tenses and structures in 5 sentences.

1. coming ( like + Ving) 2. decorated ( yesterday ) 3. walking – keeping 13

Hai An Secondary school (7A) 4. The Silver medal (give) to him yesterday in the formal atmosphere by the Vice Director of the company.

5. The weather last year (be) not so cold as this year.

Exercise 3: Complete the sentences by using too and either : 1. My dog never barks, and (your dog) -> My dog never barks, and your dog doesn’t either.

2. You have to take a bath right way,and (she) 3. She’d like to join in the army, and ( he).

4. We’d rather go to school on time, and (Tom) 5. Everything is not OK, and ( this problem) 6. Nothing can prevent him from going there, and ( you) 7. Everyone knows him, and (I).

8. Nobody knew why he was absent, and (I) 9. The workers must be working very hard, and (you).

10. You’d have come, and (I).

Exercise 4:Complete the sentences by using : as … as, not as… as, different… from 1. Her daughter ………… her ( beautiful).

2. That dog ……… it looks (not dangerous) 3. Schools in Viet Nam ………… schools in the USA. (different ) 4. These trees ………… those (same) 5. His appearance ………… what I have expected. (different) * Homework : - Revise the use “too” and “neither “ - “ as … as, not as… as, different… from” - Make sentences using these structures.

English lesson plan for grade 7 4. was given 5. was

(?) How to use “too” and “neither “ 2. You have to take a bath right way,and she has to, too.

3. She’d like to join in the army, and he’d like too.

4. We’d rather go to school on time, and Tom’d rather 5. Everything is not OK, and this problem isn’t either.

6. Nothing can prevent him from going there, and you can’t either.

7. Everyone knows him, and I know too.

8. Nobody knew why he was absent, and I didn’t know either.

9. The workers must be working very hard, and you must be too..

10. You’d have come, and I’d have too. (?) The meaning of “ as … as, not as… as, different… from” 1. is as beautiful as 2 is not as dangerous as.

3. are different from 4. the same as 5. is different from

* Adjustment: ………………………………………………………….…………………………………

14

Hai An Secondary school

English lesson plan for grade 7 Ngày soạn : 14 /11 / 2019

Buổi 8 : Revision unit 4 Tiết 22+23+24: - Expressing agreement : too and either Sounds / ʃ / and / ʒ / I. Mục tiêu: Giúp Hs ôn tập kiến thức có trong Unit 4 với chủ đề âm nhạc và Mĩ thuật.

II. Kiến thức : 1.Vocabulary : Words related to music and arts.

2. Pronunciation : Sounds / ʃ / and / ʒ / 3. Grammar: - Expressing agreement : too and either 4. Communication : - Talking about music and arts.

- Writing an informal letter of invitation.

Teacher and students

Content and board

Exercise 1: Find the odd one out.

1. A. usual B. design C. version D.pleasure 2. A.musician B.official C.ocean D.concerto 3. A. question B.tradition C.exhibition D. action 4. A.exposure B.ensure C. treasure D. closure 5. A. machine B. chef C. chorus D. brochure Exercise 2: Match the verbs in A with the phrases in B A B 1NguyenDu a. painter 2.BuiXuanPhai b. singer 3. Thu Hien c. actress 4.TrinhCongSon d.poet 5.PhamThiThanh e. musician 6. Tra Giang f.drama director

Exercise 1: Find the odd one out.

1. B ; 2D ; 3A ; 4B ; 5C

Exercise 2: Match the verbs in A with the phrases in B

1d ; 2a ; 3b; 4e ; 5f; 6c

Exercise 3: 15

Hai An Secondary school GOOD STUDENTS Exercise 3:Fill each blank with the corect form of word in the blanket1. Tra Giang is one of the most famous_____(ACT) 2. The _____she gave last night was marvelous (PERFORM) 3. the Đàn Bầu is a Vietnamese traditional _________ instrument (music) 4. I don’t like pop music because it isnot ________ as roc and roll.(EXCITE) 5. Tran Van Can is my favorite _______. He is famous for the painting ‘little sister Thuy” (ART) 6.Mai wanted to share ___ with other. (please) 7. _____ is the art of taking and processing photogaphs. (photogaph) 8.Water puppetry ____ in the villages of the Red River Delta(origin).

9. Peter has received a letter of _____ to see a water puppet show this Sunday ( INVITE).

10.I think a good knowledge of arts and music is a _______ for anyone.(NECESSARY) Exercise 4: rewtite 1. plays are usually longer than films( not as….as) 2. the painting is bigger than the photograph(not as…..as) 3. This picture is the same as the picture in our room ( not different from) 4. This film is more interesting than the one we saw last week(not as……..as) 5. The journey was shorter than we thought at first(not as…….as) * Homework :

English lesson plan for grade 7 1ACTRESS PERFORMANCE musicIAN EXCITING ARTIST pleasURE photogaphY originATED INVITATION NECESSITY Note: artistic ; co tinh nghe thuat Original (adj)

1. films arenot usually as long as plays 2. my painting isnot as big as This picture 3.This picture isnot different from the picture in our room 4. the film we saw last week is not as interesting as This film 5.The journey was not as short as we thought at first Answer key 1.the tickets to the show cost too much for us 6. is different from 7. her sister didn’t, either 8.is the same as 9. paint as well as Khanh 10. her brother is, too 11. is the same as

* Adjustment: ………………………………………………………….………………………………… ………………..…………………………………………………………………………… …………………………..………………………………………………………………

16

Hai An Secondary school

English lesson plan for grade 7 Ngày soạn : 21 /11 / 2019

Buổi 9: Revision Unit 5: Vietnamese food and drink Tiết 25+26+27: - Nouns ( countable/ uncountable).

- How much/ How many ?

- a/ an, some, any.

I. Mục tiêu: Giúp Hs ôn tập kiến thức có trong Unit 5 với chủ đề đồ ăn và đồ uống Việt Nam. II. Kiến thức : 1.Vocabulary : Words related to food and drink, verbs of cooking.

2. Pronunciation : Sounds / ɒ / and / ɔ: / 3. Grammar: - Nouns ( countable/ uncountable).

- How much/ How many ?

- a/ an, some, any.

4. Communication : - Talking about recipe.

- Asking and aswering questions about food preferences.

Bài tập : Teacher and students Content and board Ex 1: Find the word which has a different - Ss read silently in 5 minutes sound in the part underlined.

1.A. apple B. fragrant C. fragile D. traffic - Ss give the answer.

2. A.bitter B. delicious C.diet D.music - T corrects and give the answer: 3. A.pepper B.vegetarian C.shelter D. pen 1B, 2C, 3B, 4D, 5A 4. A.food B.tooth C.noodles D.flood 5. A.sunburn B.tuna C.tutor D.unusual ( Class 7A ) Exercise 2: Put the words in the box into two group Perform, photography, model, sausage, broth, warm, salt, sause, watch, water / ɔ: / /ɔ/ /ɔ/ / ɔ: / photography perform,water model, sausage warm, salt, broth, watch sause, - Ss read all the words again.

Ex 3: Fill in the blanks with How much or (?) How to use “how much” and How many. “how many “ 1. …….…. petrol is there in the motorbike ?

How much + Un.nouns 2. …….…. eggs do you need ?

How many + Cou.nouns 17

Hai An Secondary school 3. …….…. languages can your sister speak?

4. …….…. is this dictionary ?

5. …….…. milk does your son drink every day?

6. …….…. days are there in a year?

7. …….…. kilos of rice do you want?

8. …….…. apple juice is there in the fridge ?

9. …….…. dishes can she cook ?

10. …….…. days off do you have in a week?

Ex 4: a/ an/ some/ any ?

1. I would like ….. dozen eggs.

2. They are planting ….. trees in the garden.

3. There aren’t ….. pictures in the album.

4. Would you like ….. coffee ?

5. There is ….. orange in the box.

6. Do you have ….. brothers or sisters?

7. There is ….. milk in the bottle.

8. They don’t want ….. meat.

9. We have ….. rice and fish for lunch.

10. Mrs. Brown doesn’t have ….. children. * Homework - Revise the way to use how much/ how many; a/an; some/ any.

- Do ex 5.

Ex 5: Complete the conversation.

Mother: Can you go to the market for me, Mai? Mai :Yes, Mum.(1)………………………………

Mother:I need a bottle of cooking oil and some beef Mai: (2)……………..…………………………

Mother:Three hundred grams

English lesson plan for grade 7 (?) Ss find nouns in the sentences from 1-> 10 and states which are countable or which are uncountale - Ss read silently and give the answer.

- T corrects and give the answer: 1. How much 6. How many 2. How many 7. How many 3. How many 8. How much 4. How much 9. How many 5. How much 10.How many (?) How to use a/ an/ some/ any ?

- a/ an + singular nouns - some/ any + plural nouns.

Some : (+) Any: (-); (?)

- Ss read silently the Ex - Ss give the answer.

- T corrects and give the answer: 1. a 6. any 2. some 7. some 3. any 8. any 4. some 9. some 5. an 10. any - Ss do this exercise at home - Answer key: 1. What do you need?

2. How much beef do you want ?

3. Do you need anything else ?

4. How many eggs do you need ?

5. Do you need any vegetables ?

* Adjustment: ………………………………………………………….………………………………… ………………..…………………………………………………………………………… …………………………..…………………………………………………………………

18

Hai An Secondary school

English lesson plan for grade 7 Ngày soạn : 28 /11 / 2019

Buổi 10: Revision Unit 6: The first University in VN Tiết 28+29+30: Passive voice I. Mục tiêu: Giúp Hs ôn tập kiến thức có trong Unit 6.

II. Kiến thức : 1.Vocabulary : Words related to: - historic places and things - Things to take on a trip.

2. Pronunciation : Sounds / tʃ / and / dӡ / 3. Grammar: - Passive voice 4. Communication : - Giving advice about going on a trip.

- Writing about a historic place.

Bài tập : Teacher and students Content and board Ex 1: Find the word which has a different - Ss read silently in 5 minutes sound in the part underlined.

1.A.looked B.watched C.stopped D.carried - Ss give the answer.

2. A.bath B. father C.theater D.health - T corrects and give the answer: 3. A.study B.success C.surprise D. sugar 1D, 2B, 3D, 4D, 5A 4. A.children B.charity C.charmD.champagne 5. A.danger B.angry C.language D.passage Exercise 2: Put the words in the box into two groups Itchy, subject, sculpture, children, originate, teacher, chest, sandwich, sausage,strange, jam, / tʃ / / dӡ / cheerful.

Itchy,sculpture, subject,originate, / tʃ / / dӡ / children,teacher, sandwich,sausage, chest, cheerful. strange, jam, - Ss read all the words again. + Active : S + V + O Revise passive form: (?) Ss give the way to change from active into + Passive : S + be + Vpp+ by O passive.

Be : is/ are/ am/ was/ were Vpp Ved V3 Don’t use : by people, by them, by every... (?) Ss find S, V, O in each sentence 19

Hai An Secondary school Ex 3: Turn these sentences into passive voice.

1. My father waters these flower trees every morning.

2. John invited Liona to his birthday party last night 3. Her mother is preparing the dinner in the kitchen.

4. We should clean our teeth twice a day.

5. Our teachers give us a free period this Saturday to prepare the festival.

(Class 7A) Ex 4: Turn these sentences into active voice.

1. Another accident was caused on this road this afternoon.

2. Tom was given a new bike yesterday afternoon by his parents.

3. The secretary wasn’t phoned this morning by the manager.

4. Was this beautiful dress bought by Mary?

5. Which pictures were chosen to send your sister on her birthday ? * Homework - Revise Passive form.

- Do ex 5.

Ex 5: Rewite sentences using the passive voice.

1. I want him to repair my car.

2. People don’t expect the police to find out the stolen car.

3. She suggests drinking beer at the party.

4. Don’t leave him alone, Mum! 5. We get him to look after our house when we are on business.

English lesson plan for grade 7 - Ss read silently and give the answer.

- T corrects and give the answer: 1. These flower trees are watered every morning.

2. Liona was invited to John’s birthday party by him last night 3. the dinner is being prepared in the kitchen by her mother.

4. our teeth should be cleaned twice ...

5. We are given a free period this Saturday to prepare the festival by… (?) Ss find S, V, O in each sentence - Ss read silently the Ex - Ss give the answer.

- T corrects and give the answer: 1. They caused another accident on …

2. Tom’s parents gave him a new bike yesterday afternoon.

3. The manager didn’t phone the …

4. Did Mary buy this beautiful dress?

5. Which pictures did you choose to send your sister on her birthday ?

- Ss revise Passive form.

- Ss do this exercise at home - Answer key: 1. I want my car to be repaired by him.

2. The police aren’t expected to find out the stolen car.

3. She suggests beer should be drunk at the party.

4. Don’t let him be left alone, Mum 5. We get our to be looked after (by him) when we are on business.

* Adjustment: ………………………………………………………….………………………………… ………………..…………………………………………………………………………… …………………………..…………………………………………………………………

20

Hai An Secondary school

English lesson plan for grade 7

Ngày soạn : 29 /11 / 2017 Ngày dạy :30 /11 / 2017

Buổi 11: Revision Unit 6: The first University in VN Tiết 31+32+33: Passive voice Sounds / tʃ / and / dӡ /

I. Mục tiêu: Giúp Hs ôn tập kiến thức có trong Unit 6.

II. Kiến thức : 1.Vocabulary : Words related to: - historic places and things - Things to take on a trip.

2. Pronunciation : Sounds / tʃ / and / dӡ / 3. Grammar: - Passive voice 4. Communication : - Giving advice about going on a trip.

- Writing about a historic place.

Bài tập : Teacher and students Exercise 1: Find the word which has a different sound in the part underlined..

1. A.spring B.swimming C.think D. realize 2. A.country B.hungry C.fly D.every 3. A. why B.who C.when D. what 4. A.finished B.reported C. landed D. succeeded 5. A.celebrate B. lazy C. vacation D.mechanic Exercise 2: Correct the mistakes 1. Which time do your classes finish?

2.Our summer vacation last for about three months 3. I think we have few vacations than American pupils.

4. Our cows produce little milk than Mr.Tuan’s.

5. How much hours a day do you do your homework ?

Exercise 3: Use the past simple tense to

Content and board

Exercise 1: Find the ……..

1. D ; 2C ; 3B ; 4A ; 5D

Exercise 2:Correct the mistakes 1.which -> What 2. last -> lasts 3. Few -> fewer 4. little -> less 5. much -> many Exercise 3: Use the past simple 21

Hai An Secondary school complete the sentences.

1. I (visit) my grandparents yesterday.

2. She (buy) a lot of souvenirs last summer vacation.

3. My mother (give) me a yellow cap.

4. They (arrive) at the airport at eight o’clock this morning.

5. I ( speak) to her about my vacation.

6. Mr. Quang (teach) mathematics for many years.

7. I (see) you at the party last night.

8. The children (be) very happy on their trip to Nha Trang.

9. Minh (put) the cake on the table.

10. They (live) here two years ago.

Class 7A : Exercise 4: Rewrite the sentences.

1. My school is the same as my sister’s -> My sister’s school …………..

2. What beautiful buildings !

-> How ……..

3. What is the price of the bicycle ?

-> How much ……….

4. It isn’t necessary to finish the work to day.

-> You don’t ……..

5. Listening to music is more interesting than watching TV. -> I prefer ……… * Homework : Compete the dialogue with the words given in the box.

English lesson plan for grade 7 tense to complete the sentences.

1. visited 2. bought 3. gave 4. arrived 5. spoke 6. taught 7. saw 8. were 9. put 10. lived

Ex 4: Rewrite the sentences.

1 My sister’s school isn’t different from mine.

2. How beautiful the buildings are!

3. How much is the bicycle ?

4. You don’t have to finish the …

5. I prefer listening to music to watching TV.

Compete the dialogue with the words given in the box.

- Ss do it at home.

What about , take, never, often, energetic, portable, with, have, can, exciting.

1. often 6. what about 2. take 7. with 3. energetic 8. can 4. have 9. portable John: What do American students (1)……… do at 5. never 10. exciting recess, Kate ?

Kate: They often (2)……… part in different activities. Some (3)……… students play basketball.

John:Do they (4)……… enough time?

Kate: No. They (5)……… have time to play the 22

Hai An Secondary school whole game. They just practice scoring goals.

John: (6)……… other students?

Kate: They read, study, eat or drink, talk (7)……… friends and listen to music.

John:Listen to music ? How (8)……… they do ?

Kate: Well, they usually have (9)……… CD player with small earphones.

John:Oh. What (10)……… recess !

English lesson plan for grade 7

* Adjustment: ………………………………………………………….………………………………… ………………..…………………………………………………………………………… …………………………..…………………………………………………………………

23

Hai An Secondary school

English lesson plan for grade 7

Ngày soạn : 6 /12 / 2017 Ngày dạy : 7 /12 / 2017

Buổi 12: Tiết 34+35+36: Revision Exercise 1: Find the odd one out.

1. A. usual B. design C. version D.pleasure 2. A.musician B.official C.ocean D.concerto 3. A. question B.tradition C.exhibition D. action 4. A.exposure B.ensure C. treasure D. closure 5. A. machine B. chef C. chorus D. brochure 6.A. camping B.recycle C. vacuum D. community 7.A. giant B. target C. finher D.garbage 8. A.chemist B. school C. chance D. chaos 9. A. frog B. drag C. page D. mug 10.A.kite B. cookie C. hike D. knit Exercise 2: Match the verbs in A with the phrases in B A 1NguyenDu 2.BuiXuanPhai 3. Thu Hien 4.TrinhCongSon 5.PhamThiThanh 6. Tra Giang

B a. painter b. singer c. actress d.poet e. musician f.drama director

Exercise 3: rewtite 1. plays are usually longer than films( not as….as) 2. the painting is bigger than the photograph(not as…..as) 3. This picture is the same as the picture in our room ( not different from) 4. This film is more interesting than the one we saw last week(not as……..as) 5. The journey was shorter than we thought at first(not as…….as) Exercise 4:Rewrite the sentences, keeping the meaning as the first given 1. the tickets to the show are very expensive for us - The tickets to the show cost-----------------2. Kkanh is a better painter than Giang 24

Hai An Secondary school English lesson plan for grade 7 Giang isn’t_____________________ 3. Charle Dickens’ novel is very interesting to children -Children find________________________ -Charle Dickens’ novel_________________ - Children are_______________________ 4. her book is not the same as mine.

Her book is_____________________ 5. We can get to the art gallery in hafh an hour - It only_____________________________ 6. I like pop music but my brother likes rock music.

My taste in music _________ my brother’s.

7. Neither Mary nor her sister studied Arts at school(either) Mary never studied Arts at school and……

8. I think Vinh acted better than Quang in that play I think Quang didn’t …………………

9.Khanh is a better painter than Giang Giang can’t_____________________ 10. Both Anna and her brother are fond of watching water puppet (too) Anna is fond of fond of watching water puppet and________________ 11.My hobby is drawing and john’s hobby is also drawing. (same) My hobby_______________________ Exercise 5:Use the words/ phrases below to write complete sentences 1.my friends / enjoy / children’s painting / I/ too.

2. perfomace / she / give / last night / marvellous.

3. each / my three sisters/ be / very different/ the others.

4. the children / rehearse / play / school/ celebration / moment.

5. painting / he / make/ recently / much / same / old one.

Exercise 6: put the correct form of verbs 1.Mr and Mrs. Phuong (offer) ……………....free for the poor in ha Noi so far 2. We (clean)……………up all the dirty streets last Sunday.

3. You ever (recycle)…………..things such bottles and paper.

4. My sister (tutor)……………..children from poor family.

5. you (PROVIDE) …………….evening classes for sixty children last summer.

6. I think Mr. Quang (donate)…………… blood several times.

7. Tom (participate)………….in “Green Summer” programme before.

8. They(not start)…………community garden project in 2012 9. your friends (sing)…………..for the elderly people twice a week.

10. The children(not finish) ………….paint the mural over graffiti yet?

Exercise 7: choose the correct answer A,B,C or D to finish the sentences 1. We often organise concerts to ……….funds for poor children. a. donate B. raise c. volunteers d. grow 25

Hai An Secondary school English lesson plan for grade 7 2. The Vietnamese have had the……….. of helping one another since the early days of the country. a. custom b. legend c. tradition d. religion 3. A volunteer always helps other people willingly and…………payment a. for b. within c. about d. without 4. Community service is the work we do for the ………of the community. a. benefits b. forces c. problems d. events 5. You can volunteer by……children from poor families in your community. a. talking b. singing c. encouraging d. tutoring 6. They ……..coupons for free chicken noodle soup for the poor since last week.

A. offer b. offered c. have offered d. will offer 7. It’s a pity that I………. “ Green Summer” programme last year. a. don’t join b. didn’t join c. won’t join d. haven’t joined 8. We’ve cleaned up the lake………..it is full of rubbish. a. so b. therefore b.

Exercise 8 :Put the words or the phrases in right order to make sentences.

1. enough / Jane / stay / to / alone / old / isn’t / at home.

2. you / going / to / are / what/ do /next / weekend/ 3. She/ hair / black / has / long / straight .

4. in the East/ rises / sun / the / in /the West/ sets/ and.

5. table / large / was / in the kitchen / there/ a /wooden / round.

6. have / money / buy / that / we / enough / to / didn’t / car.

7. free / he / most /time / sports / spends / of /his / playing. * Adjustment: ………………………………………………………….………………………………… ………………..…………………………………………………………………………… …………………………..…………………………………………………………………

26

Hai An Secondary school

English lesson plan for grade 7

Ngày soạn : 19 /12 / 2017 Ngày dạy : 20 /12 / 2017

Buổi 13: Tiết 37+38+39: Revision I.Mục tiêu: Giúp Hs ôn tập kiến thức từ Unit 4 đến unit 6.

II. Kiến thức : 1.Vocabulary : Words related to: - historic places and things - Things to take on a trip.

2. Pronunciation : Sounds / tʃ / and / dӡ / 3. Grammar: - Passive voice 4. Communication : - Giving advice about going on a trip.

- Writing about a historic place.

Bài tập : Teacher and students Ex 1: Find the word which has a different sound in the part underlined.

1. A. cough B. laugh C. enough D. high 2. A. collect B. clean C. city D. cracket 3. A.pottery B. melody C. modal D. profit 4. A. near B. clear C. dear D. learn 5. A.knocked B. needed C.founded D. wanted Exercise 2: Give the correct form of the verbs: 1. We like (come) to school by bus, but we hate (stand) and (wait) in the rain.

2. We (decorate) my house last week.

(7A) 3. There is nothing like (walk) as a means of (keep) fit.

(7A) 4. The Silver medal (give) to him yesterday in the formal atmosphere by

Content and board - Ss read silently in 5 minutes - Ss give the answer.

- T corrects and give the answer: 1D, 2C, 3A, 4D, 5A

(?) Ss find out the tenses and structures in 5 sentences.

1. coming ( like + Ving) 2. decorated ( yesterday ) 3. walking – keeping 4. was given 5. was 27

Hai An Secondary school the Vice Director of the company.

5. The weather last year (be) not so cold as this year.

Exercise 3: Complete the sentences by using too and either : 1. My dog never barks, and (your dog) -> My dog never barks, and your dog doesn’t either.

2. You have to take a bath right way,and (she) 3. She’d like to join in the army, and ( he).

4. We’d rather go to school on time, and (Tom) 5. Everything is not OK, and ( this problem) 6. Nothing can prevent him from going there, and ( you) 7. Everyone knows him, and (I).

8. Nobody knew why he was absent, and (I) 9. The workers must be working very hard, and (you).

10. You’d have come, and (I).

Exercise 4:Complete the sentences by using : as … as, not as… as, different… from 1. Her daughter ………… her ( beautiful).

2. That dog ……… it looks (not dangerous) 3. Schools in Viet Nam ………… schools in the USA. (different ) 4. These trees ………… those (same) 5. His appearance ………… what I have expected. (different) * Homework : - Revise the use “too” and “neither “ - “ as … as, not as… as, different… from” - Make sentences using these structures.

English lesson plan for grade 7

(?) How to use “too” and “neither “ 2. You have to take a bath right way,and she has to, too.

3. She’d like to join in the army, and he’d like too.

4. We’d rather go to school on time, and Tom’d rather 5. Everything is not OK, and this problem isn’t either.

6. Nothing can prevent him from going there, and you can’t either.

7. Everyone knows him, and I know too.

8. Nobody knew why he was absent, and I didn’t know either.

9. The workers must be working very hard, and you must be too..

10. You’d have come, and I’d have too. (?) The meaning of “ as … as, not as… as, different… from” 1. is as beautiful as 2 is not as dangerous as.

3. are different from 4. the same as 5. is different from

* Adjustment: ………………………………………………………….………………………………… ………………..…………………………………………………………………………… …………………………..…………………………………………………………………

28

Hai An Secondary school

English lesson plan for grade 7

Exercise 10: Read the passage and answer the questions.

Long long time ago, there was a king who loved to eat fish. His love for fish was so great that he could eat almost nothing if there was no fish on the table.

It happened one year that there was no rain. Month after month , there was less and less water in the river, and less and less fish, until there was no fish at all, even for the king.

The king could not eat anything. He sent men to all the fishermenâ&#x20AC;&#x2122; villages in the country to announce that the man who brought fish to the kingâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;s table could have any reward he asked for Some time passed and a poor fisherman appeared in front of the kingâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;s palace, carrying a tremenduos fish. When the guard at the gate saw the fish, he asked the fisherman to give him. Needless to say, the fisherman did not agree and insisted on giving the fish to the king himself. The guard greeded to let him go on the condition the fisherman had to give him half of his reward.

After the fisherman met the king, the king asked him what he wanted for the reward.

Surpringly, the man asked him for a thuosand blows and he shared his reward with the guard at the gate. This gave the guard a lesson about being dishonest.

1. What was special about the king in the Tibet?

29

Hai An Secondary school

English lesson plan for grade 7

GOOD STUDENTS Exercise 3:Fill each blank with the corect form of word in the blanket1. Tra Giang is one of the most famous_____(ACT) 2. The _____she gave last night was marvelous (PERFORM) 3. the Đàn Bầu is a Vietnamese traditional _________ instrument (music) 4. I don’t like pop music because it isnot ________ as roc and roll.(EXCITE) 5. Tran Van Can is my favorite _______. He is famous for the painting ‘little sister Thuy” (ART) 6.Mai wanted to share ___ with other. (please) 7. _____ is the art of taking and processing photogaphs. (photogaph) 8.Water puppetry ____ in the villages of the Red River Delta(origin).

9. Peter has received a letter of _____ to see a water puppet show this Sunday ( INVITE).

10.I think a good knowledge of arts and music is a _______ for anyone.(NECESSARY)

30

Hai An Secondary school

English lesson plan for grade 7

1. Viết câu với both...and.../neither...nor.../either...or... a. Tom was late . So was Ann . ......................................... b. She didn't write and she didn't phone . ............................................ c. Jim is on holiday and so is Carrol. ............................................ d. John doesn't smoke and he doesn't drink . .................................................. e. Jim hasn't got a car. Carrol hasn't got a car either. .................................................. .. f. It was a very boring film . It was verry long too. .................................................. ... g. Is that the man's name Richard? Or is it Robert? It's one of the too. .................................................. .......... h. I haven't got item to go on holiday. And I haven't got the money. .................................................. ......... i. We can leave today or we can leave tomrrow- whichever you prefer. .................................................. ........ . Tom was late . So was Ann .

-> Both Tom and Ann were late b. She didn't write and she didn't phone .

31

Hai An Secondary school -> She neither write nor phone

English lesson plan for grade 7

c. Jim is on holiday and so is Carrol.

-> Both Jim and Carrol are on holiday d. John doesn't smoke and he doesn't drink .

-> Jonh neither smoke nor drink e. Jim hasn't got a car. Carrol hasn't got a car either.

-> Both Jim and Carrol have not got car f. It was a very boring film . It was verry long too.

-> It was both boring and long film g. Is that the man's name Richard? Or is it Robert? It's one of the too.

-> The men's name is either Richard or Robert h. I haven't got item to go on holiday. And I haven't got the money.

-> I haven't got both item and the money to go on holiday. i. We can leave today or we can leave tomrrow- whichever you prefer.

-> We can leave either today or tomorrow Bai 2. Hãy viết lại các câu dưới ñây bằng cách dùng liên từ trong ngoặc.

1. The chickens haven’t been fed; the pigs haven’t been fed (NEITHER…NOR&hellip - Neither the chickens nor the pigs have been fed.

2. She carried me in her arms AND she lutted me to sleep. (NOT ONLY…BUT ALSO&hellip - Not only did she carry me in her arms but also she lutted me to sleep.---> em ko biet nghia cua dong tu nay thay a?

3. You were mad OR drunk. (EITHER…OR&hellip - You were either mad or drunk.

4. You can find it in the library OR in a second-hand book shop (EITHER…OR&hellip - You can find it either in library OR in a second-hand book shop.

5. The boy is intelligent AND hardworking. (BOTH…AND&hellip - The boy is both intelligent AND hardworking.

32

Hai An Secondary school

English lesson plan for grade 7

6.Jane owns a shop. She owns a restaurant. (both ....... and) - Jane owns both a shop and a restaurant.

7. Helen likes cats. Mary likes cats. ( both ........... and) - Both Helen and Mary like cats.

8. She’s at the office. She’s at the airport. (either ............. or) - She is either at the office or at the airport.

9. Paul’s at home. Paul’s at the gym. (either .................... or) - Paul is either at home or at the gym.

10. Chris didn’t have time to take a holiday. Sheila didn’t have time to take a holiday.(neither .... nor) - Neither Chris nor Sheila has time time to take a holiday.

NEITHER he NOR his friends were seen at the meeting. * EITHER the boy OR his brothers have been there. * EITHER you OR I am to blame. * NEITHER you NOR she was wrong.

Tuy nhiên, người ta thường tránh lối ñể chủ ngữ như vậy và tách riêng chủ ngữ ra hai vế khác nhau.

Ví dụ: * EITHER you are to blame OR I am. * You were not wrong, NOR was she. . Both of.../neither of.../either of...

Khi bạn dùng both/neither/either + of, bạn luôn luôn cần thêm the.../these/those.../my/your/his/Tom’s... (.v.v.) .

Bạn không thể nói "both of restaurant". Bạn phải nói “both of the restaurants”, “both of those restaurant” v.v...: Both of these restaurants are very good.

Cả hai nhà hàng này đều rất ngon Neither of the restaurants we went to was (or were) expensive.

Không có cái nào trong số hai nhà hàng mà chúng ta đã tới là đắt cả.

I haven’t been to either of those restaurants. (= I haven’t been to one or the other) Tôi chưa tới nơi nào trong số hai nhà hàng đó.

Bạn không cần thêm of sau both. Vì thế bạn có thể nói: Both my parents are from London. hay Both of my parents...

Hai bố mẹ tôi đều là người Luân đôn.

33

Hai An Secondary school English lesson plan for grade 7 Bạn có thể dùng both of /neither of /either of + us /you /them: (talking to two people) Can either of you speak Spanish ? (nói với hai người) Một trong hai bạn nói được tiếng Tây Ban Nha chứ ?

I asked two people the way to the station but either of them knew.

Tôi hỏi hai người đường đến sân vận động nhưng cả hai đều không biết.

Bạn phải nói both of trước us/you/them (of là cần phải có) : Both of us were very tired. (không nói 'Both us were...')

Cả hai chúng tôi đều rất mệt.

Sau neither of... động từ có thể chia ở số ít hay số nhiều đều được; Neither of the children wants (hay want) to go to bed.

Không đứa nào trong bọn trẻ muốn đi ngủ cả.

C. Bạn cũng có thể dùng both/neither/either đứng một mình: I couldn’t decide which of the two shirts to buy. I like both. (hay I like both of them) Tôi đã không thể quyết định mua cái nào trong hai cái áo đó. Tôi thích cả hai.

“Is your friend British or American?”

“Neither. She’s Autralian” 'Bạn của anh là người Anh hay Mỹ ?' 'Đều không phải, Cô ấy là người úc “Do you want tea or coffee?”

“Either. I don’t mind.”

'Anh muốn trà hay cà phê?'

'Thứ nào cũng được. Tôi không bận tâm' D. Bạn có thể nói: both... and...: Both Ann and Tom were late.

Cả Ann và Tom đều đến muộn. neither...nor...:

Ghi chú: Khi chỉ có “either”/ “neither” đứng trước danh từ số ít hoặc đại từ số ít thì “either” có nghĩa là: một trong số hai đối tượng được đề cập, “neither” có nghĩa là: không có đối tượng nào trong số hai đối tượng được đề cập. Nếu nó đứng trước một danh từ ở vị trí chủ từ thì động từ theo sau phải được chia ở số ít.

VD: Either student has a book. Mỗi sinh viên có một quyễn sách.

Câu trên có nghĩa là: có hai sinh viên, mỗi người trong số hai người này có một quyển sách. Hai người hai quyển.

Neither student has a book. Không sinh viên nào có sách.

34

Hai An Secondary school English lesson plan for grade 7 Câu trên có nghĩa là: có hai sinh viên nhưng không có người nào có sách. a) EITHER & NEITHER Either tourist speaks English.

Neither umbrella is mine.

Either student is good at maths, aren’t they?

Neither person witnessed the accident, did they?

Từ những ví dụ trên chúng ta có thể rút ra những kết luận về cách dùng “either” & “neither” - Danh từ mà “either”, “neither” thêm nghĩa, không bao giờ có mạo từ “a”, “an” đứng trước, cho dù danh từ ấy là một danh từ đếm được.

-“Either”, “neither” cúng không chấp nhận mạo từ “the”, “this”, “that” hay một tính từ sở hữu nào đó.

- “Either”, “neither” chỉ thêm nghĩa cho danh từ số ít, do đó khi danh từ là chủ ngữ thì động từ ở số ít. Tuy nhiên, trong tiếng Anh hiện đại, khi danh từ ấy bao gồm cả nam lẫn nữ, thì đại từ thay thế phải ở số nhiều. Tính từ sở hữu của danh từ ấy cũng ở số nhiều: o Either student left their books behind 1) BOTH ... AND ( vừa..vừa... , cả .... lẫn..)

Ví dụ: Both Mary and Tom are students ( cả Mary lẫn Tom ñều là sinh viên) I like both aranges and apples. ( tôi thích cả cam và táo) 2) NOT ONLY ... BUT ALSO ( không những ... mà còn ... ) Công thức giống như both ..and Ví dụ: Not only Mary but also Tom likes dogs ( không những Mary mà Tom ñều thích chó ) 3) NEITHER ... NOR ( không.... cũng không..., cả 2 ñều không..)

Ví dụ: Neither Mary nor Tom likes dogs ( cả Mary lẫn Tom ñều không thích chó )

35

Hai An Secondary school English lesson plan for grade 7 4) EITHER ... OR ( hoặc là ....hoặc là ...)

Ví dụ: Either Mary or Tom likes dogs ( hoặc là Mary hoặc là Tom thích chó )

Lưu ý: Tất cả các cấu trúc trên chỉ dùng cho 2 ñối tượng.

CÁCH NỐI CÂU VỚI CÁC CẤU TRÚC TRÊN: Nguyên tắc cơ bản: Tất cả các vị trí dấu 3 chấm ( ... ) trong các cấu trúc trên ñều phải cùng loại từ với nhau.

Ví dụ: I like both dogs and cats ( danh từ - danh từ) I am both tall and fat ( tính từ - tính từ ) I not only drank some wine but also ate a cake. ( ñộng từ - ñộng từ ) Not only did I drink some wine but also I ate a cake. ( mệnh ñề mệnh ñề ) Trong câu trên khi not only ñứng ñầu câu thì phải ñảo ngữ.

Riêng trường hợp not only .... but also .... có thể có vài biến thể không tuân thủ nguyên tắc này, tuy nhiên khi các em học thì nên học cái chuẩn nhất và một khi ñã nắm vững cách dùng rồi thì mới học thêm biến thể, nếu không sẽ dễ dẫn ñến hiểu sai.

Các biến thể có thể có của not only ...but also là : Not only clause ( ñảo ngữ)...... but clause .....as well ( as well ñể ở cuối ) 36

Hai An Secondary school English lesson plan for grade 7 Not only clause ( ñảo ngữ)...... but clause..... ( chỉ dùng but mà thôi ) Not only clause ( ñảo ngữ)...... but S also V ....( chen chủ từ vào giữa ) Cách nối 2 câu: Nhìn 2 câu từ ngoài vô, nếu gặp những yếu tố nào giống nhau thì nhập lại thành một, khi gặp các chữ khác nhau thì tách ra làm hai cho vào hai vị trí .... của công thức.

Ví dụ: I like dogs. I like cats. ( both ... and...)

Nhìn 2 câu thấy có I like giống nhau nên ta gom lại thành một: => I like Tiếp ñến dogs và cats khác nhau nên ta chia ra vào 2 chỗ ( ... ) => I like both dogs and cats.

Riêng cấu trúc neither .. nor... phải bỏ not Ví dụ: I don't buy the book at that store. I don't buy the pen at this shop. ( dùng neither .. nor ... ) Thấy I don't buy nên ta gom lại ( bỏ not) : => I buy Hai ñoạn sau khác nhau ta ñặt vào 2 chỗ ( ... ) => I buy neither the book at that store nor the pen at this shop.

Nếu ngay ñầu câu mà ñã có sự khác nhau thì ta cũng chia ra ngay và ñem ñặt vào chỗ ( ... ) ñến ñoạn nào giống nhau thì ta mới gom lại.

Ví dụ: 37

Hai An Secondary school English lesson plan for grade 7 My father likes dogs. My mother likes dogs. ( both ...and ... ) Thấy từ ñầu ñã có sự khác nhau nên ta dùng ngay cấu trúc ở ñầu câu: Both my father and my mother .... Đoạn sau giống nhau ta gom lại: => Both my father and my mother like dogs.

Lưu ý về chia ñộng từ: Khi gặp both ...and ... thì ñộng từ luôn chia số nhiều.

Khi gặp either ...or..., neither ....nor..... , not only... but also ..., thì ñộng từ chia theo danh từ nào ñứng gần ñộng từ nhất g:

Noone = Neither = Either of us are wrong.

is

right. of

Either us

you are

or

me. right

---

Trần Thị Tuyết Buổi 10: Ngày soạn : 20/ 11/ 2014 Ngày dạy : 26/ 11/ 2014 Teacher and students Ex 1: Find the word which has a different sound in the part underlined.

1. A. cough B. laugh C. enough D. high 2. A. collect B. clean C. city D. cracket 3. A.pottery B. melody C. modal D. profit 4. A. near B. clear C. dear D. learn 5. A.knocked B. needed C.founded D. wanted Exercise 2: Give the correct form of the verbs: 1. We like (come) to school by bus, but we

Content and board - Ss read silently in 5 minutes - Ss give the answer.

- T corrects and give the answer: 1D, 2C, 3A, 4D, 5A

(?) Ss find out the tenses and 38

Hai An Secondary school hate (stand) and (wait) in the rain.

2. We (decorate) my house last week.

(7A) 3. There is nothing like (walk) as a means of (keep) fit.

(7A) 4. The Silver medal (give) to him yesterday in the formal atmosphere by the Vice Director of the company.

5. The weather last year (be) not so cold as this year.

Exercise 3: Complete the sentences by using too and either : 1. My dog never barks, and (your dog) -> My dog never barks, and your dog doesn’t either.

2. You have to take a bath right way,and (she) 3. She’d like to join in the army, and ( he).

4. We’d rather go to school on time, and (Tom) 5. Everything is not OK, and ( this problem) 6. Nothing can prevent him from going there, and ( you) 7. Everyone knows him, and (I).

8. Nobody knew why he was absent, and (I) 9. The workers must be working very hard, and (you).

10. You’d have come, and (I).

Exercise 4:Complete the sentences by using : as … as, not as… as, different… from 1. Her daughter ………… her ( beautiful).

2. That dog ……… it looks (not dangerous) 3. Schools in Viet Nam ………… schools in the USA. (different ) 4. These trees ………… those (same) 5. His appearance ………… what I have expected. (different) * Homework : - Revise the use “too” and “neither “ - “ as … as, not as… as, different… from” - Make sentences using these structures.

English lesson plan for grade 7 structures in 5 sentences.

1. coming ( like + Ving) 2. decorated ( yesterday ) 3. walking – keeping 4. was given 5. was

(?) How to use “too” and “neither “ 2. You have to take a bath right way,and she has to, too.

3. She’d like to join in the army, and he’d like too.

4. We’d rather go to school on time, and Tom’d rather 5. Everything is not OK, and this problem isn’t either.

6. Nothing can prevent him from going there, and you can’t either.

7. Everyone knows him, and I know too.

8. Nobody knew why he was absent, and I didn’t know either.

9. The workers must be working very hard, and you must be too..

10. You’d have come, and I’d have too. (?) The meaning of “ as … as, not as… as, different… from” 1. is as beautiful as 2 is not as dangerous as.

3. are different from 4. the same as 5. is different from

39

Hai An Secondary school

English lesson plan for grade 7

Buổi 12: Ngày soạn : 5/ 12/ 2014 40

Hai An Secondary school

Teacher and students Ex 1: Find the odd A,B,C or D. 1.A. meal B. breakfast C. lunch D. dinner 2.A.lemonade B. soda C.orange juice D.bread 3. A.meat B.milk C.egg D. fish 4. A.sour B.sweet C.bitter D.cook 5. A.pork B.pancake C.beef D.chicken Exercise 2: Put the words in the box into groups apple, banana, bean, bread, cabbage, chicken, coffee, grape, lemonade, lettuce, meat, milk, noodles, onion, orange, pea, pear, rice, soda, tea fruit vegetables drinks other

English lesson plan for grade 7 Ngày dạy : 7A: 12/ 12 / 2014 7B : 10/ 12/ 2014 Content and board - Ss read silently in 5 minutes - Ss give the answer.

- T corrects and give the answer: 1A, 2D, 3B, 4D, 5B

- Ss find out the meaning of the words fruit Apple Banana grape orange pear

vegetables Bean Cabbage Lettuce Onion pea

drinks Coffee Lemonade Tea soda

Other Chicken Bread Meat Noodles Rice

- Ss add some more .

Ex 3: a/ an/ some/ any ?

1. There’s ….. eraser in the box.

2. We have ….. friends. Do we have ….. beer in the fridge.

3. Is there …… telephone in your room ?

4. Would you like ….. help ?

5. I want to buy ……. ink-pot.

6. I want to make ….. sandwiches, but we don’t have …. bread.

7. Excuse me, do you have …. Pencils ?

- No, I’m sorry. We have …. pens over there, but we don’t have …. pencils. .

8. Take ….. umbrella with you in case it rains.

9. I’m tired I want …. cup of cold water .

10. I’d like first .. girl and then …. boys.

(?) How to use a/ an/ some/ any ?

- a/ an + singular nouns - some/ any + plural nouns.

Some : (+) Any: (-); (?)

- Ss read silently the Ex - Ss give the answer.

- T corrects and give the answer: 1. an 6. some-any 2. some - any 7. any-some-any 3. a 8. a 4. some 9. a 5. an 10. a-some

41

Hai An Secondary school Ex 4: Supply the correct verb form.

1. I(not be) hungry. I (not want) any rice.

2. Wait! Miss Mai (have) breakfast.

3. There (be) any oranges?

- Yes, there (be) one.

4. your sister (like) lemonade?

5. My mother (cook) in the kitchen at the moment. She likes(cook) very much.

6. They are tired and they’d like (have) a rest.

7. you (write) the essay yet?

- Yes. I (write) it yesterday.

8. Minh’s sister (fly) to Da Nang tomorrow.

English lesson plan for grade 7

- Answer key: 1. am not / don’t want 2. is having 3. Are there / is 4. Does …. Like 5. is cooking / cooking 6. to have 7. Have … written/ wrote 8. will fly

- Ss do this exercise at home * Homework - Revise the way to use how much/ how many; a/an; some/ any.

- Make sentences with how much/ how many; a/an; some/ any. * Adjustment: ………………………………………………………….………………………………… ………………..…………………………………………………………………………… …………………………..………………………………………………………………… ……………………………………….…………

Buổi 15 + 16: Revision Unit 7: Traffic I. Mục tiêu: Giúp Hs ôn tập kiến thức có trong Unit 7.

42

Hai An Secondary school English lesson plan for grade 7 II. Kiến thức : 1.Vocabulary : Words related to: - Means of transport - Road signs.

2. Pronunciation : Sounds / e / and / eI / 3. Grammar: - It indicating distance - Used to 4. Communication : - Talking about road signs and traffic rules.

- Talking about traffic problems.

Bài tập : Buổi 15: Ngày soạn : 10/ 1/ 2015 Ngày dạy : 7A: 16/ 1 / 2015- 7B : 14/ 1/ 2015 Content and board Teacher and students Ex 1: Find the word which has a different - Ss read silently in 5 minutes sound in the part underlined.

1.A.traffic B.pavement C.plane D.station - Ss give the answer.

2. A.recycle B.vehicle C.helicopter D.reverse - T corrects and give the answer: 3. A.railway B.mail C.sail D. captain 1A, 2C, 3D, 4B, 5A 4. A.sign B.mistake C.triangle D.drive 5. A.nearest B.head C.bread D.health Ex 2: Put the words in the box into 2 groups safety, way, internet, red, ahead, melody, wait, break, lane, bed. / eI / /e/ /e/ / eI / internet, red,bed safety, lane ahead, melody way, wait,break - Ss read all the words again.

Revision: * Ask and answer about distance

(?) How far is it from A to B ?

It’s (about) .. metres / kilometer….

* Used to …

Ss give the way to use and the form of used to

(+) S + used to + V(infi) (-) S + didn’t use to +V(infi) (?) Did S use to +V(infi)?

1. It’s about 30 km from my town to Ha Long Bay. 2. My family used to go on holiday to the seaside in the summer.

3. How long does it take you from Ha Noi to Sa Pa.

Ex 3: Make up sentences using the words and phrases given.

Ex: We/ used/ school/ on/ foot -> We used to go to school on foot 1. about/ 30 km/ my town/ Ha Long Bay. 2. My family/used/go/holiday/ seaside/ summer

43

Hai An Secondary school English lesson plan for grade 7 4. There used to be a factory in the 3. how/ long/ it/ take/ you/ Ha Noi/ Sapa?.

4. there/ used/ be/ a/ factory/ town centre/ but/ it/ town centre but it has been moved to the suburbs move/ the/ suburbs.

5. You must learn about road safety 5. you/ must/ learn/ about/ road safety/ before/ before riding your bike on the road. riding/ your/ bike/ road.

(Class 7A) Ex 4: Rewrite the following - Ss give the answer. sentences so that their meaning stays the - T corrects same, using the word given.

1. The distance from my house to school is about 1. It’s about 500 metres from my house to school.

500 metres. (it).

2. My father went used to work by 2. My father went to work by car some years car , but now he goes by bus. ago, but now he goes by bus ( used to ).

3. Don’t drive too fast or you’ll have an accident. 3. If you drive too fast or you ‘ll have an accident. ( If ).

4. Can we go to Sa Pa by motorbike ?

4.Is it possible to go to Sa Pa by motorbike?(Can) 5. My mother drives carefully.

5. My mother is a careful driver. ( drives ) * Homework - Make sentences using “used to”.

- Make sentences using “used to” - Do ex 5. and do ex 5.

Ex 5: Make dialogues.

1.

Ex : 0. your house / school / 3km / go / bicycle. S1 : How far is it from Ms.Nga’s S1 : How far is it from your house to school ? house to the hospital ?

S2 : It’s three kilometers.

S2 : It’s 10 kilometers.

S1 : How do you go to school ?

S1 : How does she go to the hospital?

S2 : I go by bicycle.

S2 : I go by motorbike.

1. Ms. Nga’s house / hospital / 10km / travel / 2. motorbike.

S1 : How far is it from your house to 2. Your house / university / 400m / walk. the university ?

3. Ly and Lan’s house/uncle’s farm/ 5km / cycle S2 : It’s 400 kilometers.

4. Mirs. Chi’s town / Ho Chi Minh City / over S1 : How do you go to the university?

1,000km / there / plane.

S2 : I walk.

5. Mr. Thanh’s house / factory /16km /car. * Adjustment: ………………………………………………………….………………………………… ………………..…………………………………………………………………………… …………………………..…………………………………………………………………

44

Hai An Secondary school ……………………………………….…………

English lesson plan for grade 7

Ngày 12 , tháng 1 , 2015 Tổ trưởng

Trần Thị Tuyết Ngày soạn : 17/ 1/ 2015 Ngày dạy : 7A: 28/ 1 / 2015- 7B : 23/ 1/ 2015 Buổi 16: Teacher and students

Content and board

Ex 1: Find the odd one out.

1.A.riding B.driving C.gardening D.flying 2. A.no cycling B.no parking C.no right turn D.sign 3. A.train B.plane C.car D. sail 4. A.by car B.on foot C.by bus D.by bicycle 5. A.rule B.ride C.reverse D.drive

- Ss read silently in 5 minutes to find the meaning of the words - Ss give the answer.

- T corrects and give the answer: 1C, 2D, 3D, 4B, 5A

Ex 2: Choose the correct option A,B,C or D 1.Nam used to ………. his homework late in the evening.

- Ss read silently to find the answer A.does B. do C.doing D.did - Ss give their answer and explanation 2. If people ………. the rules, there are no more - T corrects and give the answer: accidents 1C, 2C, 3B, 4D, 5D A. follow B.take care of C.obey D.remember 6A, 7C, 8B, 9C, 10D 3. you should ………. right and left when you go across the roads.

A.see B.look C.be D.take 4. Hurry up or we can’t ………. the last bus home A.keep B.follow C. go D.catch 5. Lan used to go to school ……….

A.with bicycle B.by foot C.in car D.by bus 6. Public ………. in my town is good and cheap.

45

Hai An Secondary school English lesson plan for grade 7 A.transport B.tour C. journey D.travel 7. ………. is not very far from here to the city center.

A. That B. This C.It D.There 8. When there is a traffic jam, it ………. me a very long time to go home.

A.costs B.takes C.lasts D.spends 9. Mai’s dad usually drives her to school ………. her school is very far from her house.

A.but B.though C.because D.or 10. Yesterday Hoa and Lan ………. round West Lake. It took them an hour.

A.cycle B.cycles C.cycling D.cycled Ex 3:Fill each blank with a word from the box - Ss give the meaning of the words in the box. vehicles across did ride feels - Ss do the ex individually. break it rules accidents after - some Ss give the answer - T correct and give the answer.

1. What ………… you do last Sunday ?

1. did 2. after 3. break 2. I stayed at home and looked ………… my 4. rules 5. it 6. ride younger brother yesterday.

7. accident 8. vehicles 3. Does your bike ever ………… down on the 9. feels 10. across. way to school ?

4. We must always obey traffic ………… for our safety.

5. How far is ………… from your house to the bus stop?

6. He used to ………… a tricycle when he was three years old.

7. Now there are more traffic ………… than there used to be in this city.

8. There did not use to be many ………… on the roads in my home town.

9. He lives in a small village in the mountains so he never ………… worried about traffic jams 10. You should remember to walk ………… the streets at the rebra crossings.

For class 7A: Ex 4. Compare what Tommy said five years ago and what he says today ( Hãy so sánh những gì Tommy đã nói cách đây 5 năm với những gì anh ta nói ngày nay ): 46

Hai An Secondary school FIVE YEARS AGO I travel a lot. / I play the piano. / I’m very lazy./ I don’t like cheese. / I’ve got a dog. / I’m a hotel receptionist. / I’ve got lot of friends. / I never read newspapers. / I don’t drink tea. / I go to a lot of parties.

TODAY I eat lots of cheese now. / I work very hard these days. / I don’t know many people these days. / I work in a bookshop now. / I don’t go away much these days. / My dog died two years ago. / I read a newspaper every day now. / I haven’t been to a party for ages. / I haven’t played the piano for years. / Tea’s great! I like it now.

Now write sentences about how Tommy has changed. Use “used to / didn’t use to / never used to” in the first part of your sentence.

1. He used to travel a lot but she doesn’t go away much these days.

2. He ………… but …………….

3. He…………..but …………….

4. He ………… but ………….....

5. He ………….but …………….

6. He ………….but……………...

7. He ………….but………………

8. He ………….but………………

9. He ………….but………………

10.He…………..but……………… * Homework: Revision: Used to Ex 5: Write sentences about Kaka with “used to” and “didn’t use to” Ex: 1. ( He stopped studying hard ) He used to study hard.

2. ( He started smoking ) He didn’t use to smoke.

3. He stopped going to bed early 4. He started going out in the evening 5. He stopped running three miles every morning 6. He started spending a lot of money 7. He stopped reading books

English lesson plan for grade 7 1.He used to play the piano but He don’t play any more.

2.He used to very lazy now he works very hard.

3. He used to have got a lot of friends but now he doesn’t know many people.

- Ss Revise used to and do ex 5 at home. (+) S + used to + V(infi) (-) S + didn’t use to +V(infi) (?) Did S use to +V(infi)?

3. He used to go to bed.

4. He didn’t use to go out ….evening.

5. He used to run three ….morning.

47

Hai An Secondary school 8. He started playing computer games 9. He stopped listening to the radio 10. He started watching films

English lesson plan for grade 7 6. He didn’t used to spend a lot ….

* Adjustment: ………………………………………………………….………………………………… ………………..…………………………………………………………………………… …………………………..………………………………………………………………… ……………………………………….…………

Ngày 19 tháng 1 năm 2015 Tổ trưởng

Trần Thị Tuyết

Buổi 17 + 18: Revision Unit 8: Films I. Mục tiêu: Giúp Hs ôn tập kiến thức có trong Unit 8 vơi chủ đề về phim.

II. Kiến thức : 1.Vocabulary : Words related to: - Types of films - ed and ing adjectives.

2. Pronunciation : Sounds / t / , /d/ and / id / 3. Grammar: - connectors: although, desspite/ in spite of, however, nevertheless 4. Communication : - Talking about fovourite films.

- Asking and answering questions about film posters.

Bài tập : Buổi 17: Ngày soạn : 27/ 1/ 2015 Ngày dạy : 7A: 30/ 1 / 2015- 7B : 4/ 2/ 2015 Teacher and students Content and board - Correct answer: Checking homework: - Ss come to the bord and do homework exercise 3. He used to go to bed.

48

Hai An Secondary school that they did at home:

Revise how to read “ed” Ex 1: Put the words in the box into 2 groups acted, walked, washed, waited, lived, watched, terrified, needed, bored, departed, amazed, brushed, cleaned, danced, disappointed. /t/ /d/ /id/

English lesson plan for grade 7 4. He didn’t use to go out ….evening.

5. He used to run three ….morning.

6. He didn’t used to spend a lot …. /t/ after an unvoiced consonant Ex: washed, matched… /d/ after a voiced vowel or voiced consonant Ex: filled, stayed…. /id/ after the sound /t/ or /d/ Ex: wanted, needed /t/ walked, washed watched brushed danced

/d/ terrified, bored cleaned amazed lived

/id/ acted waited needed departed disappointed

- Ss practice reading these words again Ex 2: Find the word which has a different sound in the part underlined.

1.A.animation B.female C.safely D.pavement 2. A.critic B.direct C.illegal D.sign 3. A.recommentB.seatbeltC.vehicleD.investigate 4. A.cooked B.booked C.talked D.naked 5. A.opened B.played C.wanted D.filled

- Ss read silently in 5 minutes - Ss give the answer.

- T corrects and give the answer: 1A, 2D, 3C, 4D, 5C

* Revision: ing and ed adjectives

We can form adjectives by adding “ed” or “ing” endings to some verbs.

- We used “ed” adj to describe someone’s feelings.

- We used “ing” adj to describethings or people ( that cause the feelings ) - Ss do Ex 3.

- correct answer: 1. disappointed 2. interested 3. exciting

Ex 3. Choose the correct word : 1. She was disappointing / disappointed with the play. She had expected it to be better.

2. Is he interesting / interested in tennis?

3. The volleyball match was quite exciting / excited. We enjoyed it.

4. Is it sometimes embarrassing / embarrassed when you have to ask people for money.

- Ss practice reading these words again

49

Hai An Secondary school 5. Do you easily get embarrassing/embarrassed ?

6. Mr Ba had never expected to het the job. He was really amazing / amazed whne he was offered it.

7. Trinh was really learnt very fast. She has made astonishing / astonished progress.

8. We didn’t find the situation funny. We were no amusing / amused.

9. It was really terrifying / terrified experience.

Afterwards everyone was shocking/shocked.

10. Why does she always look so boring /bored ?

Is her life really boring/bored ?

Ex for Class 7A: Make up sentences using the words and phrases given.

Ex: Titanic / moving film Titanic is a moving film.

1. Mickey mouse/ my/ favourite/ character/ cartoons.

2. there / various/ kinds/ films/ such/ as/ science/ fiction/ horror/ romantic/ comedy/ thriller.

3. audience/ was/ irritated/by/ delay/performance 4. We/ all/ amused/ by/ his/ funny/ stories.

5. this/ film/ tells/ exciting/ story/ about/ murder.

Homework: Write the correct tense of the verbs in parentheses: 1. What you (do) ………………..next week?

2. Our roommates (travel) ..…..to Tokyo next June.

3. The girl (learn) ….. Chemistry at the moment.

4. What the officers (do)……………..now?

5. If he (not get) ………up early, he (be) ……. late for school.

6. Would you please (bring) ……me a cup of milk tea?

7. The girl wants (buy) .... a few pens and pencils.

8. What should we (do) ………..in the evening.

9. You may (stay) ……….at home on weekends.

10. We (get) ….good marks if we (study)…hard.

English lesson plan for grade 7 4. embarrassing 5. embararrsed 6. amazed 7. astonishing 8. amused 9. terrifying 10. bored, boring

- Ss make sentences individually - T corrects and give the correct answer: 1. Mickey mouse is my favourite character in cartoons.

2. there are various kindsof films such as science fiction, horror, romantic comedy and thriller. ……..

- Ss do ex at home _ answer key: 1. will…do 2. will travel 3. are learning 4. are…doing 5. doesn’t get / will be 6. bring 7. to buy 8. do 9. stay 10. will (shall) get / study

50

Hai An Secondary school English lesson plan for grade 7 * Adjustment: ………………………………………………………….………………………………… ………………..…………………………………………………………………………… …………………………..………………………………………………………………… ……………………………………….…………

Ex 1: Put the words in the box into 2 groups acted, walked, washed, waited, lived, watched, terrified, needed, bored, departed, amazed, brushed, cleaned, danced, disappointed. /t/ /d/ /id/

Ex 2: Find the word which has a different sound in the part underlined.

1.A.animation B.female C.safely D.pavement 2. A.critic B.direct C.illegal D.sign 3. A.recommentB.seatbeltC.vehicleD.investigate 4. A.cooked B.booked C.talked D.naked 5. A.opened B.played C.wanted D.filled * Revision: ing and ed adjectives Ex 3. Choose the correct word : 51

Hai An Secondary school English lesson plan for grade 7 1. She was disappointing / disappointed with the play. She had expected it to be better.

2. Is he interesting / interested in tennis?

3. The volleyball match was quite exciting / excited. We enjoyed it.

4. Is it sometimes embarrassing / embarrassed when you have to ask people for money.

5. Do you easily get embarrassing/embarrassed ?

6. Mr Ba had never expected to het the job. He was really amazing / amazed whne he was offered it.

7. Trinh was really learnt very fast. She has made astonishing / astonished progress.

8. We didn’t find the situation funny. We were no amusing / amused.

9. It was really terrifying / terrified experience. Afterwards everyone was shocking/shocked.

10. Why does she always look so boring /bored ? Is her life really boring/bored ?

Ex for Class 7A: Make up sentences using the words and phrases given.

Ex: Titanic / moving film Titanic is a moving film.

1. Mickey mouse/ my/ favourite/ character/ cartoons.

2. there / various/ kinds/ films/ such/ as/ science/ fiction/ horror/ romantic/ comedy/ thriller.

3. audience/ was/ irritated/by/ delay/performance 4. We/ all/ amused/ by/ his/ funny/ stories.

5. this/ film/ tells/ exciting/ story/ about/ murder.

Homework: Write the correct tense of the verbs in parentheses: 1. What you (do) ………………..next week?

2. Our roommates (travel) ..…..to Tokyo next June.

3. The girl (learn) ….. Chemistry at the moment.

4. What the officers (do)……………..now?

5. If he (not get) ………up early, he (be) ……. late for school.

6. Would you please (bring) ……me a cup of milk tea?

7. The girl wants (buy) .... a few pens and pencils.

8. What should we (do) ………..in the evening.

9. You may (stay) ……….at home on weekends.

10. We (get) ….good marks if we (study)…hard.

Rewrite the following sentences so that their meaning stays the same, using the words given.

1. This film made a strong impression on me. ( impressed ) 2. Horror films terrify my younger sister. (terrified) 3. His new film is really surprising me. (surprised) 4. I found the film exciting. ( excited ) 5. The film bored us so we left halfway through it. ( boring ) 52

Hai An Secondary school

English lesson plan for grade 7

Buổi 18: Ngày soạn : 30/ 1/ 2015 Ngày dạy : 7A: 5/ 2 / 2015- 7B : 11/ 2/ 2015 Teacher and students Checking homework: - Ss come to the bord and do homework exercise that they did at home:

Content and board - Correct answer: 1. will…do 2. will travel 3. are learning 4. are…doing 5. doesn’t get / will be 6. bring 7. to buy 8. do 9. stay 10. will (shall) get / study

Revise how to read “ed”

/t/ after an unvoiced consonant Ex: washed, matched… /d/ after a voiced vowel or voiced consonant Ex: filled, stayed…. /id/ after the sound /t/ or /d/ Ex: wanted, needed 53

Hai An Secondary school Ex 1: Put the words in the box into 3 groups brushed changed ironed rented needed combed filled touched neglected talked stopped fixed decided laughed showered /id/

/t/

/d/

Ex 2: Find the odd one out A,B,C or D 1.A.cinema B.comedy C.film D.cartoon 2. A.actor B.actress C.character D.audience 3. A.frightening B.exciting C.terrifying D.entertaining 4. A.documentary B.romantic C.science fiction D.animation 5. A.enjoy B.like C.feeling D.annoy

English lesson plan for grade 7 - Ss read the words silently and put them in correct column.

- Some Ss read aloud and give the answer.

- correct answer: /id/ /t/ /d/ rented changed brushed needed touched ironed neglected talked,fixed combed decided stopped filled laughed showered

- Ss practice reading these words again - Ss read silently in 5 minutes - Ss give the answer.

- T corrects and give the answer: 1A, 2D, 3D, 4B, 5C - Ss practice reading these words again

* Revision: ing and ed adjectives

Ex 3. Complete the sentences using one of the words in the list: confusing / confused, disgusting / disgusted, exciting / excited, amusing/amused, annoying / annoyed, boring / bored, exhausting / exhausted, interesting / interested, surprising / surprised.

1. Daisy works very hard. It ‘s not ………that she always tired.

2. Mai’s got nothing to do. She’s ………. .

3. Our teacher’s explanation was ………… .

Most of us didn’t understand it.

4. Your room hadn’t been cleaned for ages. It was really ……….. .

5. They seldom visit art galleries. They’re not

We can form adjectives by adding “ed” or “ing” endings to some verbs.

- We used “ed” adj to describe someone’s feelings.

- We used “ing” adj to describethings or people ( that cause the feelings ) - Ss do Ex 3.

- correct answer: 1. surprising 2. bored 3. confusing 4. disgusting 5. interested 6. annoyed 7. boring 8. interested 9. exhausted 10. excited 54

Hai An Secondary school particularly ………….in art.

6. There’s no need to get ………only because I’m a few minutes late.

7. His lecture was ……….. . We fell asleep.

8. I asked Anna if she wanted to come out with me but she wasn’t …….. .

9. Sheva’s been working very hard all day and now he’s ………. .

10. David’s starting a new job next week. He’s quite …….about it.

Ex 4: ( Class 7A) Fill each blank with a word from the box amazing, relaxed, fantastic, films, successful, cinema, awards, section, boring, interested

English lesson plan for grade 7

- Ss make sentences individually - T corrects and give the correct answer: 1. Mickey mouse is my favourite character in cartoons.

2. there are various kindsof films such as science fiction, horror, romantic comedy and thriller. ……..

- Ss think the meaning of the words.

1. All the cristics said the film was 1. boring really……… . Nevertheless, I was so interested 2. amazing that I saw it from beginning to end.

3. interested 2. Avatar is a big hit-the special effects are…… 4. successful 5. films 3. I am very……… in watching TV late on 6. cinema Saturday evenings.

7. fantastic 4. Kirsten Dunst’s most ……… films are the 8. relaxed Spiderman films.

9. awards 5.What type of ……… do you like, Peter ?

10. section 6. Have you been to the ……… lately ?

7. Spiderman 2 has a lot of ……… action scenes 8. I feel very………when I see romantic comedy.

9. His film has won a lot of ………

10. If you want to know which films are on at the cinemas, you should look at the film ……… of this magazine.

Ex 5: ( Class 7A) Rewrite the following sentences so that their - answer key: 1. I was strongly impressed by the film. meaning stays the same, using the words 2. My younger sister is terrified of given. horror film.

1. This film made a strong impression on me.

3. I am surprised at his new film. ( impressed ) 4. I was excited about the film 2. Horror films terrify my younger sister.

5. The film was boring so we left (terrified) 55

Hai An Secondary school English lesson plan for grade 7 3. His new film is really surprising me. halfway throught it. (surprised) 4. I found the film exciting. ( excited ) 5. The film bored us so we left halfway through it. ( boring ) * Homework: - Revise the way to read “ed” - Redo the exercises above. * Adjustment: ………………………………………………………….………………………………… ………………..…………………………………………………………………………… …………………………..………………………………………………………………… ……………………………………….…………

Ngày 2 tháng 2 năm 2015 Tổ trưởng

Trần Thị Tuyết

Ngày soạn : 8/ 2 / 2015 Ngày dạy : 7A: 12/ 2 / 2015- 7B : 4/ 3/ 2015 Buổi 19: Revision I. Objectives : Revise what Ss learnt in units 7,8 II. Language content: 1.Vocabulary : Words related to: - Means of transport 56

Hai An Secondary school English lesson plan for grade 7 - Road signs.

- Types of films - ed and ing adjectives.

2. Pronunciation : Sounds / e / and / eI / Sounds / t / , /d/ and / id / 3. Grammar: - It indicating distance - Used to - connectors: although, desspite/ in spite of, however, nevertheless 4. Communication : - Talking about road signs and traffic rules.

- Talking about traffic problems.

- Talking about fovourite films.

- Asking and answering questions about film posters.

III. Practice: Teacher and students Content Exercise 1: Find 5 words which have sound / - Ss rethink and find the words.

Ex: head, dealth…. e / and 5 words which have sound / eI /. sail, train …..

- Ss come to the board and write the words - T checks and helps Ss read the words correctly. /t/ after an unvoiced consonant Ex: laughed, mixed… /d/ after a voiced vowel or voiced consonant Ex: travelled, enjoyed…. /id/ after the sound /t/ or /d/ Ex: wanted, needed Exercise 2 : Find 5 words which have sound - Ss rethink and find the words which have ending with “ed” and the way to / t / , 5 words which have sound / d / and 5 read them. words which have sound / Id /.

- Revise the way to ask and answer about the (?) How far is it from … to … ?

It’s (sbout) …. metre/ km distance * Revise the way to read “ed”

Exercise 3: Ask and answer about distance using the given words.

1. Thanh Hoa / Ha Noi - 158 km

1. How far is it from Thanh Hoa to Ha Noi? - It’s (about) 158 km 57

Hai An Secondary school 2. Ham Rong bridge/Hop Luc Hospital2km 3. BigC supermarket/ Sam Son- 8km

English lesson plan for grade 7 2. How far is it from Ham Rong bridge to Hop Luc Hospital?

- It’s (about) 2km 3. How far is it from BigC supermarket to Sam Son? - It’s (about) 8 km

* Revise the usage of although, desspite/ in spite of, however, nevertheless.

Exercise 4: Choose the best answer to complete these sentences.

1. ___ he likes chocolate, he tries not to eat it.

A. As B .Though C. Since D. Despite 2. He is a very intelligent boy, __he is very lazy A. but B. And C. or D. so 3. _______I moved house, I haven’t had much contact with those friends A. though B. since C. because of D. so that 4. Last night we came to the show late _______ the traffic was terrible.

A. although B. despite C. and D. because 5.Lan couldn’t pass the exam__she was too lazy.

A. because B. because of C. although D. in spite of 6. _______ his broken leg, he didn’t come to class yesterday.

A. because B. because of C. Despite D. so 7. _______there is a lot of noise in the city, I prefer living there.

A. despite B. in spite of C. because of D. though 8. _______ the weather, we went sailing.

A.despite B.in spite of C.although D.A and B

- Ss do exercises - Correct answer: 1B 6B 2A 7D 3B …

4D 5A

58

Hai An Secondary school 9. _______Hudson led early, he lost the race.

A. though B. although C. eventhough D. all are correct 10.___it was raining heavily he went out without a raincoat.

A. In spite B. In spite of C. However D. Although ( For class 7A ) Exercise 5: Rewrite the sentences with the word given.

1. Although he has a very important job, he isn’t particularly well-paid. =>In spite of ..........

2. Although I had never seen her before, I recognized her from a photograph. => Despite ...........

3. She wasn’t wearing the coat although it was quite cold. =>In spite of ............

4.We thought we’d better invite them to the party although we don’t like them very much => Despite ..........

5. Although I didn’t speak the language, I managed to make myself understand. =>In spite of

English lesson plan for grade 7

- Ss do exercises - Correct answer: 1. In spite of having a…job, he….

2. Despite the fact that I had never ….

3. In spite of cold weather she wasn’t ….

- Redo all exercises

* Homework * Adjustment: ………………………………………………………….………………………………… ………………..…………………………………………………………………………… …………………………..………………………………………………………………… ……………………………………….…………

Ngày 9 tháng 2 năm 2015 Tổ trưởng 59

Hai An Secondary school

English lesson plan for grade 7 Trần Thị Tuyết

Buổi 20: Revision Unit 9: Festivals around the world I. Mục tiêu: Giúp Hs ôn tập kiến thức có trong Unit 9 vơi chủ đề về lễ hội.

II. Kiến thức : 1.Vocabulary : Words related to: - Types of festivals - Festival activitives.

2. Pronunciation : Stress in two-syllable words 3. Grammar: - H/Wh-questions - Adverbial phrases 4. Communication : - Describing festival.

- Asking and answering questions about fesivals.

Bài tập : Buổi 20: Ngày soạn : 28/ 2 / 2015 Ngày dạy : 7A: 6/ 3 / 2015- 7B :11 / 3/ 2015 T and Ss’activities Ex 1: Put the words in the box into 2 groups.

Agree, people, listen, receive, enjoy, perform, polite, season, harvest, poster Stress on 1st syllable

Stress on 1st syllable

Content - Ss read and rethink about the rules of stress in two-syllable words.

- Give the answer: Stress on 1st syllable People, listen, season, harvest, poster

Stress on 1st syllable Agree, receive, enjoy, perform, polite

Ex 2: Find the odd one out A,B,C or D 60

Hai An Secondary school 1.A.happy B. funny C. joyful D. prefer 2.A.fascinating B. shopping C. exciting D. amazing 3. A.attend B.celebrate C.organize D. held 4. A.celebration B.performer C.artist D.dancer 5. A. festival B. cultural C. traditional D. local ( 7A )Ex 3: Fill each blank with a word from the box.

English lesson plan for grade 7 - Ss find the kind of word - Give the answer: 1D 2B 3D 4A 5A

celebrate, seasonal, decorate, went, music attend, performers, harvest, festival,parade

1. Carnival is popular … in many countries in South America 2. South America people ….. Carnival in different ways 3. At Carnival, people wear costomes and … through the streets, playing samba music and dancing.

4. She is going to Rio Carnival to watch … dance.

5. A lot of dancers go to Rio de Janeiro to … the Rio Carnival.

6. I think nobody is at home now because they have gone to the … festival.

7. We … to the Flower Festival in Dalat last year.

8. During Tet, the Vietnamese … their house with many beautiful flowers.

9. Thanksgiving is a …. Festival only held in the USA. 10. Do you have …… festival in your country ?

Ex 4: Write down the name of the festivals Ss have learnt.

- Ss find the meaning and kind of words in the box.

- Answer key: 1. festival 6. music 2. celebrate 7. went 3. parade 8. decorate 4. perform 9. seasonal 5. attend 10. harvest

- Ss think and write on their notebook without their book the name of the festivals Ss have learnt.

Homework: Give the activities in each festival from Ex 4 - Calls some Ss come to the board and write down the answer 61

Hai An Secondary school English lesson plan for grade 7 * Adjustment: ………………………………………………………….………………………………… ………………..…………………………………………………………………………… …………………………..………………………………………………………………… ……………………………………….…………

Ngày 2 tháng 3 năm 2015 Tổ trưởng

Trần Thị Tuyết Ngày soạn : 8/ 3 / 2015 Ngày dạy : 7A: 13/ 3 / 2015- 7B :18 / 3/ 2015 Buổi 21: Revision Unit 9 ( Cont ) T and Ss’activities Ex 1: Choose the word which has a different stress pattern from the others.

1.A.cannon B.chaos C.circle D.direct 2.A.festival B.disaster C.pavement D.station 3.A.documentary B.entertaining C.helicopter D.superstitious 4.A.horror B.highlight C.project D.perform 5.A.hilarious B.violent C.serious D.seasonal Ex 2 : Choose the correct option for each gap in the sentences.

1. …………….. festival do you choose?

- I choose Elephant Race Festival.

A. What B. How C. Which D. When 2. He thinks elephants are …………….. animals.

A. fascinated B. fascinating C. fascinates D. fascinate 3. It must be amazing …………….. elephants racing.

Content - Ss revise about stress V? N? - Give the answer - T corrects: 1D 2B 3C 4D 5A

- Ss revise about the festival, Whquestions - Give the answer - T corrects: 1C 2B 3B 4D 5C 6A 7B 8C 9D 10C

62

Hai An Secondary school A. see B. to see C. seeing D. saw.

4. La Tomatina is …………….. in Spain, in a small town.

A.holds B.hold C. holding D. held 5. La Tomatina is a seasonal …………….. to celebrate the tomato harvest.

A.celebration B.parade C. festival D.game 6. …………….. do you like about La Tomatina ?

A. What B. Which C. When D. Why 7. Do you …………….. anything about music festival called Burning man ?

A. like B.know C.understand D. have 8. ……….. do people do at Burning Festival ?

A. Why B.Which C. What D. How 9. …………….. often is Burning Festival held ?

- It’s held every year.

A. Which B. When C. What D. How 10. …………….. does the teacher say La Tomatina sounds unusual ?

- Because people throw tomatoes at each other for one hour at the festival A. What B When C. Why D. How Ex 3: ( Class 7A ) Make up sentences using the words and phrases given.

1. people/ love/ festivals/ because of / advantages/ they/ bring/ about.

2. festivals/ good/ for/ community.

3. festivals/ create/ opportunity/ for/ the/ people/ take/ part/ festival/ activities.

4. festivals/ help/ people/cooperate/ with/ one/ onother.

5. people/ can/ understand/ more/ about/ and/ appreciate/ their/ cultural/ values.

English lesson plan for grade 7

* Answer key 1. people love the festivals because of the advantages they bring about.

2. festivals are good for the community.

3. festivals create an opportunity for the people to take part in the festival activities.

4. festivals help people to cooperate with one onother.

5. people can understand more about and appreciate their cultural values.

- Ss do this exercise at home.

- Answer: 1. People can listen to various types Homework: of music at Rock in Rio. Rewrite the following sentences so that the meaning stays the same, using the words given. 2. Japanese people celebrate Japanese Boy’s Day on May 5th 1. There are various types of music for people to listen at Rock in Rio. ( listen ) 3. Carp kites are hung up outside th 2. Japanese Boy’s Day is celebrated on May 5 Japanese people’s houses on 63

Hai An Secondary school English lesson plan for grade 7 (celebrate) Japanese Boy’sDay 3. Japanese peope hang up carp kites outside their 4. There is a special celebration for houses on Japanese Boy’sDay (hung up ) Japanese Girls on March 3rd every 4. Japanese people celebrate a special day for year rd Japanese Girls on March 3 every year 5. Is it possible for me to ask you some questions about your favourite (celebration ) festival ?

5. Can I ask you some questions about your favourite festival ? (possible) * Adjustment: ………………………………………………………….………………………………… ………………..…………………………………………………………………………… …………………………..………………………………………………………………… ……………………………………….…………

Ngày 9 tháng 3 năm 2015 Tổ trưởng

Trần Thị Tuyết Buổi 22 + 23: Revision Unit 7,8,9 I. Mục tiêu: Giúp Hs ôn tập kiến thức có trong Unit 7,8,9 vơi chủ đề về giao thông, phim ảnh và lễ hội.

II. Kiến thức : 1.Vocabulary : Words related to: - Means of transport - Road signs.

- Types of films - ed and ing adjectives.

- Types of festivals - Festival activitives.

2. Pronunciation : Sounds / e / and / eI / Sounds / t / , /d/ and / id / Stress in two-syllable words 3. Grammar: 64

Hai An Secondary school English lesson plan for grade 7 - It indicating distance - Used to - connectors: although, desspite/ in spite of, however, nevertheless - H/Wh-questions - Adverbial phrases 4. Communication : - Talking about road signs and traffic rules.

- Talking about traffic problems.

- Talking about fovourite films.

- Asking and answering questions about film posters.

- Describing festival.

- Asking and answering questions about fesivals.

5. Bài tập: * Buổi 22: Ngày soạn : 14/ 3 / 2015 Ngày dạy : 7A: 20 / 3 / 2015- 7B : 25/ 3/ 2015 T and Ss’activities Content Ex 1: Find the word which has a different sound in the part underlined.

1. A. played B.travelled C. planned D.watched.

2. A.buffalo B.unhappy C.pollution D.structure B.comic 3. A.collection C.concert D.volunteer 4. A.bread B.really C.head D.death 5. A.walked B.crowed C.needed D.excited Ex 2: Fill each blank with a word from the box.

- Ss read and reed the words silently and give the answer.

- corrects and gives the answer: 1D 2C 3A 4B 5A

- Ss understand the meaning of the words’ - Do ex in pairs disappointing , annoying , surprising, - Give the answers. moving , satisfied - Corrects : 1. We found his behaviour ………..

1. annoying 2. In spite of his spending millions of dollars 2. disappointing 3. satisfied on the film, it was ………..

4. moving 3. We were all ……….. with the service at 5. surprising this hotel.

4. The end of Romeo and Ruliet film is 65

Hai An Secondary school quite………..

5. His new film is really……….. . You should see it.

Ex 3. Make sentences for uderlined parts.

1. Vietnamese teenagers help old people by cleaning their yards or painting their houses.

2. Viet doesn’t want to go to my house because he has too many assignments.

3. It is Thursday tomorrow.

4. Lien’s brother is practicing the guitar now.

5. My uncle and I go to the tennis club once a week.

6. They will fly to Brazil next month.

7. We are going to visit the Natural Science Museum next weekend.

8. You should invite our former classmates to your birthday party.

9. Trung usually borrows his brother’s motorbike.

10. Our children have to do a lot of homework every day. ( Class 7A ) Ex4. Word form.

1. Ba has a large ……… of foreign stamps.

COLLECT 2. Nam is not very ……… . He never plays games.

SPORT 3. If you want to have a ……… body, you should play sports.

HEALTH 4. In most countries, there are organizations especially for ………

TEEN 5. There are many kinds of ……… for young people.

ENTERTAIN Homework :Em hãy chọn dạng đúng của động từ trong ngoặc để hoàn thành mõi câu sau: 1. Why you (make) ……….so much noise in your room, Lan? - We (rehaearse)…………..a play for the school anniversary celebrations.

2. My sister (practice) ………the violin in

English lesson plan for grade 7

- Revise the question words.

- How to make sentences 1. How do teenagers help old people ?

2. Why doesn’t Viet want to go to your house ? ………………

- Ss find the form of word - Give the answer: 1. collection 2. sporty 3 healthy 4. teenagers 5. entertainment

- Ss do this exercise at home individually Answer: 1. are you making are rehearing 2. practices 66

Hai An Secondary school the club twice a week.

3. They (give) ……..a farewell party next week.

4. What your father usually (do) ……….in the evening?

- He usually (watch) ……….TV, but sometimes he (read) ……………….books.

5. We (not go) …..to the cinema very often.

6. I (see) ………….a movie next Saturday.

You (go)……..with me?

English lesson plan for grade 7 3. are going to give 4. does your father do …………..

* Adjustment: ………………………………………………………….………………………………… ………………..…………………………………………………………………………… …………………………..………………………………………………………………… ……………………………………….…………

Ngày 15 tháng 3 năm 2015 Tổ trưởng

Trần Thị Tuyết

Ngày soạn : 21/ 3 / 2015 Ngày dạy : 7A: 27 / 3 / 2015- 7B : 1/ 4/ 2015 Buổi 23: Revision Unit 7,8,9( Cont) T and Ss’activities

Content 67

Hai An Secondary school * Checking homework :Em hãy chọn dạng đúng của động từ trong ngoặc để hoàn thành mõi câu sau: 1. Why you (make) ……….so much noise in your room, Lan? - We (rehearse)…………..a play for the school anniversary celebrations.

2. My sister (practice) ………the violin in the club twice a week.

3. They (give) ……..a farewell party next week.

4. What your father usually (do) ……….in the evening?

- He usually (watch) ……….TV, but sometimes he (read) ……………….books.

5. We (not go) …..to the cinema very often.

6. I (see) ………….a movie next Saturday.

You (go)……..with me?

Ex 1: Match the first halves in column A with the second ones in column B to make sentences.

A B 1.The “festival of a. when he was at lights” is primary school.

2.He used to go to b. before you cross school on foot. the street.

3.We must always c. another name obey traffic rules. for Diwal.

4.Wait for the traffic d. that he couldn’t light to turn green sleep last night.

5.The boy was so e. for our safe frightened by the film Ex 2. odd one out. our Eg : me him them Trả lời: our 1. February Saturday December June 2. nevous worries happy moment 3. third twelve fourteen twenty 4. tell see will let 5. directory sometime calendar distance Ex 3. Read and answer the questions Our neighbor, Mr. Duong , will sail

English lesson plan for grade 7

- Ss gives the answer - T corrects and gives the answer: 1.are you making – are rehearing 2. practices 3. are going to give 4. does your … do-watches- reads 5. don’t go 6. am gong to see- will you go

- Ss understand the meaning of the words’ - Do ex in pairs - Give the answers.

- Corrects : 1. annoying 2. disappointing 3. satisfied 4. moving 5. surprising

- Revise the meaning of the words.

- find the word that is different meaning with others.

- Ss give the answers - T corrects.

1. Saturday 2. moment 3. ………..

- S read the text and answer the questions 68

Hai An Secondary school from Cam Ranh tomorrow. We will meet him at the harbor early in the morning. He will be in his small boat, Lac Viet. Lac Viet is a famous little boat. Mr. Duong will leave at eight o’ clock, so we will have a lot of time . We will see his boat and then we will say goodbye to him. He will be away for two months. We are very froud of him . We will take part in an important race across the Atlantic.

1. Who will you meet at Cam Ranh Habor early tomorrow morning ?

2. Where will he be ?

3. What time will he leave ?

4. Will you say goodbye to him or will you travel with him ?

5. What will he take part in ?

Ex 4. Give the correct form of the verbs 1. Mr Thanh…. ( be ) a doctor. He…… ( work) in a hospital in the city center. Every day he ……( catch ) the bus to work.

2. What your sister ….. ( do ) now?

- she …… ( cook ) dinner in the kitchen .

3. We … ( not go ) camping next week. We …( visit ) the museum.

4. Miss Van is a journalist. She (not write) for Lao Dong Newspaper.She ….. ( write ) for Nhan Dan Newspaper.

5. I’d like ……… (join) your club.

Ex 5. Find the word which has a different sound in the part underlined.

Ví dụ : a. name b. happy c. late d. date Trả lời : b. happy 1. a. great b. beautiful c. teacher d. means 2. a. wet b. better c. rest d. pretty 3. a. horrible b. hour c. house d. here 4. a. party b. lovely c. sky d. empty

English lesson plan for grade 7 question words.

- Ss give the answers - T corrects.

1. Mr. Duong will 2. He will be in his small boat, Lac Viet.

3. Mr. Duong will leave at eight o’ clock 4. we will say goodbye to him

- Ss find the advs and tense in each sentence - Ss give the answers - T corrects.

1. is – works – catches 2. is your sister doing – is cooking 3. aren’t going – are going to visit 4. doesn’t write – writes 5. to write

- Ss read find the word which has a different sound in the part underlined.

- Give the answer: 1. a 2a 3b 4b 5c

69

Hai An Secondary school 5. a. stove b. moment c. sometime d. close Homework: Ex 6. Em hãy chọn một từ ở cột bên trái không cùng nhóm nghĩa với từ in hoa.

Ví dụ: MONTH Friday February July November May Trả lời: Friday 1. MUSICAL INSTRUMENT guitar violin piano song flute 2. SPORTS : volleyball soccer badminton tennis concert 3. SUBJECTS : Comics Biology Math physics Literature 4. ENTERTAINMENT : do assignment listen to music watch TV see a movie collectstamps 5. CAREER worker teenager singer engineer painter

English lesson plan for grade 7

- Ss do this ex at home

* Adjustment: ………………………………………………………….………………………………… ………………..…………………………………………………………………………… …………………………..………………………………………………………………… ……………………………………….…………

Ngày 23 tháng 3 năm 2015 Tổ trưởng

Trần Thị Tuyết

70

Hai An Secondary school

English lesson plan for grade 7

Buổi 24+25: Revision Unit 10: Sources of energy I. Mục tiêu: Giúp Hs ôn tập kiến thức có trong Unit 10 với chủ đề về năng lượng.

II. Kiến thức : 1.Vocabulary : Words related to: - Types of energy sources - Words to describe energy sources.

2. Pronunciation : Stress in three-syllable words 3. Grammar: - The future continuous - The future simple passive 4. Communication : - Talking about types and energy sources.

- Talking about the advantages and disadvantages of different sources of energy.

Bài tập : Buổi 24: Ngày soạn : 28/ 3 / 2015 Ngày dạy : 7A: 3/ 4 / 2015- 7B :8 / 4/ 2015 * Checking homework: (?) Em hãy chọn một từ ở cột bên trái không cùng nhóm nghĩa với từ in hoa.

- Ss come to the board do do homework.

- T corrects Ex 1: Find the word which has a different sound in the part underlined.

1. A. new B. sew C. few D. knew 2. A. noon B. tool C. blood D. spoon 3. A. plays B. looks C. wants D. helps 4. A. decided B. played C. listened D. enjoyed 5. A. feed B. heat C. meat D. pleasure ( Class 7A) Ex 2: Put the words into two groups.

Energy, abundant, partnership, afternoon, Pollution, describe, countryside, audience,,

- Answer: 1. song 2. corncert 3. comic 4. do assignment 5. teenager - Ss read all the words silently and find the word which has a different sound in the part underlined..

- T corrects and gives the answer.

1B 2C 3A 4A 5D

- Ss practices reading and find the stress on each word.

Stress on 1st Stress on 2nd 71

Hai An Secondary school expansion, expectant, tomorrow, pensioner.

Stress on 1st syllable

Stress on 2nd syllable

Ex 3: Put a word from the box in each gap to complete the following passage.

1. You (wait) for her when her plane arrives tonight ?

2. Don’t phone me between 7 and 8. We (have) dinner then.

3. I (send) in my application tomorrow.

4. Next week at this time, you (lie) on the beach.

5. You (meet) your former teachers at 9am tomorrow morning, will you?

Ex 4: Rewrite the sentence so that it has similar meaning as the sentence before, using the words given.

1. They will build a new school for poor children next month.

-> A new school ….

2. They sell these chemicals everywhere in my hometown.

-> These chemicals … * Homework: - Ss do 3 following sentences at home.

3. Some people will interview the new president on TV. -> The new president …

4. they will widen the road to our village next year.

-> The road …

5. He got the first prize at the competition.

His mother is very happy.

-> His mother ….

English lesson plan for grade 7 syllable syllable Pensioner, enegy, Expansion partnership, Expectant afternoon, audience Abundant countryside Tomorrow Pollution Describe - Ss read this exercise silently and find the tense in each sentence.

- T corrects.

1. will you be waiting 2. will be having 3. will send 4. will be lying 5. will be meeting

- Asks Ss to understand the way to changes sentences ( active -> passive) - Ss underline S,V,O in each sentence.

- Ss rewrite the sentences.

- T corrects .

1. A new school will be built for poor children next month.

2. These chemicals will be sold everywhere in my hometown.

3. The new president will be interviewed on TV 4. The road will be widened to our village next year.

5. His mother is very happy because he got the first prize at the competition.

* Adjustment: 72

Hai An Secondary school English lesson plan for grade 7 ………………………………………………………….………………………………… ………………..…………………………………………………………………………… …………………………..………………………………………………………………… ……………………………………….…………

Ngày 30 tháng 3 năm 2015 Tổ trưởng

Trần Thị Tuyết Ngày soạn : 28/ 3 / 2015 Ngày dạy : 7A: 10/ 4 / 2015- 7B :15 / 4/ 2015 Buổi 25:

Revision Unit 10 ( cont)

T & Ss’activities * Checking homework: Rewrite the sentence so that it has similar meaning as the sentence before, using the words given.

3. Some people will interview the new president on TV. -> The new president …

4. they will widen the road to our village next year.

-> The road …

5. He got the first prize at the competition. His mother is very happy.

-> His mother …. ( Class 7A ) Ex 1: Choose the words whose main stressed syllable is different from the rest.

1. A. generous B. suspicious C. constancy D. sympathy.

2. A. acquaintance B. unselfish C. attraction D. humorous

Content

- Ss come to the board and give the answer of their homework - T corrects .

3. The new president will be interviewed on TV 4. The road will be widened to our village next year.

5. His mother is very happy because he got the first prize at the competition.

- Ss read all the words silently and find the stress in each word.

- Call Ss read sentence by sentence and give their answer.

73

Hai An Secondary school 3. A. loyalty B. success C. incapable D. sincere 4. A. carefully B. correctly C. seriously D. personally 5. A.excited B. interested C. confident D. memorable Ex 2: Combine the two sentences into one, using the word in brackets: 1/ She’s feeling very tired. She’s feeling very hungry. (and) 2/ My father eats this food. He gest better quickly. (if) 3/ Quang has to go to the dentist`s. He has a toothache. (because) 4/ They’ll come late tonight. Don`t worry. (if) 5/ Minh and Thu can`t go out. They`re having flu. (because) 6/ Vinh wants to go to school. He has a cold. (but) 7/ The woman`s going to wear warm clothes.

She doesn`t want to catch cold again. (becase) 8/ My uncle is very is very ill. The doctor can visit him 9/ Linh is young. She is lovely. (not only…but also) 10/ I study hard. I can pass the exams.(if) Ex 3: Write questions , using the underline phrases as suggestions 1.The boy is playing computer games.

2.Danh has to take a panadon because he is having a headache.

3.Her English teacher is thirty – two years old.

4.Nam and Hoa can’t go together because he’s having a cold.

5.I’ll have bacon ,eggs and milk for breakfast .

6.Yes,I’ll come to the meeting on time tomorrow 7.No, the woman can’t swim.

8.Sang will see a dentist because he is having a decaying tooth.

English lesson plan for grade 7 - T corrects.

1B 2D 3A 4B 5A

- Ss revise the meaning of the verds in bracket: and, if, because, but …..

- Ss combine sentences.

- Some Ss come to the board and write down the answer.

- T corrects.

1/ She’s feeling very tired and hungry.

2/ If my father eats this food, he’ll get better quickly.

3/ Quang has to go to the dentist’s because He has a toothache.

4/ If they’ll …. tonight, don’t worry.

5/ Minh and Thu can’t go out because they’re having flu.

6/ Vinh wants...school but he has a cold.

7/ The woman’s going to wear warm clothes bacause she doesn’t want to catch cold again.

8/ My uncle is very is very ill so the doctor can visit him 9/Linh is not only young but also lovely.

10/ If I study hard. I can pass the exams.

- Ss revise how to make sentences.

- Ss find the question words in each sentence and then make questions.

1. What is the boy playing ?

2. Why does Danh have to take a panadon ?

3. How old is her English teacher ?

4. Why can’t Nam and Hoa go together? ……….

74

Hai An Secondary school 9.They are my brother’s gloves.

10.Nhi’s pen is on the chair.

Ex 4: Complete the following sentences 1. I was worried ……………….. Mai was late.

2. …………… I was tired, I went home.

3. We were late …………………….. the rain.

4. I can’t buy that house ……………… I don’t have enough money.

5.… his laziness, he couldn’t pass the exam.

6. They didn’t come to the meeting in time ……………… the traffic jam.

Homework.

Ex 5. pick out the word that does not belong to the others .

1/ a.listen b. read c.clean d.equipment 2/ a.young b.modern c.grandma d.immediate 3/ a.nice b.ugly c.pretty d.beautiful 4/ a.tack b.job c.work d.career 5/ a.father b.mother c.sister d.festival 6/ a.teacher b.king c.queen d.prince 7/ a.weekly b.quickly c.sadly d.highly 8/ a.duty b.rain c. snowy d.cluody 9/ a.in b.of c.and d.with 10/ a.gold b.water c.silver d.bronze

English lesson plan for grade 7

- Ss read the sentences silently and understand the meaning of the sentences - Ss give the answer, T corrects.

1. because 2. Because 3. because of 4. because 5. because of 6. because of

- Ss do this ex at home ( Ss read all the words and find the meaning of these words.)

1. d 2c 3b 4c 5d 6a 7

* Adjustment: ………………………………………………………….………………………………… ………………..…………………………………………………………………………… …………………………..…………………………………………………………………

75

Hai An Secondary school ……………………………………….…………

English lesson plan for grade 7

Ngày 6 tháng 4 năm 2015 Tổ trưởng

Trần Thị Tuyết

Buổi 26+27: Revision Unit 11: Travelling in the future I. Mục tiêu: Giúp Hs ôn tập kiến thức có trong Unit 11.

II. Kiến thức : 1.Vocabulary : Words related to: - Means of transport in the future - Movement words.

2. Pronunciation : Rising and falling intonation for questions 3. Grammar: - Will for future prediction : review.

- Possessive pronouns.

4. Communication : - Talking about travelling in the future.

- Giving facts and opinions.

Bài tập : Buổi 26: Ngày soạn : 12/ 4 / 2015 76

Hai An Secondary school

English lesson plan for grade 7 Ngày dạy : 7A: 17/ 4 / 2015- 7B : / 4/ 2015

T and Ss’activities * Checking homework: (?) Em hãy chọn một từ ở cột bên trái không cùng nhóm nghĩa với từ in hoa.

- Ss come to the board do do homework.T corrects Ex 1: Find the word which has a different sound in the part underlined.

1. A.dear B. fear C. hear D. heart 2. A. stupid B. studio C. study D. student 3. A. brother B. thick C. they D. that 4. A. machine B. parachute C. champagne D. cheer 5. A. doctor B. hopital C. pollution D. tomorrow Ex 2: Read and decide which sentences have rising intonation or falling intonation.

Rising Falling intonation intonation 1. What’s the time ?

2. Is this the blue one ?

3. Have you got a pen ?

4. Where do you live?

5. What’s your name ?

6. Is Jenny with you ?

Ex 3: Choose the best one which fits the space to complete the sentence.

1. This is ….. sister. That’s ….. ( his, my ) 2. ….. pen is red. ….. is blue. (hers, yours ) 3. They aren’t ….. keys. They are ….. ( theirs, ours) 4. It isn’t ….. hat. It’s ….. ( mine, her ) 5. ….. books are here. ….. are there ( ours, theirs) 6. These are ….. shoes. Those are ….. ( your, his)

Content - Ss do this ex at home ( Ss read all the words and find the meaning of these words.)

1d 2c 3b 4c 5d 6a 7…..

- Ss read all the words silently and find the word which has a different sound in the part underlined.

- Ss give the answer, T corrects.

1D 2C 3B 4D 5C

-Ss revise how to read question - T calls some Ss read aloud - T corrects Rising Falling ٧ 1. What’s the ٧ time ?

2. Is this the blue ٧ ٧ one ? ٧ 3.Have you got a ٧ pen ?

4.Where do you live?

5. What’s your name ?

6. Is Jenny with you ?

- Revise the using of possessive adjectives and possessive pronouns.

- Asks Ss to give the answer and asks Ss to explain the reason.

- Answer key: 1. my – his Ex 4: ( Class 7A) 2. your – hers Re arrange the words given to make meaningful 3. our – theirs sentences.

4. her mine 77

Hai An Secondary school 1. There/ been/ have/ transport/ interesting/ many/ inventions/ nowadays.

2. The/ a/ is/ single-wheel/ bike/ mono-wheel.

3. The/ sits/ driver/ the/ to/ wheel/ inside/ and/ pedals/ go/ forward.

4. The/ pulls/ handle/ to/ driver/ to/ go/ forward/ back/ or/ pushes/ the/ it/ go.

5. I/ it/ way/ convenient/ is/ guess/, / green/ to/ travel/ a.

English lesson plan for grade 7 5. their – ours 6. your – those - T explains how to do this ex.

- Ss read all sentences and understand the meaning of the sentences.

- Ss come to the board to the answer.

- T corrects 1. There have been many interesting transport inventions nowadays.

2. The mono-wheel is a single-wheel Ex 5: (Homework)Rewrite the sentences so that bike.

3. The driver sits inside the wheel and it has simlar meaning as the sentence before, pedals to go forward. using possessive pronouns.

4. The driver pulls the handle to go Ex: It’s my hat -> It’s mine back of pushes it to go forward.

1. They’re my glasses.

5. I guess it is a convenient, green way 2. Here’re his shoes. to travel.

3. It’s her cup.

4. They’re our pencils.

- Ss do this ex at home 5. It’s their picture. * Adjustment: ………………………………………………………….………………………………… ………………..…………………………………………………………………………… …………………………..………………………………………………………………… ……………………………………….…………

Ngày 13 tháng 4 năm 2015 Tổ trưởng

Trần Thị Tuyết Ngày soạn : 18/ 4 / 2015 Ngày dạy : 7A: 24/ 4 / 2015- 7B : / 4/ 2015 Buổi 27:

Revision Unit 11 ( Cont ) T and Ss’activities

Content 78

Hai An Secondary school * Checking homework: (?)Rewrite the sentences so that it has simlar meaning as the sentence before, using possessive pronouns.

- Ss come to the board do do homework.

- T corrects Ex 1: Put the verb in brackets in the correct tense form.

1. What you (do) when you graduate from the school ?

2. Next week we (have) many kinds of examinations. It (be) a very busy week, I think.

3. In the future, most of Vietnamese people (be able) (speak) English well.

4. We hope the new director (find) more jobs for his employees.

5. Nam is a hard-working student. He (pass) the exam easily this year.

Ex 2: Give the correct comparison form of adjectives.

1. Nam is ……than his sister.(tall) 2. Mr.Tan works …… hours than my father.(many) 3. Vietnamese students have …… vacations than American students.(few) 4. He drinks …… wine than Mr.Hai. (little) 5. Bill studies …… than you. (good) Ex 3: Match the phrases in A with the one in B, using the prepositions given. for – to – with – in – on Eg: 1-F Thankyou for your telephoning us.

Column A 1. thankyou 2. We look forward 3. Children usually get bored 4. Rome is famous 5. Too much sugar is bad 6. Is it easy to keep in touch 7. Our new classmate prefers playing basketball.

8. Are you interested 9. He take part

English lesson plan for grade 7 - Ss come to the board and do ex.

1. They’re mine.

2. Here’re his .

3. It’s hers.

4. They’re ours.

5. It’s theirs.

- Ss find the tense in each sentence.

- Ss give the answer, T corrects.

1. will you do 2. will have – will be 3. will be able – to speak.

4. will find 5. will pass.

-Ss revise the comparison - Ss change the words in brackets into comparison.

- T calls some Ss come to the board and give the answer.

- T corrects 1. taller 2. more 3. fewer 4. less 5. better

- Ss read silently and understand the meaning of all sentences, then match.

- Some Ss read aloud the answers -T corrects.

2-D; to 3- H: of 4- I: for 5- A: for 6- C: with 7- J: to 8- E: in 9- B: in 10- G: on 79

Hai An Secondary school 10. Whether we will go or not depends much .

Column B A, your teeth.

B, different.

C, your old school friends.

D, meeting a lot of different people.

E, going on holiday.

F, telephoning us .

G, the weather.

H, reading long books.

I, its beautiful building.

J, badminton .

Ex 4: ( Class 7A) Complete the sentences using the words given. plant people clothing solution should 1. How many …… are there in your family?

2. Our city will have to find …… to reduce traffic jams.

3. They …… trees in their school.

4. We …… use public transport.

5. Poor people need more food and ……

English lesson plan for grade 7

- T explains how to do this ex.

- Ss do this ex and give the answer.

- T corrects.

1. people 2. solution 3. plant 4. should 5. clothing

* Adjustment: ………………………………………………………….………………………………… ………………..…………………………………………………………………………… …………………………..………………………………………………………………… ……………………………………….…………

Ngày 20 tháng 4 năm 2015 Tổ trưởng

Trần Thị Tuyết

80

Hai An Secondary school

English lesson plan for grade 7

Ngày soạn : 2/ 5 / 2015 Ngày dạy : 7A: 8/ 5 / 2015 Buổi 28: Revision Unit 12: An overcrowded world I. Mục tiêu: Giúp Hs ôn tập kiến thức có trong Unit 12.

II. Kiến thức : 1.Vocabulary : Words related to overcrowded places 2. Pronunciation : Word stress: review 3. Grammar: - Comparisons of quantifiers: more, less/ fewer.

- Tag questions .

4. Communication : - Talking about the causes and effects of overcrowed.

Bài tập : T and Ss’activities * Revision: - Comparisons of quantifiers: more, less/ fewer.

- Tag questions . * Exercises: I. Choose the word that has the underlined parts pronounced differently from the others in each group: 1. A. there B. healthy C. gather D. northern 2. A. raised B. practised C. talked D. liked 3.A. days B. ways C. bays D. says

Content * Ss revise - Comparisons of quantifiers: more, less/ fewer.

- Tag questions .

- Ss do exercises Ex 1: 1. doesn’t he 2. do you 3. doesn’t he 4. isn’t it 5. will they ……..

Ex 2: Put the words in the box into two 81

Hai An Secondary school groups.

Natural , water, energy, enormous, enjoy, pollution, festival, perform, Easter, disaster Stress on 1st syllable

English lesson plan for grade 7

Stress on 2nd syllable

Ex 2: Stress on 1st syllable Ex 3: Give the correct comparison form of Natural, Easter, adjectives festival, energy, 1. Nam is …… than his sister (tall) 2. Mr.Tan works … hours than my father. (many) water 3. Vietnamese students have …… vacations than American students (few) Ex 3: 4. He drinks …… wine than Mr.Hai (little) 1. taller 5. Bill studies …… than you. (good) 2. more 3. fewer 4. less 5. better

Stress on 2nd syllable Disaster, pollution, enjoy , perform, enormous

* Adjustment: ………………………………………………………….………………………………… ………………..…………………………………………………………………………… …………………………..………………………………………………………………… ……………………………………….…………

82

Hai An Secondary school

English lesson plan for grade 7

Ngày soạn : 15/ 4 / 2016 Ngày dạy : 22/ 4 / 2016 Buổi 28: Revision for the second term test I. Mục tiêu: Giúp Hs ôn tập kiến thức có trong Unit 12.

II. Kiến thức : 1.Vocabulary : Words related to overcrowded places 2. Pronunciation : Word stress: review 3. Grammar: - Comparisons of quantifiers: more, less/ fewer.

- Tag questions .

4. Communication : - Talking about the causes and effects of overcrowed.

Bài tập : T and Ss’activities * Revision: - Comparisons of quantifiers: more, less/ fewer.

- Tag questions . * Exercises: I. Choose the word that has the underlined parts pronounced differently from the others in each group: 1. A. there B. healthy C. gather D. northern 2. A. raised B. practised C. talked D.

Content * Ss revise - Comparisons of quantifiers: more, less/ fewer.

- Tag questions .

- Ss do exercises Ex 1: 1. B 2. A 3. D

II. 1C 83

Hai An Secondary school liked 3.A. days B. ways C. bays D. says II. Choose the word whose stress pattern is different from that of the other words in each group.

1. A. diver B. vessel C. affect D. chopstick 2. A. relax B. marbles C. comic D. atlas III. Choose the best answer from the four choices (A or B,C,D) to complete each of the following sentences.

1. Our school will ______ the school festival next week.(organize / take / rehearse/ play ) 2. ______ silly mistake! (/What/ What a / how/ How How a) 3. We are free now. Shall we go to our club’s party?

- ……………………… (yes, I shall/ Yes, we should/ Yes, we go?

Yes, let’s) 4.I and my brother usually spend two hour … ………… our homework every evening. ( do / to do / doing/ to do) 5. Of the two students , he is ……………….…… (tall/ taller / the taller/ the tallest) 6. When I saw your teacher this morning, I found that he looked very ……………….…… (happy/ happily/ to be happy/ being happy 7. Come here. We have …………good news for you and your family.( a / many/ a lot/ some) 8. Mr. Truong feels sick now because he drank too………………wine this morning. (many/ few/ lots/ much) 9. I didn’t break those glass windows but my classmates, Tuan and Hoang……………….……

English lesson plan for grade 7 2A

Ex III:

organize What a Yes, let’s doing the taller happy some much did A

1.his broken leg, he managed to get out of the car 2. It is a month since I last saw my 84

Hai An Secondary school (do/ didn’t/ did / didn’t, either) 10. - “Would you like some corn?” “______.”

A. No, thanks. I’m full B. Ok. I don’t like corn C. All right D. Yes, I would V- Writing Write the second sentence so that it has a similar meaning to the first one: 1. Although he broke his leg, he managed to get out of the car.

In spite of ……………………………………

2. I haven’t met my grandmother for a month.

It ……………………………………………

3. We have two- month summer vacation.

Our summer vacation ………………………

4. My father spent two hours repairing my bike.

It ……………………………………………

5. I prefer playing outdoor games to indoor games I’d …………………………………………

English lesson plan for grade 7 grandfather.

3. Our summer vacation lasts two months 4. It took my father two hours repairing ……

5. play outdoor games rather than indoor games.

* Adjustment: ………………………………………………………….………………………………… ………………..…………………………………………………………………………… …………………………..………………………………………………………………… ……………………………………….…………

Bài tập tiếng Anh - Thì hiện tại hoàn thành Chia động từ ở thì hiện tại hoàn thành 1.

There is no more cheese. I (eat)……………. it all, I’m afraid.

2.

The bill isn’t right. They (make)………….. a mistake.

85

Hai An Secondary school English lesson plan for grade 7 3.

Don’t you want to see this programme? It ………….(start).

4.

It’ll soon get warm in here. I (turn)……….. the heating on.

5. ………They (pay)…….. money for your mother?

6.

Someone (take)………………. my bicycle.

7.

Wait for few minutes, please! I (finish)……………. my dinner.

8. ………You ever (eat)………….. Sushi?

9.

She (not/come)…………… here for a long time.

10.

I (work…………..) here for three years.

11. ………… You ever …………..(be) to New York?

12.

You (not/do) ………….yor project yet, I suppose.

13.

I just (see)………. Andrew and he says he ……..already 14. (do)………. about half of the plan.

15.

I ………..just (decide)……… to start working next week.

16.

He (be)…………. at his computer for seven hours.

17.

She (not/have) ……………any fun a long time.

18.

My father (not/ play)……….. any sport since last year.

19.

I’d better have a shower. I (not/have)………. one since Thursday.

20.

I don’t live with my family now and we (not/see)…………. each other for five years.

21.

I…… just (realize)…………... that there are only four weeks to the end of term.

22.

The train drivers (go)……… on strike and they stopped working at twelve o’clock.

23.

How long…….. (you/know)………. each other?

24. ……….(You/ take)………… many photographs ?

25.

(She/ eat)………………. at the Royal Hotel yet ?

26.

He (live) ………….here all his life..

27.

Is this the second time he (lose)……………. his job ?

28.

How many bottles………… the milkman (leave) ………….? He (leave) ……….. six.

29.

I (buy)…………. a new carpet. Come and look at it.

30.

She (write)………….. three poems about her fatherland.

31.

We (finish) ……………………three English courses.

32.

My granfather (live)………………with us for thirty years. He (die) ten years ago.

33.

Shake Spears (write)…………………….many good poems about love 34.

I can’t find my clothes . someone (take)……………………….them away.

35.

You(find)………………………….the key you lost yesterday?- yes, I find it an hour ago 36.

I (wash)……………my hand. I (repair )…………………my car.

Chuyển đổi từ hiện tại hoàn thành sang quá khứ đơn (và ngược lại) 1. Viết lại câu không thay đổi nghĩa: 1) This is the first time he went abroad.=> He hasn't......................................................................................................................

86

Hai An Secondary school English lesson plan for grade 7 2) She started driving 1 month ago. => She has.................................................................................................................

3) We began eating when it started to rain. => We have................................................................................................................

4) I last had my hair cut when I left her. => I haven't................................................................................................................

5) The last time she kissed me was 5 months ago. => She hasn't.............................................................................................................

6) It is a long time since we last met. => We haven't.............................................................................................................

7) When did you have it ? =Howlong................................................................................?

8) This is the first time I had such a delicious meal . => I haven't................................................................................................................

9) I haven't seen him for 8 days. => The last ................................................................................................................

10)Ihaven't takena bath since Monday. => I last………………………………………………………………………………

11. When did you started learning English?

How long 12. I haven’t been to the hairdresser’s for ages.

It’s ……………………………………………………………………………………………… ………

13. He hasn’t been back to his village for 20 years.

It’s………………………………………………………………………………………… ………………

The last………………………………………………………………………………………… …………..

14. This is the most fabulus film I have ever seen.

I…………………………………………………………………………………………… ………………

15. I have never met such a tall man.

87

Hai An Secondary school English lesson plan for grade 7 This………………………………………………………………………………………… …………

16. I have written to him for ten moths.

It’s………………………………………………………………………………………… …..

III. make sentences using the words given 1. We/ just /finish / repair / most of / house / and now it / look / very nice.

2. he / work / bank / since / he / leave / collage.

3. it/ 15 years / since / he / last / leave / his hometown.

4.Nowadays / our lives / be / much / improved / by / science and technology.

5. science / bring/ us / a lot / benefits / now.

6. What / weather / like / tomorrow/?.

7. We / spend / time /learn /how / take care/ ourselves last year.

8. This / be / best movie / I / see 10. they / not see/ one other / long time 11Noone/ live / this / for ages.

12. We / never / see / this/ man / before.

13. The children / not / see / that / film / TV last week.

14. Lan / prefer / classical music / opera.

15. She / beautiful/ weman / I / meet.

16. She / never / see / fabuluos / film / this 17. He/ be / to / zoo / ten times.

2. Chia các động từ trong ngoặc ra thì simple past hoặc present perfect: 1) We (study) ...............a very hard lesson the day before yesterday............................

2) We (study) ................................................almost every lesson in this book so far.................

3) We (have never watched)..........................that television program ...........................

4) We (watch) .....................an interesting program on television last night ...............

5) My wife and I ........................................(travell) by air many times 6) My wife and I (travell).................................. to Mexico by air last summer 7) I (read) ..................that novel by Hemingway sevaral times before.

8) I (read) .........................that novel again during my last vacation.

9) I (have) .........................a little trouble with my car last week.

88

Hai An Secondary school English lesson plan for grade 7 10) However,I (have )......................... no trouble with my car since then.

Ngày

, tháng 9 , 2014 Tổ trưởng

Trần Thị Tuyết Ngày soạn : 16/ 10/ 2014 Ngày dạy : 7B: 22/ 10 / 2014 7A: 30/ 10/ 2014

Bài tập : I. Choose the word that has the underlined parts pronounced differently from the others in each group: 1. A. there B. healthy C. gather D. northern 2. A. raised B. practised C. talked D. liked 3.A. days B. ways C. bays D. says 1. A. there B. healthy C. gather D. northern 2. A. raised B. practised C. talked D. liked 3. A. days B. ways C. bays D. says II. Choose the word whose stress pattern is different from that of the other words in each group.

1. A. diver B. vessel C. affect D. chopstick 2. A. relax B. marbles C. comic D. atlas III. Choose the best answer from the four choices (A or B,C,D) to complete each of the following sentences.

1. Our school will ______ the school festival next week. (organize / take / rehearse/ play ) 2. ______ silly mistake! (/What/ What a / how/ How How a) 3. We are free now. Shall we go to our club’s party?

- ……………………… (yes, I shall/ Yes, we should/ Yes, we go? Yes, let’s) 2. I and my brother usually spend two hour … ………… our homework every evening.

89

Hai An Secondary school English lesson plan for grade 7 ( do / to do / doing/ to do) 5. Of the two students , he is ……………….…… (tall/ taller / the taller/ the tallest) 6. When I saw your teacher this morning, I found that he looked very ……………….…… (happy/ happily/ to be happy/ being happy 7. Come here. We have …………good news for you and your family.( a / many/ a lot/ some) 8. Mr. Truong feels sick now because he drank too………………wine this morning. (many/ few/ lots/ much) 9. I didn’t break those glass windows but my classmates, Tuan and Hoang……………….…… (do/ didn’t/ did / didn’t, either) 10. - “Would you like some corn?”

- “______.”

A. No, thanks. I’m full B. Ok. I don’t like corn C. All right D. Yes, I would IV- Reading Read the following passage and choose the best answers.

My Television My television is an important (1) _____of furniture to me. I can’t get (2) ____ the house very often, but my TV brings the whole (3) ______to me. From the evening news and the “all-news” channels. I learn about events(4) ______ the outside world: politics, the environment, recent changes in technology and medicine, and (5) ______on. I like game shows and travel programs, (6) ______. And I love comedies: I think it’s important to be (7) _____to laugh. I can even watch shows (8) _____other languages and “go shopping” by TV. With the major national networks, I have a (9) ______of fifty different programs (10) ___the same time!

1. A. bit B. piece C. slice D. pair 2. A. out B. in C. out of D. in to 3. A. world B. places C. towns D. cities 4. A. on B. in C. out D. over 5. A. such B. this C. that D. so 6. A. too B. so C. either D. neither 7. A. ability B. enable C. able D. inability 8. A. of B. in C. at D. by 9. A. choose B. chose C. choice D. choosing 10.A. in B. at C. on D. of V- Writing Write the second sentence so that it has a similar meaning to the first one: 1. Although he broke his leg, he managed to get out of the car.

In spite of …………………………………………………………..

90

Hai An Secondary school English lesson plan for grade 7 2. I haven’t met my grandmother for a month.

It …………………………………………………………………..

3. We have two- month summer vacation.

Our summer vacation …………………………………………………….

4. My father spent two hours repairing my bike.

It …………………………………………………………………………

5. I prefer playing outdoor games to indoor games I’d ……………………………………………………………………….

at one time: thời gian nào đó đã qua - back to square one: trở lại từ đầu - be at one with someone: thống nhất với ai - be/get one up on someone: có ưu thế hơn ai - for one thing: vì 1 lý do - a great one for sth: đam mê chuyện gì - have one over th eight: uống quá chén 91

Hai An Secondary school - all in one, all rolled up into one: kết hợp lại

English lesson plan for grade 7

- it's all one (to me/him): như nhau thôi - my one and only copy: người duy nhất - a new one on me: chuyện lạ - one and the same: chỉ là một - one for the road: ly cuối cùng trước khi đi - one in the eye for somone: làm gai mắt - one in a thousand/milion: một người tốt trong ngàn người - be in two minds: chưa quyết định được - for two pins: xém chút nữa - in two shakes: 1 loáng là xong - a black day (for someone/sth): ngày đen tối Trong một câu tiếng Anh, chủ ngữ và động từ phải phù hợp với nhau về ngôi và số (số ít hay số nhiều). Quy tắc chung: chủ ngữ số ít đi cùng động từ số ít và chủ ngữ số nhiều đi cùng động từ số nhiều. Tuy nhiên, đôi khi chủ ngữ còn hòa hợp với động từ tùy theo ý tưởng diễn đạt hoặc danh từ/đại từ đứng trước theo các quy tắc nhất định. Chúng ta hãy ghi nhớ những quy tắc dưới đây để tránh những nhầm lẫn không đáng có khi học tiếng Anh nhé.

1. Các trường hợp chủ ngữ đứng tách khỏi động từ – Trong câu tiếng Anh, có nhiều trường hợp rất khó xác định được đâu là chủ ngữ của câu do chủ ngữ và động từ không đi liền với nhau.

The boys in the room are playing chess.

– Thông thường trong các trường hợp đó, một ngữ giới từ (một giới từ mở đầu và các danh từ theo sau – in the room) thường nằm giữa chủ ngữ và động từ.

Các ngữ giới từ này không ảnh hưởng đến việc chia động từ.

The study of languages is very interesting.

Serveral theories on this subject have been proposed.

The view of these disciplines varies from time to time.

The danger of forest fires is not to be taken lightly.

92

Hai An Secondary school English lesson plan for grade 7 – Chú ý rằng trong các ví dụ trên các danh từ nằm trong ngữ giới từ đều trái ngược với chủ ngữ về số ít / số nhiều nhưng động từ luôn được chia theo chủ ngữ chính.

– Các cụm từ sau cùng với các danh từ đi theo sau nó tạo nên hiện tường đồng chủ ngữ. Chúng đứng giữa chủ ngữ và động từ, phân tách khỏi 2 thành phần đó bởi dấu phảy. Chúng cũng không có ảnh hưởng gì đến việc chia động từ.

– Nếu hai danh từ làm chủ ngữ nối với nhau bằng ” and” nhưng cùng nói về 1 đối tượng thì động từ chia ở ngôi thứ 3 số ít.

VD: Bread and butter is all he asked for.

Together with

along with

accompanied by

as well as

Mary, along with her manager and some friends, is going to a party tonight.

Mr. Robbins, accompanied by her wife and children, is arriving tonight.

– Nếu 2 danh từ làm chủ ngữ nối với nhau bằng “and” thì động từ phải chia ở ngôi thứ 3 số nhiều (tương đương với they) Mary and her manager are going to a party tonight.

Nhưng nếu 2 đồng chủ ngữ nối với nhau bằng “or” thì động từ phải chia theo danh từ đứng sau “or”. Nếu danh từ đó là số ít thì động từ phải chia số ít và ngược lại.

Mary or her manager is going to answer the press interview.

2. Các từ luôn đi với danh từ hoặc đại từ số ít Đó là các danh từ ở bảng sau (còn gọi là các đại từ phiếm chỉ). any + singular noun anybody anyone anything

no + singular noun nobody no one nothing

some + singular noun Somebody someone something

every/ each + singular noun everybody everyone everything

neither * either * * “Either” và “neither” là số ít nếu chúng không đi với “or“ hoặc “nor“. Either (có nghĩa 1 trong 2) chỉ dùng cho 2 người hoặc 2 vật. Nếu 3 người (vật) trở lên phải dùng any. Neither (không một ai trong hai) chỉ dùng cho 2 người, 2 vật. Nếu 3 người (vật) trở lên dùng “not any“.

Everybody who wants to buy a ticket should be in this line.

Something is in my eye.

Anybody who has lost his ticket should report to the desk.

Neither of his pens is able to be used.

If either of you takes a vacation now, we will not be able to finish the work.

93

Hai An Secondary school English lesson plan for grade 7 No problem is harder than this one.

Nobody works harder than John does.

3. Cách sử dụng None và No “None” và “No” đều dùng được với cả danh từ số ít và số nhiều. · Nếu sau “None of” the là một danh từ không đếm được thì động từ phải ở ngôi thứ 3 số ít. Nếu sau nó là một danh từ số nhiều thì động từ phải chia ở ngôi thứ 3 số nhiều.

None of the + non-count noun + singular verb None of the + plural count noun + plural verb None of the counterfeit money has been found.

None of the students have finished the exam yet. · Nếu sau “No” là một danh từ đếm được số ít hoặc không đếm được thì động từ phải ở ngôi thứ 3 số ít. Nếu sau nó là một danh từ số nhiều thì động từ phải ở ngôi thứ 3 số nhiều.

No + {singular noun / non-count noun} + singular verb No + plural noun + plural verb No example is relevant to this case.

No examples are relevant to this case.

4. Cách sử dụng cấu trúc either… or (hoặc…hoặc) và neither… nor (không…mà cũng không) Điều cần lưu ý nhất khi sử dụng cấu trúc này là động từ phải chia theo danh từ đi sauor hoặc nor. Nếu danh từ đó là số ít thì động từ chia ở ngôi thứ 3 số ít và ngược lại. Nếu or hoặc nor xuất hiện một mình (không có either hoặc neither) thì cũng áp dụng quy tắc tương tự (như đã đề cập ở phần trên).

Neither John nor his friends are going to the beach today.

Either John or his friends are going to the beach today.

Neither the boys nor Carmen has seen this movie before.

Either John or Bill is going to the beach today.

Neither the director nor the secretary wants to leave yet.

5. V-ing làm chủ ngữ Khi V-ing dùng làm chủ ngữ thì động từ cũng phải chia ở ngôi thứ 3 số ít.

Learning English is not Not studying has caused him many Washing with special cream is recommended for scalp

easy.. problems. infection.

94

Hai An Secondary school English lesson plan for grade 7 Being cordial is one of his greatest assets.

Writing many letters makes her happy.

Người ta sẽ dùng V-ing khi muốn diễn đạt 1 hành động cụ thể xảy ra nhất thời nhưng khi muốn diễn đạt bản chất của sự vật, sự việc thì phải dùng danh từ.

Dieting is very popular today.

Diet is for those who suffer from a certain disease. Động từ nguyên thể cũng có thể dùng làm chủ ngữ và động từ sau nó sẽ chia ở ngôi thứ 3 số ít. Nhưng người ta thường dùng chủ ngữ giả “it” để mở đầu câu.

To find the book is necessary for him = It is necessary for him to find the book.

6. Các danh từ tập thể Đó là các danh từ ở bảng sau dùng để chỉ 1 nhóm người hoặc 1 tổ chức nhưng trên thực tế chúng là những danh từ số ít, do vậy các đại từ và động từ theo sau chúng cũng ở ngôi thứ 3 số ít.

Congress family group committee class

Organization team army club crowd

Government jury majority* minority public

The committee has met, and it has rejected the proposal.

The family was elated by the news.

The crowd was wild with excitement Congress has initiated a new plan to combat inflation.

The organization has lost many members this year.

Our team is going to win the game.

Tuy nhiên nếu các thành viên trong nhóm đang hoạt động riêng rẽ, động từ sẽ chia ở ngôi thứ 3 số nhiều: Congress votes for the bill. (Quốc hội bỏ phiếu cho dự luật, gồm tất cả mọi người) Congress are discussing about the bill. (Quốc hội đang tranh luận về dự luật, tức là một số tán thành, một số phản đối). * Danh từ “majority” được dùng tuỳ theo thành phần sau nó để chia động từ The majority + singular verb The majority of the + plural noun + plural verb The majority believes that we are in no danger.

The majority of the students believe him to be innocent. · The police/the sheep/the fish + plural verb.

The sheep are breaking away The police come only to see the dead bodies and a ruin in the bank ·A couple + singular verb 95

Hai An Secondary school English lesson plan for grade 7 A couple is walking on the path · The couple + plural verb The couple are racing their horses through the meadow. · Các cụm từ ở nhóm sau chỉ một nhóm động vật hoặc gia súc. Cho dù sau giới từ“of“ là danh từ số nhiều thì động từ vẫn chia theo ngôi chủ ngữ chính – ngôi thứ 3 số ít: flock of birds/ sheep, school of fish, herd of cattle, pride of lions, pack of dogs.

The flock of birds is circling overhead.

The herd of cattle is breaking away.

A school of fish is being attacked by sharks. · Tất cả các danh từ tập thể chỉ thời gian, tiền bạc, số đo, … khi được đề cập đến như một thể thống nhất thì đều được xem là một danh từ số ít. Do đó các động từ và đại từ theo sau chúng phải ở ngôi thứ 3 số ít.

Twenty-five dollars is too much for the meal.

Fifty minutes isn’t enough time to finish this test Twenty dollars is all I can afford to pay for that radio.

Two miles is too much to run in one day.

He has contributed $50, and now he wants to contribute another fifty.

7. Cách sử dụng “a number of, the number of”: A number of = “Một số những …”, đi với danh từ số nhiều, động từ chia ở số nhiều.

A number of + plural noun + plural verb A number of students are going to the class picnic (Một số sinh viên sẽ đi …)

A number of applicants have already been interviewed.

The number of = “Số lượng những …”, đi với danh từ số nhiều, động từ vẫn ở ngôi thứ 3 số ít.

The number of + plural noun + singular verb...

The number of days in a week is seven. (Số lượng ngày trong tuần là 7) The number of residents who have been questioned on this matter is quite small.

8. Các danh từ luôn ở số nhiều Bảng sau là những danh từ bao giờ cũng ở hình thái số nhiều vì chúng bao gồm 2 thực thể nên các đại từ và động từ đi cùng với chúng cũng phải ở số nhiều. scissors shorts pants Nếu The A

jeans tongs trousers muốn

eyeglasses pliers tweezers

chúng thành ngôi số ít pants are in pair of pants is in

phải the

dùng a the

pair of… drawer. drawer.

96

Hai An Secondary school English lesson plan for grade 7 These scissors are dull. (Cái kéo này cùn. Chú ý chỉ có 1 cái kéo nhưng cũng dùng với these) 9. Cách dùng “there is, there are” Được dùng để chỉ sự tồn tại của người hoặc vật tại một nơi nào đó. Chủ ngữ thật của câu là danh từ đi sau động từ. Nếu nó là danh từ số ít thì động từ to be chia ở ngôi thứ 3 số ít và ngược lại. Mọi biến đổi về thời và thể đều ở to be còn there giữ nguyên.

There has been an increase in the importation of foreign cars.

Threre is a storm approaching.

There was an accident last night.

There was water on the floor.

There have been a number of telephone calls today.

There were too many people at the party.

Lưu ý: • Các cấu trúc: there is certain/ sure/ likely/ bound to be = chắc chắn là sẽ có There is sure to be trouble when she gets his letter. (Chắc chắn là sẽ có rắc rối khi cô ấy nhận được thư anh ta) Do you think there is likely to be snow. (Anh cho rằng chắc chắn sẽ có tuyết chứ) • Trong dạng tiếng Anh quy chuẩn hoặc văn chương một số các động từ khác ngoài to be cũng được sử dụng với there: Động từ trạng thái: stand/ lie/ remain/ exist/ live Động từ chỉ sự đến: enter/ go/ come/ follow/ develop In a small town in Germany there once lived a poor shoemaker. (Tại một thị trấn nhỏ ở Đức có một ông thợ giày nghèo sống ở đó) There remains nothing more to be done . (Chả còn có gì nữa mà làm) Suddenly there entered a strange figure dressed all in black. (Bỗng có một hình bóng kì lạ mặc toàn đồ đen đi vào) There followed an uncomfortable silence. (Sau đó là một sự im lặng đến khó chịu) • There + subject pronoun + go/ come/ be: kìa/ thế là/ rồi thì There he comes (Anh ta đã đến rồi kia kìa) There you are, I have been waiting for you for over an hour. (Anh đây rồi, tôi đang chờ anh đến hơn một tiếng rồi đ ách dùng Be used to: Đã quen với Be used to + cụm danh từ hoặc verb-ing (trong cấu trúc này, used là 1 tính từ và to là 1 giới từ).

You are used to do something, nghĩa là bạn đã từng làm việc gì đó rất nhiều lần hoặc đã có kinh nghiệm với việc đó rồi, vì vậy nó không còn lạ lẫm, mới lạ hay khó khăn gì với bạn nữa.

Ex: • I am used to getting up early in the morning.

(Tôi đã quen với việc dậy sớm vào buổi sáng).

• He didn’t complain about the noise nextdoor. He was used to it.

97

Hai An Secondary school English lesson plan for grade 7 (Anh ta không than phiền về tiếng ồn bên nhà hàng xóm nữa. Anh ta đã quen với nó rồi).

Nghĩa ngược lại của be used to la be NOT used to: không quen với, chưa quen với Ex: • I am not used to the new system in the factory yet.

(Tôi vẫn chưa quen với hệ thống mới ở nhà máy).

Cách dùng Get used to: Dần quen với Get used to + cụm danh từ hoặc verb-ing (trong cấu trúc này, used là 1 tính từ và to là 1 giới từ) You are used to something, nghĩa là bạn đang trở nên quen với việc đó. Đây là một quá trình của việc dần trở nên quen với việc gì đó.

Ex: • I got used to getting up early in the morning.

(Tôi đã quen dần với việc dậy sớm buổi sáng.)

• After a while he didn’t mind the noise in the office, he got used to it.

(Sau một thời gian không để ý đến tiếng ồn trong văn phòng thì anh ta quen dần với nó.)

Cách dùng Used to: Đã từng, từng Used to + verb chỉ một thói quen hay một tình trạng ở quá khứ. Nó thường chỉ được sử dụng ở quá khứ đơn. a) Thói quen trong quá khứ: You used to do something, nghĩa là bạn đã làm việc đó trong 1 khoảng thời gian ở quá khứ, nhưng bạn không còn làm việc đó nữa.

Ex: • We used to live there when I as a child.

(Chúng tôi đã từng sống ở đó khi tôi còn là một đứa trẻ.)

• I used to walk to work when I was younger.

(Tôi từng hay đi bộ đến công ty khi tôi còn trẻ.) b) Tình trạng / trạng thái trong quá khứ: Used to còn thể hiện tình trạng trong quá khứ nhưng không còn tồn tại nữa được thể hiện bằng những động từ biểu hiện trạng thái sau: have, believe, know và like.

Ex: • I used to Like The Beatles but now I never listen to them.

(Tôi đã từng thích nhóm The Beatles nhưng bây giờ tôi không còn nghe nhạc của họ nữa.)

• He used to have long hair but nowadays this hair is very short.

(Anh ta đã từng để tóc dài nhưng dạo này anh ấy để tóc rất ngắn.)

Dạng câu hỏi của Used to: Did(n’t) + subject + use to Ex: • Did he use to work in the office very late at night?

(Anh ta có thường hay làm việc trong văn phòng rất trễ vào buổi tối không?)

Dạng phủ định của Used to: Subject + didn’t + used to 98

Hai An Secondary school English lesson plan for grade 7 Ex: • We didn’t use to be vegestarians.

(Chúng tôi không từng những người ăn chay.)

• We didn’t use to get up early when we were children.

(Chúng tôi không từng dậy sớm khi còn là những đứa trẻ.)

Các dạng bài tập về USED TO và GET USED TO Các dạng bài tập về USED TO và GET USED TO được VnDoc.com sưu tầm và đăng tải nhằm giúp các bạn ôn tập ngữ pháp Tiếng Anh hiệu quả. Bài tập gồm nhiều câu hỏi trắc nghiệm Tiếng Anh có đáp án, mời các bạn tham khảo.

Choose the best answer to complete these following sentences.

1. Astronauts_____ in their spaceship, but they frequently work outside now.

A. were used to stay B. used to stay C. were staying D. had used to stay 2. People _____ that the earth is round before.

A. were not used to believe B. used to believing C. would not use to believe D. did not use to believe 3. Tuberculosis_____ incurable before.

A. use to be thought B. used to be thought C. used to think D. use to think 4. Formerly babies_____ of whooping cough.

A. have died B. used to die C. would die D. both B and C 5. These city girls are used_____ in the field.

A. to work B. used to lie C. would like D. to working 6. Newton_____ scientific books when a boy.

A. used to read B. has read C. had read D. had been reading 7. I am sorry I am not_____ fast.

A. used to drive B. used to driving C. use to drive D. use to driving 8. Frank used to work in a small shop. He_____ A. doesn't any more B. still does C. is now D. had never done anything else 9. Roy Trenton used to work in a small shop. He _____ A. is driving it B. doesn’t drive it any more C. likes it D. didn’t like it 10. Roy Trenton use to drive a taxi. This means he_____ A. use to lie B. used live C. used to living D. used to live 11. I_____ in Jakarta. I've lived here all my life.

A. am used to living B. used to living C. use to live D. am used to live 12. Jane_____ for the telephone company, but now she has a job at the post office.

A. used to working B. used to work C. is used to working D. am used to work 99

Hai An Secondary school English lesson plan for grade 7 13. This work doesn’t bother me. I _____ hard. I've worked hard all my life.

A. used to working B. used to work C. am used to working D. am used to work 14. Dick_____ a moustache, but he doesn't any more. He shaved it off because his wife didn't like it.

A. used to having B. is used to having C. was used to having D. used to have 15. When I was a child, I _____ anyone 40 was old.

A. used to think B. was used to thinking C. used to thinking D. was used to think Đáp án bài tập về USED TO và GET USED TO 1. C 2. D 3. B 4. D 5. C 6. A 7. B 8. A 9. B 10. D 11. A 12. B 13. C 14. D 15. A 16. C 17. D 18. B 19. A 20. B

100